Manual Completo Veronesy

SISTEMA DE "ALTO VACÍO",
MARCA ,
MODELO "LMS 9/V",
No. DE SERIE "KF 1333/00-B".
Í N D I C E
CAPÍTULO 1 COMPONENTES
1.1 CIRCUITO HIDRÁULICO

1.2 CIRCUITO ELÉCTRICO
CAPÍTULO 2 OPERACIÓN
2.1 CAPACIDAD
2.2 OPERACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD
2.3 CONTROL DEL NIVEL
2.4 INSTRUMENTACIÓN
2.5 ALARMAS
2.6 OPERACIÓN EN CONDICIONES ESPECIALES
CAPÍTULO 3 ARRANQUE Y PARO
3.1 ARRANQUE DE LA UNIDAD

3.2 PARO DE LA UNIDAD
3.3 SISTEMA DE VACÍO
3.4 BOMBA DE DESCARGA
CAPÍTULO 4 IDENTIFICACIÓN Y CALIBRACIÓN
4.1 DATOS DE PLACA

4.2 CALIBRACIÓN DE INSTRUMENTOS
4.3 IDENTIFICACIÓN DE BOMBAS
CAPÍTULO 5 BITÁCORA
CAPÍTULO 6 DIBUJOS
6.1 DIAGRAMA DE FLUJO DIBUJO KF1333-01

6.2 ARREGLO GENERAL DIBUJO KF1333-02
6.3 DIAGRAMA ELÉCTRICO DIBUJO KF1333-03
Í N D I C E
CAPÍTULO 7 INFORMACIÓN TÉCNICA
7.01 ALARMA SONORA HIGHLY
7.02 AMPERMETRO / VOLTMETRO TELETERNIK
7.03 BOMBA DE ENGRANES ROPER
7.04 BOTÓN PULSADOR SIEMENS
7.05 BOTÓN PULSADOR DOBLE SIEMENS
7.06 CÁMARA DE DESGASIFICACIÓN
7.07 CARTUCHO ELEMENTO FILTRANTE PFAUDLER
7.08 CONTACTOR MAGNÉTICO SIEMENS
7.09 CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE CUTLER-HAMMER
7.10 DETECTOR DE FLUJO McDONNELL
7.11 ELECTRONIVEL KOBOLD
7.12 ENFRIADOR STOKES VACUUM
7.13 ESPREA (BOQUILLA) SPRAYING
7.14 FILTRO DE LÍNEA SPRAYING
7.15 FILTRO PULIDOR
7.16 INTERRUPTOR TERMOMAGNÉTICO BTICINO
7.17 INTERRUPTOR TERMOMAGNÉTICO SIEMENS
7.18 LÁMPARA INDICADORA SIEMENS
7.19 MANÓMETRO / VACUÓMETRO METRÓN
7.20 MEDIDOR DE FLUJO FLUID POWER
7.21 PIRÓMETRO DE CONTROL TELETERNIK
7.22 RELEVADOR SCHRACK
7.23 RELEVADOR BIMETÁLICO SIEMENS
7.24 SELECTOR CUTLER-HAMMER
7.25 TABLILLAS (CLEMAS BLOCK) SIEMENS
7.26 VACUÓMETRO HASTINGS
7.27 VÁLVULA DE BOLA WORCESTER
7.28 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE ASCO
7.29 TRAMPA DE ACEITE
CAPÍTULO 8 MANUAL SISTEMA DE VACÍO STOKES VACUUM

SISTEMA DE ALTO VACÍO
MODELO LMS 9/V

No. DE SERIE KF 1333/00-B
CAPÍTULO 1
CAPÍTULO 1
COMPONENTES
1.2 CIRCUITO ELÉCTRICO

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 1
POS. DESCRIPCIÓN MARCA CATÁLOGO

1 VÁLVULA DE BOLA WORCESTER ∅ 2”
3 VÁLVULA DE BOLA URREA ∅ ½”
4 VÁLVULA DE GLOBO WORCESTER ∅ 2”
5 FILTRO DE CANASTA SPRAYING AA-124-NYB
6 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE N.C. ASCO 8210B56 N.C.
7 DETECTOR DE FLUJO McDONNELL FS8-W
8 BOMBA DE ENGRANES ROPER 1AM40
9 VÁLVULA DE BOLA WORCESTER ∅ ¾”
10 CALENTADOR ELÉCTRICO CHROMALOX 128 KW
11 VÁLVULA DE BOLA WORCESTER ∅ ½”
12 TERMOSTATO DE ALARMA ” CAEM 0 110 ºC
13 PIRÓMETRO DE CONTROL ” TELETERNIK 50/80
14 TERMÓMETRO METRÓN 0 – 100 ºC
15 MANÓMETRO METRÓN 0 – 7 Kg/cm²
16 FILTRO PULIDOR 3X9
CARTUCHOS ( 27 ) PFAUDLER 0.5 MICRONES
17 VÁLVULA DE VENTEO WORCESTER ∅ ½”
18 VÁLVULA DE DRENE WORCESTER ∅ ½”
19 FILTRO DE LÍNEA SPRAYING AA-124-ML-SS-AL
21 BANCO DE ESPREAS BE-146
ESPREAS (8) SPRAYING D 08 / DC 46
ESPREAS (8) SPRAYING D 10 / DC 46
22 CÁMARA DE DESGASIFICACIÓN LM-900
23 ELECTRONIVEL DE ALTO NIVEL KOBOLT NKP-2401
24 ELECTRONIVEL DE BAJO NIVEL KOBOLT NKP-2401
25 VÁLVULA DE DRENE WORCESTER ∅ ¾”
27 BOMBA DE ENGRANES ROPER 1AM40
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 1
POS. DESCRIPCIÓN MARCA CATÁLOGO

28 VÁLVULA CHECK URREA ∅ 2”
29 VÁLVULA DE MUESTREO WORCESTER ∅ ½”
31 MEDIDOR DE FLUJO FLUID POWER 981
34 VÁLVULA WORCESTER ∅ ½”
35 VACUÓMETRO ” HASTINGS VT-6
36 VACUÓMETRO METRÓN 0 – 1 Atm.
38 SISTEMA DE VACÍO STOKES VACUUM SV 1721DD BP
39 REFORZADOR (BOOSTER) STOKES VACUUM 615-4V7
40 BOMBA DE ALTO VACÍO STOKES VACUUM 212-J – 11
41 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE CONTROL LUBRIC. ASCO DFX8030A17V18974
42 SEPARADOR DE ACEITE
44 COLECTOR DE ACEITE
47 TABLERO DE CONTROL
48 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE N.A. ASCO ∅ ½” 8210G2
50 VÁLVULA ROMPEDORA DE ESPUMA

51 CEDAZO
A ALIMENTACIÓN ACEITE ∅ 2”
B ALIMENTACIÓN AUXILIAR ∅ 2”
C DESCARGA ACEITE ∅ 2”
D CONEXIÓN PARA AUXILIAR DE VACÍO ∅ 4”
E DESCARGA DE GASES ∅ 2”
” MONTADO EN EL TABLERO DE CONTROL

MODELO LMS 9/V
CAPÍTULO 1
MODELO LMS 9/V
CAPÍTULO 1
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
CAPÍTULO 2
OPERACIÓN
2.1 CAPACIDAD
2.1.1 CAPACIDAD NOMINAL
2.1.2 CAPACIDAD DE OPERACIÓN
2.2.1 DISEÑO
2.2.2 RESISTENCIA DIELÉCTRICA
2.2.3 VACÍO
2.2.4 FILTROS
2.2.5 ESPREAS
2.2.6 PRESIÓN DE OPERACIÓN
2.2.7 ACEITE DEL SISTEMA DE VACÍO
2.3 CONTROL DE NIVEL
2.3.1 INTERRUPTOR DE BAJO NIVEL
2.3.2 INTERRUPTOR DE ALTO NIVEL
2.4.1 INSTRUMENTOS DE FLUJO
2.4.2 INSTRUMENTOS DE CONTROL DE TEMPERATURA
2.4.3 INSTRUMENTOS DE CONTROL DE VACÍO
2.5 ALARMAS
2.5.1 ALARMA POR ALTO AMPERAJE
2.5.2 ALARMA POR ALTA TEMPERATURA
2.5.3 ALARMA POR ALTO NIVEL
2.5.4 ALARMA POR ALTO VACÍO
2.5.5 ALARMA SONORA
2.6.1 PRESENCIA DE ESPUMA EN LA CÁMARA DE DESGASIFICACIÓN
2.6.2 SUCCIÓN DE ACEITE DE TRANSFORMADOR BAJO VACÍO
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.1 CAPACIDAD
2.1.1 CAPACIDAD NOMINAL
Por capacidad nominal, se entiende la capacidad de la unidad operándola sin vacío.
2.1.2 CAPACIDAD DE OPERACIÓN
Para determinar la capacidad de operación, es necesario tener en cuenta los siguientes conceptos:
q Sin modificar la posición de las válvulas ( 1, 2, 4 ), aumentará o disminuirá la alimentación

de aceite a la unidad, dependiendo de la localización del tanque o transformador del que se
esté succionando el aceite.
q Si se opera la unidad a alta temperatura, es posible que suba el nivel en la cámara de

desgasificación ( 22 ), bajando el nivel del tanque o transformador en el que se esté
recirculando.
q Si se opera la unidad a baja capacidad, faltará sello en el sistema, disminuirá el vacío en la

cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ), el espreado del aceite no será el normal y el aceite saldrá
de la unidad con algo de espuma (presencia de burbujas de aire en la descarga de aceite
tratado).
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
Para una eficiente operación de la unidad, es necesario tener en cuenta las siguientes normas:
2.2.1 DISEÑO
La unidad modelo LMS 9/V, está diseñada para la purificación de aceites aislantes
de transformador y el tratamiento del aceite se realiza por recirculación.
Usted deberá recircular el aceite, hasta lograr obtener los resultados de purificación deseados.
2.2.2 RESISTENCIA DIELÉCTRICA

El tratamiento efectuado por la unidad, tiene como fin el aumentar la resistencia dieléctrica del
aceite aislante.
2.2.3 VACÍO
Para lograr el aumento en la resistencia dieléctrica, se esprea el aceite aislante en la cámara de
desgasificación ( 22 ), la cual se somete a vacío; el grado de vacío depende de diversos factores.
Cuando el vacío es bajo, como sucede al empezar y al terminar, el aceite descargado de la unidad
presenta espuma.
Si el vacío es muy alto, se presenta el problema de que la bomba de descarga ( 27 ) no tiene la

succión adecuada de aceite y si el vacío es muy bajo, se tendrá una succión de aceite demasiado
alta y probablemente se detecte burbuja de aire en el aceite que se está descargando de la unidad.
2.2.4 FILTROS
Si durante la operación normal de la unidad, aumenta la presión ( Manómetros 15 y

20 ), significa que alguno de los filtros está saturado, deberá parar el equipo y proceder de la
siguiente forma:
q Revise el filtro de línea o filtro de espreas ( 19 ) y proceda a su limpieza usando aire a
presión y/o solventes, nunca use cepillos de alambre.
q Revise el filtro pulidor de cartuchos ( 16 ) y en caso necesario proceda a cambiar los

cartuchos, estos elementos filtrantes no son reutilizables.
q Revise el filtro de malla ( 51 ) y proceda a su limpieza usando aire a presión y/o solventes,
nunca use cepillos de alambre.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.2.5 ESPREAS
Si durante la operación normal de la unidad, aumenta la presión ( Manómetro 20 ) en el

banco de espreas ( 21 ), se deberá parar todo el equipo, proceder a la limpieza del filtro de línea
( 19 ) y en caso necesario desmontar las boquillas del banco y procediendo a limpiarlas con aire
a presión, así mismo deberá limpiar periódicamente las espreas de la válvula para romper
espuma ( 50 ).
2.2.6 PRESIÓN DE OPERACIÓN
La unidad modelo LMS 9/V, tiene dos puntos de medición de presión, en ambos se
suministran manómetros de lectura en sitio:
q El primer punto de medición ( Manómetro 15 ) se localiza en la línea de alimentación

del filtro pulidor ( 16 ), la presión ideal de operación es de 4 Kg/cm2 y nunca debe superar
el valor de 4.5 Kg/cm2.
q El segundo punto de medición ( Manómetro 20 ) se localiza en la línea de alimentación

del banco de espreas de la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ), la presión ideal de operación es
de 3.5 Kg/cm2 y nunca debe superar el valor de 4 Kg/cm2.
2.2.7 ACEITE DE LA BOMBA DE VACÍO
Se deberá tener especial cuidado en que el aceite del sistema de vacío ( 39, 40 ) no esté
contaminado y que el nivel en el cárter de la bomba sea el correcto. Cuando sea necesario
deberá hacerse un cambio de aceite utilizando invariablemente el aceite adecuado.
El operador deberá asegurarse que el nivel en la mirilla del cárter de la bomba de alto vacío y
del soplador o booster sean los correctos y que estén lubricando adecuadamente.
Asimismo, el operador deberá asegurarse que la válvula solenoide para el control de lubricación
( 41 / EV2 ) opere correctamente y que la lubricación sea la adecuada.
Cualquier problema que llegara a presentarse en el sistema de vacío ( 39, 40 ) por falta de
eficiente lubricación, no está cubierto por la garantía del equipo.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.3 CONTROL DE NIVEL
En la operación de la unidad modelo LMS 9/V, para una correcta y confiable

operación, es muy importante el control del nivel del aceite en el interior de la cámara de
desgasificación ( 22 ).
Si el nivel de la cámara es muy bajo, se rompe el vacío, provocando que el aceite sea descargado
con espuma o burbuja de aire.
Si el nivel en la cámara llega a ser muy alto, significa que baja el nivel del aceite en el
transformador y si este nivel sube en exceso se presentarán importantes problemas con la
lubricación del sistema de vacío, ya que el mismo aceite aislante contaminará el aceite lubricante
del sistema de vacío ( 39, 40 ).
Para lograr un adecuado control del nivel del aceite, el equipo está provisto de dos interruptores de
nivel ( 23, 24 ) localizados en el interior de la cámara:
q Un interruptor de nivel ( 24 / IBN ) para control de bajo nivel.

q Un interruptor de nivel ( 23 / IAN ) para control de alto nivel.
2.3.1 INTERRUPTOR DE BAJO NIVEL ( 24 / IBN )
Cuando el nivel en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) es más bajo que el nivel mínimo, este
interruptor está abierto con señal de paro a la bomba de descarga ( 27 ) impidiendo que la
cámara se vacíe completamente, de tal forma que se asegura la existencia de un sello adecuado y
que no se rompa el vacío.
Cuando el nivel de aceite en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) es más alto que el nivel

mínimo, este interruptor cierra y activa un retardador.
El timer retardador está programado en el PL C y actúa como retardador de la señal de arranque

de la bomba de descarga ( 27 ).
Al recibir el timer retardador la señal del interruptor de bajo nivel ( 24 / IBN ) se activa y
empieza su tiempo de conteo. Esta señal se retarda para evitar que la bomba de descarga ( 27 )
llegue a estar entrando y saliendo continuamente.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.3.2 INTERRUPTOR DE ALTO NIVEL ( 23 / IAN )
Si el nivel del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) sube del máximo nivel, opera la
alarma por alto nivel, y se realiza la siguiente secuencia:
q Manda señal de paro a la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ) por un tiempo controlado por el PLC.
q Abre durante el mismo tiempo la válvula solenoide de la válvula re rompimiento de

espuma ( 49 ).
q Al terminar el tiempo de paro, nuevamente se energiza la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ) y si

subsiste la condición de alto nivel se efectúa otro tiempo de paro igual, hasta que el nivel del
aceite baje en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ).
q Durante toda esta secuencia, la bomba de descarga ( 27 ) continua trabajando, al menos que
se presente una condición de bajo nivel, en cuyo caso sí pararía esta bomba.
IMPORTANTE
q Si al arrancar el equipo el nivel del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) está más

alto que el mínimo nivel, automáticamente empieza la secuencia para el arranque de la
bomba de descarga ( 27 ), pudiéndose presentar una condición de alto nivel.
q Para una operación correcta y confiable es muy importante asegurarse que todo el sistema de
control de nivel actúe correctamente.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
La unidad modelo LMS 9/V, cuenta con la siguiente instrumentación:
2.4.1 INSTRUMENTOS DE FLUJO
Se instalaron los siguientes instrumentos de flujo:
q Una válvula solenoide ( 6 ) normalmente cerrada, instalada en la línea de alimentación del

equipo, la cual actúa como una protección de cierre, aislando el sistema cuando no está
operando, ya sea por voluntad del operador o por la actuación de alguna de las alarmas.
q Un detector de flujo ( 7 ), instalado en la línea de alimentación del equipo, el cual actúa

como una protección de “no-flujo”, condicionando la entrada del calentador eléctrico ( 10 ).
q El mismo detector de flujo ( 7 ), por medio de una señal retardada en el PL C es usado como
instrumento detector de alarma por falta de flujo, con señal de paro a la unidad.
q Un filtro de línea o filtro de espreas ( 19 ), instalado en la línea de alimentación de la

cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ), a fin de retener sólidos y de esta forma proteger las
boquillas del banco de espreas ( 21 ).
2.4.2 INSTRUMENTOS DE CONTROL DE TEMPERATURA
Se instalaron los siguientes instrumentos de control y medición de temperatura:
q Un termómetro de lectura en sitio ( 14 ) localizado en la línea de salida del calentador

eléctrico ( 10 / CR ).
q Un pirómetro de control ( 13 / PC ), instalado en el tablero de control, el cual actúa como

regulador de la temperatura de proceso, condicionando la entrada del calentador
eléctrico ( 10 / CR ), según la temperatura seleccionada por el operador.
q Un termostato de emergencia ( 12 / TE ), instalado en el interior del calentador, el cual se

surte precalibrado en fábrica a 60 ºC, protegiendo los calentadores eléctricos ( 10 / CR )
por sobretemperatura y actúa como alarma con señal de paro.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.4.3 INSTRUMENTOS DE CONTROL DE VACÍO
Se instalaron los siguientes instrumentos de control y medición del vacío:
q Una válvula manual ( 34 ) para el corte “manual” del vacío.
q Un vacuómetro ( 36 ) de medición, con lectura en la línea, graduado en escala de 0 a 760

mm de Hg.
q Un vacuómetro ( 39 ) de medición con lectura en el tablero de control, graduado en escala

de 0 militorr a 1 atm.
Este instrumento es de “precisión” y se entrega calibrado para asegurar su correcta y precisa

medición del vacío.
q Una válvula de bola ( 33 ) para aislar, a selección del operador, el sistema de vacío.
q Una válvula solenoide ( 41 / EV2 ) localizada en el control interno de la bomba de vacío

( 40 ), para el control de la lubricación.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.5 ALARMAS
2.5.1 ALARMA POR ALTO AMPERAJE

Los motores que forman la unidad están debidamente protegidos y si alguno de éstos llegara a
tomar un amperaje mayor al normal, la protección térmica actúa.
Al actuar la protección térmica de alguno de los motores, se presenta una condición de

ALARMA , la cual para todo el equipo y se ilumina el foco de PILOTO ALARMAS en el
tablero y la luz ROJA correspondiente en el diagrama localizado en el exterior del tablero de
control.
En este caso, el operador debe revisar el frente del tablero de control para detectar la protección
térmica que actuó y revisar el motor correspondiente antes de restablecer. Para restablecer,
apriete el botón respectivo en el tablero de control.
El fabricante entrega el equipo con la protección térmica de los motores debidamente calibrados
para restablecer manualmente y el operador deberá revisar que siempre permanezcan así.
2.5.2 ALARMA POR ALTA TEMPERATURA
El calentador eléctrico ( 10 / CR ) tiene diferentes elementos para su control y protección:
q En la línea de alimentación está instalada una válvula eléctrica o detector de flujo de

protección de no flujo ( 7 / DF ), este instrumento protege el calentador abriendo su
circuito eléctrico cuando no hay flujo y el operador debe revisar que opere correctamente ya
que eventualmente podría llegar a perder su calibración.
Cuando la válvula eléctrica de protección de no flujo ( 7 / DF ) detecta el paso de aceite,

manda una señal al timer el cual retarda la entrada de los calentadores. El timer retardador
es de 1 minuto y se programa en el PL C.
q El control y la medición de la temperatura del aceite sujeto a tratamiento, es realizado por

un pirómetro de control ( 13 / PC ) y un termostato de emergencia ( 12 / TE ) con
punto de medición a la salida del aceite del calentador eléctrico ( 10 / CR ), los cuales se
encuentran instalados en el tablero de mando:
Cuando la temperatura del aceite llega a la temperatura a la cual se calibró el pirómetro de

control ( 13 / PC ), se abre el circuito eléctrico del calentador.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
El operador debe de calibrar el pirómetro de control ( 13 / PC ) fijando la máxima

temperatura del aceite (normalmente 45 °C).
Si eventualmente fallaran las protecciones del calentador antes mencionadas, el equipo está
provisto de un termostato de alarma o emergencia ( 12 / TE ).
El termostato de alarma o emergencia ( 12 / TE ) es calibrado en fábrica

a 60 ºC. Recomendamos no variar su calibración y el operador deberá revisar que su
calibración es la adecuada y que actúa correctamente.
2.5.3 ALARMA POR ALTO NIVEL

Si el nivel del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) sube del máximo nivel, opera la
alarma por alto nivel, y se realiza la siguiente secuencia:
q Manda señal de paro a la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ) por un tiempo controlado por el PLC.
q Abre durante el mismo tiempo la válvula solenoide de la válvula re rompimiento de

espuma ( 49 ).

subsiste la condición de alto nivel se efectúa otro tiempo de paro igual, hasta que el nivel del
aceite baje en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ).
q Durante toda esta secuencia, la bomba de descarga ( 27 ) continua trabajando, al menos que
se presente una condición de bajo nivel, en cuyo caso sí pararía esta bomba.
CAUSA REMEDIO
1. La alimentación se hace en exceso y la Reduzca la alimentación a la unidad con la
bomba de descarga ( 27 ) no alcanza a válvula de alimentación ( 4 ) y de control de
descargar el aceite. regulación ( 26 ).
2. La bomba de descarga ( 27 ) no está dando Revise la regulación de la válvula de control de
la suficiente capacidad para descargar flujo localizada en la parte inferior de la cámara
adecuadamente el aceite de la cámara de de desgasificación ( 26 ).
desgasificación ( 22 ). Revise la bomba de descarga ( 27 ).
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
CAUSA REMEDIO
3. La bomba de descarga ( 27 ) no opera. Revise la bomba, el sistema eléctrico y el

interruptor de bajo nivel ( 24 / IBN ).
4. Se presenta la señal de alarma antes de que el
nivel de aceite en la cámara de vacío ( 22 ) Revise el interruptor de alto nivel ( 23 / IAN ).
llegue al máximo nivel.
5. Si se presenta injustificadamente una Revise en el PL C la calibración del timer
condición de alarma por alto nivel en la retardador, probablemente está ajustado a un
cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ). tiempo mayor que el indicado.
2.5.4 ALARMA POR FALTA DE FLUJO
Si durante la operación de la unidad se detecta falta de flujo durante 25 segundos seguidos, se

presenta una condición de paro.
El detector de flujo ( 7 / DF ) localizado en la línea de alimentación de aceite a la unidad tiene

dos funciones:
En un primer tiempo, actúa como detector de flujo, como protección de los calentadores,
condicionando su entrada a la presencia de flujo en la línea de alimentación, señal que es
retardada en la programación del PL C. El timer retardador es de 1 minuto y se programa en
el PL C.
NOTA IMPORTANTE
Si durante la operación de la unidad se presenta una condición de ALARMA, el equipo parará
y para restablecer, antes de pulsar el botón de restablecer ( B 4 ) deberá posicionar el selector
( S 1 ) en la posición 0) OFF para evitar el arranque inmediato de la bomba de alto vacío y
del reforzador o booster.
2.5.5 ALARMA SONORA
Cuando se presenta una condición de ALARMA, se produce la correspondiente señal óptica en

el tablero y acústica que acciona la alarma sonora.
Para silenciar la alarma sonora, el operador deberá pulsar una vez el botón para restablecer
( B3 ).
En ese momento se silencia la alarma sonora, permaneciendo la correspondiente señal óptica

hasta que se atienda la condición que provocó la condición de alarma.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.6.1 PRESENCIA DE ESPUMA EN LA CÁMARA DE DESGASIFICACIÓN
En los casos en los que el equipo forme espuma en exceso, deberá operar la unidad teniendo en
consideración las siguientes recomendaciones del fabricante:
1. Reduzca la presión des esperado del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación, abriendo

totalmente la válvula del by-pass de la bomba de alimentación ( 9 ) .
2. Si es necesario, reduzca la alimentación de aceite al equipo, auxiliándose de la válvula de

alimentación ( 1 ).
3. Abra la válvula manual rompedora de espuma ( 48 ) .
4. Auxiliándose de la observación de la mirilla, controle el nivel del aceite en la cámara de

desgasificación ( 22 ).
Si no obstante seguir estas recomendaciones, el nivel del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación

( 22 ) sube del máximo nivel, opera la alarma por alto nivel, y se realiza la siguiente
secuencia:
q Manda señal de paro a la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ) por un tiempo controlado por

el PLC.
q Abre durante el mismo tiempo la válvula solenoide de la válvula solenoide de rompimiento

de espuma ( 49 ).

subsiste la condición de alto nivel se efectúa otro tiempo de paro igual, hasta que el nivel
del aceite baje en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ).
q Durante toda esta secuencia, la bomba de descarga ( 27 ) continua trabajando, al menos

que se presente una condición de bajo nivel, en cuyo caso sí pararía esta bomba.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 2
2.6.2 SUCCIÓN DE ACEITE DE TRANSFORMADOR BAJO VACÍO

Cuando se opera la unidad succionando aceite de un transformador sometido a vacío, se
presentarán las siguientes condiciones:
1. La succión efectiva de aceite de la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ).
2. Al reducirse la succión efectiva baja considerablemente la alimentación de aceite a la

unidad y por lo mismo el espreado del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación (22 ) se
realiza también a menor presión.
3. Las condiciones mencionadas en los dos puntos anteriores influirán dependiendo de las
siguientes variables:
Caídas de presión en la línea de alimentación del transformador al equipo.
Grado de vacío en el transformador.
Nivel de aceite en el transformador
4. En estos casos y en toda la operación de la unidad SIEMPRE el operador deberá

verificar que su línea de alimentación de aceite al equipo esté perfectamente sellada,
cualquier entrada de aire en la succión reducirá la succión de la bomba de alimentación
( 8 ) , llegando al caso de que la succión sea nula y no se alimente aceite.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3
CAPÍTULO 3
ARRANQUE Y PARO

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3
Se recomienda seguir los siguientes pasos cada vez que se arranque la unidad:
1. Asegúrese que el voltaje de operación sea el correcto, el equipo está diseñado para operar con
corriente trifásica, 220 Volts, 60 Hz.
2. Revise que las mangueras de alimentación y descarga estén bien conectadas.
3. Revise que el aceite de lubricación del sistema de vacío ( 39, 40 ) no esté contaminado.
4. Revise que el aceite del sistema de vacío ( 39, 40 ) se encuentra a su nivel.
5. Revise que el prefiltro o filtro de canasta ( 5 ) esté limpio.
6. Revise que el filtro de línea o filtro de espreas ( 19 ) esté limpio.
7. Revise que los cartuchos o elementos filtrantes del filtro pulidor ( 16 ) estén en condiciones
de operar.
8. Revise el filtro de malla ( 51 ) instalado en la línea de vacío al transformador.
9. Ajuste la temperatura en el pirómetro de control ( 13 / PC ).
10. Asegúrese que las válvulas de alimentación ( 1, 2 ) estén en posición correcta.
11. Asegúrese que las válvulas de regulación ( 4, 26 ) estén en posición correcta.
12. Asegúrese que las válvulas de muestreo ( 3, 29 ) estén cerradas.
13. Asegúrese que las válvulas de drene ( 11, 18, 25 ) estén cerradas.
14. Es muy importante, que antes de arrancar el operador se asegure que la válvula
localizada en la línea de descarga ( 30 ) esté totalmente abierta, ya que en caso contrario
causaría graves daños a diferentes componentes del equipo.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3
15. Al cerrar el interruptor general ( ITMG ), deberá prenderse el foco de señalización de

energizado ( L-1 ).
16. Al energizarse la unidad, dependiendo del nivel de aceite en la cámara de desgasificación

( 22 ), puede presentarse una condición de alto nivel y/o el arranque automático de la bomba
de descarga ( 27 ). Ver el punto 2.3.2 de este manual.
17. Asegurarse que el sentido de giro de los motores sea el correcto, para lo cual se auxiliará por las
flechas de sentido de rotación instaladas en el guarda bandas de la bomba de vacío y del
reforzador (booster).
18. Seleccione el sistema de alimentación y prepare la unidad:
Posición de las válvulas:
Válvula No. 1 y 2 Una abierta y la otra cerrada, dependiendo de la línea de

alimentación seleccionada.
Válvula No. 4 Debidamente regulada.
Válvula No. 30 Totalmente abierta.
19. Antes de iniciar la alimentación, el operador deberá realizar las siguientes operaciones:
§ Revisar y asegurarse de que todo este conjunto quede perfectamente sellado, cualquier
entrada de aire o pérdida de vacío afectará el funcionamiento de toda la unidad,
presentándose diversos factores negativos, como son: a) Pérdida de vacío, b) Baja
capacidad de alimentación, c) Baja presión en el espreado del aceite.
§ Revisar y asegurarse que el aceite lubricante este en condiciones de servicio y que los
niveles sean los correctos.
§ Revisar y asegurarse que los filtros de línea ( 5, 19 ) estén limpios para operar
satisfactoriamente.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3
20. Arranque el sistema de vacío ( 39 y 40 / S-1 ).
Este selector es de tres posiciones:
q Posición Paro.
q Posición Arranque únicamente de la bomba de alto vacío.
q Posición Arranque de la bomba de vacío y disponible el soplador.
21. Pulse el botón de arranque ( B-2 ).
Por accionamiento del PL C, se realizará la siguiente secuencia:
q Arranque de la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ).
q Disponibilidad de la bomba de descarga ( 27 ), su arranque dependerá del nivel del aceite

en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) y por lo tanto de la señal del interruptor de bajo
nivel ( 24 / IBN ).
q Se energiza y abre la válvula solenoide de corte de alimentación ( 5 / EV-1 ), localizada

en la línea de alimentación.
22. Cierre el circuito de calentadores ( S-2 ).
q Posición Paro.
q Posición Primera sección del calentador 1.
q Posición Segunda sección del calentador 1.
23. Si el operador lo requiere, podrá cerrar el circuito de calentadores ( S-3 ).
q Posición Paro.
q Posición Primera sección del calentador 2.
q Posición Segunda sección del calentador 2.

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3
24. Estabilice el equipo, o sea, controle que el nivel de aceite en la mirilla de la cámara de
desgasificación ( 22 ) permanezca constante, operación para la cual deberá atenerse a las
siguientes recomendaciones:
q Controle la alimentación regulando la válvula de regulación ( 4 ) para lograr que el nivel
de aceite sea constante, o sea, que la misma cantidad de aceite se alimente y se descargue de
la unidad y teniendo especial cuidado de que la presión en el manómetro del banco de
espreas ( 20 ) sea lo más cercana posible a los 3.5 Kg/cm².
q La descarga usualmente permanece constante.
q Si por falta de flujo en la alimentación se presenta una condición de que el nivel de aceite
baje en cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) o sea que la descarga sea mayor que la
alimentación o una condición de baja presión en el manómetro ( 20 ), el operador deberá
obligatoriamente de recircular aceite controlando válvula de recirculación ( 30 / 32 ).
q Es importante, que el operador regule debidamente la alimentación de aceite al equipo y su
recirculación a la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ), operación que deberá realizar mediante la
válvula de recirculación ( 9 ) y con esta última válvula también se auxiliará para obtener
la presión ideal de operación.
25. q Con la adecuada regulación de la válvula de recirculación ( 9 ), el operador deberá
lograr los siguientes resultados:
a) Obtener una presión constante en el manómetro localizado en la línea de alimentación
del banco de espreas ( Manómetro: 15 / 20 , la cual deberá ser de lo más cercana
posible a los 4 Kg/cm².
b) Retornar el suficiente aceite a la línea de alimentación de la bomba con la cual se esté
alimentando el equipo ( Bomba: 8 ), para asegurar su debida lubricación, evitando que
por falta de flujo se dañen sus componentes.
26. Revise que las presiones sean correctas, manómetros ( 15 y 20 ), en operación normal las
presiones deberán ser las siguientes:
q El primer punto de medición ( Manómetro 15 ) se localiza en la línea de alimentación
del filtro pulidor ( 16 ), la presión ideal de operación es de 4 Kg/cm2 y nunca debe
superar el valor de 4.5 Kg/cm2.
q El segundo punto de medición ( Manómetro 20 ) se localiza en la línea de
alimentación del banco de espreas de la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ), la presión
normal de operación es de 3 Kg/cm2 y nunca debe superar el valor de 3.5 Kg/cm2.
27. Revise que el vacío sea el correcto. Revise que todas las protecciones de los niveles actúan
correctamente y que la operación de la unidad sea satisfactoria.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3

Se recomienda seguir los siguientes pasos cada vez que se pare la unidad:
1. Regrese el selector de tres posiciones ( S-2 ) a la posición de paro de los

calentadores .
2. Cierre la válvula de alimentación ( 1 o 2 ).
3. En este momento, el vacío en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) se reduce.
4. Pare la bomba de alimentación ( B-1 ).
5. Pare el sistema de vacío ( 39 / 40 ).
q Primero pase el interruptor de tres posiciones ( S-1 ) de posición a la posición

, parará el reforzador o booster.
q Espere aproximadamente UN MINUTO y pase el interruptor a la posición ,

parará la bomba de vacío. Esta espera es de la mayor importancia para protección del
sistema.
q Actuará el control interno de la bomba de vacío, abriendo la válvula solenoide de corte
de vacío ( 34 ) y se romperá automáticamente el vacío.
6. Abra el interruptor general ( ITMG ).
7. Desconecte las mangueras de alimentación y descarga.
8. Prepare la unidad para que quede lista para entrar en operación nuevamente.
9. Si lo desea podrá descargar completamente la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) apretando

el botón de arranque manual de la bomba de descarga ( B-3 )
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 3
La unidad modelo LMS 9/V, está prevista para que usted pueda operar el sistema de
vacío de forma independiente del sistema de purificación de aceite, o sea que usted podrá arrancar y
operar el sistema de vacío aún cuando no esté purificando aceite.
Para esta operación utilizará el selector de tres posiciones del sistema de vacío ( S-1 ) y
dependiendo de su posición sucederá lo siguiente:
• Posición Paro.
• Posición Arranque únicamente de la bomba de alto vacío.
• Posición Arranque de la bomba de alto vacío y disponible el soplador.

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 4
La unidad modelo LMS 9/V, está prevista para que durante la operación normal de
la unidad, la bomba quede en disponible automáticamente por señal del PL C.
Normalmente, al parar el equipo, la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) queda con un cierto nivel, el

cual actúa como sello de vacío.
Si el operador desea el total vaciado de la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ), lo realizará a presión,

utilizando la bomba de descarga ( 27 ), accionando el botón pulsador ( B-3 ), el cual para
protección de la misma bomba no es autosostenido.
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 4
CAPÍTULO 4
IDENTIFICACIÓN Y CALIBRACIÓN
4.1 DATOS DE PLACA

SEÑALIZACIÓN DE ALARMAS

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 4
4.1 DATOS DE PLACA
EQUIPO
Marca
Modelo LMS 9/ V
No. de Serie KF 1333/00-B
SISTEMA DE VACÍO
Marca STOKES VACUUM

Modelo SV 1721DD BP
No. de Serie 91040E1299
Lote No. 7874714

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 4
Identificación Instrumento Calibración
RT1 Relevador térmico de M1 (Bomba de vacío). 22 A.

RT2 Relevador térmico de M2 (Bomba del enfriador). 7 A.
RT3 Relevador térmico de M3 (Reforzador - booster). 25 A.
RT4 Relevador térmico de M4 (Bomba de alimentación). 14 A.
RT5 Relevador térmico de M4 (Bomba de descarga). 22 A.
PC Pirómetro de control. 50 °C
TE Termostato de alarma. 60 °C
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 4
Alimentación Descarga Vacío Reforzadora

(8) ( 30 ) ( 40 ) ( 10 )
STOKES STOKES
MARCA ROPER ROPER
VACUUM VACUUM
MODELO 1AM40 1AM40 212-J 615-V07
No. SERIE G-386654 G-386657 91040E1299 91040E1299
MOTOR
SIEMENS SIEMENS BALDOR LEESON
(MARCA)
No. SERIE L99T0015M333 H99T0016M157 F1099 190037.12
POTENCIA
5 7.5 7.5 10
(HP)
VOLTAJE 220 220 220 220
No. DE
3 3 3 3
FASES
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
CAPÍTULO 5
BITÁCORA DE OPERACIÓN / MANTENIMIENTO
SISTEMA DE "ALTO VACÍO",
MARCA ,
MODELO "LMS 9/V",
No. DE SERIE "KF 1333/00-B".
MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 5
FOLIO No. __________

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 6
CAPÍTULO 6
DIBUJOS
6.1 DIAGRAMA DE FLUJO

DIBUJO No. KF 1333-01
6.2 ARREGLO GENERAL

6.3 DIAGRAMA ELÉCTRICO

MODELO LMS 9/V

CAPÍTULO 7
CAPÍTULO 7
INFORMACIÓN TÉCNICA
No. DESCRIPCIÓN MARCA

7.01 ALARMA SONORA HIGHLY
7.02 AMPERMETRO / VOLTMETRO TELETERNIK
7.03 BOMBA DE ENGRANES ROPER
7.04 BOTÓN PULSADOR SIEMENS
7.05 BOTÓN PULSADOR DOBLE SIEMENS
7.06 CÁMARA DE DESGASIFICACIÓN
7.07 CARTUCHO ELEMENTO FILTRANTE PFAUDLER
7.08 CONTACTOR MAGNÉTICO SIEMENS
7.09 CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE CUTLER-HAMMER
7.10 DETECTOR DE FLUJO McDONNELL
7.11 ELECTRONIVEL KOBOLD
7.12 ENFRIADOR STOKES VACUUM
7.13 ESPREA (BOQUILLA) SPRAYING
7.14 FILTRO DE LÍNEA SPRAYING
7.15 FILTRO PULIDOR
7.16 INTERRUPTOR TERMOMAGNÉTICO BTICINO
7.17 INTERRUPTOR TERMOMAGNÉTICO SIEMENS
7.18 LÁMPARA INDICADORA SIEMENS
7.19 MANÓMETRO / Vacuómetro METRÓN
7.20 MEDIDOR DE FLUJO FLUID POWER
7.21 PIRÓMETRO DE CONTROL TELETERNIK
7.22 RELEVADOR SCHRACK
7.23 RELEVADOR BIMETÁLICO SIEMENS
7.24 SELECTOR CUTLER-HAMMER
7.25 TABLILLAS (CLEMAS BLOCK) SIEMENS
7.26 Vacuómetro HASTINGS
7.27 VÁLVULA DE BOLA WORCESTER
7.28 TRAMPA DE ACEITE
Industrial Teleternik, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Andrés Molina Enríquez 906
Col. San Andrés Tetepilco, México D.F. 09440
Tel. 56-74-7479 Fax. 55-32-19-58
EMAIL: itk_sa@yahoo.com.mx
www.cuasar.com/personales/teleternik/
Industrial Teleternik Pone a sus ordenes toda la gama de instrumentos digitales

para tableros.
Los instrumentos ITK son 100% nacionales, lo cual nos permite tener refacciones,
hacer producciones especiales de acuerdo a las necesidades de sus clientes y tiempos
de entrega cortos.
Si se interesa en distribuir nuestros instrumentos o si tiene alguna duda acerca de
nuestros productos, por favor no dude en contactarnos.
Medidores de Tensión (Vóltmetro) Medidores de Corriente (Ampérmetro)

Corriente Continua Modelo VCC Corriente Alterna Modelo ACA
Escala Resolución Exactitud Sobreprotección Escala Resolución Exactitud Sobreprotección
(±)0-199.9 mV 100 mV ±600 mV 0-1.999 A 1 mA 60 A
(±)0-1.999 V 1 mV ±6v 0-19.99 A 10 mA ±(0.2% de Lect. + 60 A
(±)0-19.99 V 10 mV ±(0.1% de Lect.+ 3 ±60 V * 0-5 A 10 mA 3Dig.) 10.00 A
(±)0-199.9 V 100 mV Dig.) ±500 V ** 0-20 A 100 mA 30.00 A
(±)0-600 V 1V * La escala de entrada es de cero a 5 A, si desea otra magnitud dar la relación
del TC
** La escala es directa
Medidores de Frecuencia (Hz)

Corriente Alterna Modelo VCA
Escala Resolución Exactitud Sobreprotección Escala Resolución Exactitud
0-1.999 V 1 mV 6V 15.0 -150 0.01 Hz ±(0.2% de Lect. + 3 Dig.)
0-19.99 V 10 mV ±(0.2% de Lect. + 3 60 V
0-199.9 V 100 mV Dig.) 500 V
0-600 V 1V 800 V
Medidores de Corriente (Ampérmetro) Medidores de Resistencia (OHM)

Corriente Continua Modelo ACC Modelo OHM
Escala Resolución Exactitud Sobreprotecció Escala Resolución Exactitud
n
(±)0-1.999 mA 1 µA ± 6 mA 0-199.9 Ù 0.1 Ù
(±)0-19.99 mA 10 ìA ± 60 mA 0-1999 Ù 1Ù
(±)0-199.9 mA 100 ìA ±(0.1% de Lect. + 3 ±500 mA 0-19.99 KÙ 10 Ù ±(0.2% de Lect. + 3 Dig.)
(±)0-1.999 A 1 mA Dig.) ±6A 0-199.9 KÙ 100 Ù
(±)0-199.99 A 10 mA ± 30 A 0-1.999 MÙ 1 KÙ
Medidores de Potencia (Wáttmetro) Medidores de Volt Ampers Reactivos

Monofásico Modelo W1F Monofásico Modelo VAR1F
Exactitud Señal Exactitud Señal
Escala Para F.P. de 1.0 a 0.5 Tensión Corriente Escala Para F.P. de 1.0 a 0.5 Tensión Corriente
0-600 W 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A 0-600 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A
0-1200 W ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 120 V.C.A. 10.0 A 0-1200 ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 Dig.) 20 V.C.A. 10.0 A
*Otras Dig.) 120 o 220 V.C.A. 5.0 A * Otras 120 o 220 V.C.A. 5.0 A
*Otras: Según las necesidades del usuario cambiando el valor de T.C. y/o T.P.
Trifásico Modelo W3F3H Trifásico Modelo VAR3F3H

0-1800 W ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 Dig.) 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A 0-1800 ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 Dig.) 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A
*Otras 120 o 220 V.C.A. 5.0 A * Otras 120 o 220 V.C.A. 5.0 A
Trifásico Modelo W3F4H Trifásico Modelo VAR3F4H

0-1800 W ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A 0-1800 ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 Dig.) 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A
*Otras Dig.) 120 o 220 5.0 A * Otras 120 o 220 5.0 A
V.C.A. V.C.A.
Medidor de Angulo de Fase Medidores de Factor de Potencia

Modelo Escala Para F.P. de 1.0 a 0.5 Tensión Corriente Modelo Escala Para F.P. de 1.0 a 0.5 Tensión Corriente
FAS1F 0-60° ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 Dig.) 120 V.C.A. 5.0 A FAC1F 1.00 – 0.5 ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 120 5.0 A
FAS3F 0-60° ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 Dig.) 120 5.0 A FAC3F 1.00 – 0.5 Dig.) V.C.A. 5.0 A
V.C.A. ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3 120
Dig.) V.C.A.
Indicadores y Controladores de Temperatura
Modelo ITP CIT-OFF CIT-OFF-OFF CIT-P CIT-PD

Escala: Termopar J: 0-400 °C
Termopar K: 0-1300 °C
Termopar R: 0-1600 °C
Termopar S: 0-1600 °C
RTD: -100- 0-400 °C
Exactitud ±(0.5% de Lect. + 3
Salidas por Relevador No Aplica 1 NA. NC, 250V, 3 A Dig.)
Tiempo: No Aplica No Aplica 2 NA, NC, 250V, 3A 1 NA, NC, 250V, 3A 1 NA, NC, 250V, 3A
No Aplica 2 – 20 Seg. 2 – 20 Seg.
Escalas Alimentaciones
Los rangos mostrados son considerados como equipos de línea, para Alimentación de línea: 127/220 V.C.A. ±10%, 50/60Hz.
fabricantes de equipo original (OEM), o bien que se requieran escalas Opcionales: 440 V.C.A. ±10%, 50/60 Hz.
intermedias o mayores, favor de indicarlo en el pedido en forma oportuna para Indicarlo al hacer el 12 V.C.C. ± 10%
su fabricación. pedido 24 V.C.C. ± 10%
48 V.C.C. ± 10%
Existen un sin fin de escalas que requieren de accesorios externos como 125 V.C.C. ±10%
transformadores de potencial (TP) o transformadores de corriente (TC) favor 250 V.C.C. ±10%
de indicar estas relaciones al hacer el pedido
Medidores de Velocidad (RPM)
Modelo Tipo de Sensor Escalas Entrada Exactitud

RPMGT Generador Taquimétrico V.C.C.
RPMGT Generador Taquimétrico V.C.A.
RPMSO Sensor Optico Según Necesidades del Usuario Pulsos de C.C. ±(0.2% de Lect. + 3Dig.)
RPMSI Sensor Inductivo Pulsos de C.C.
RPM -HAN-L Sensor Optico 10-1999, 30-9999x10 Pulsos de C.C.
Protector de Motores
Parámetro de Operación PMT-100-220 PMT-100-400

Caía de Fase
Desconexión Inmediata Inmediata
Restablecimiento Al volver la fase Al volver la fase
Retardo 33 mS presionando el reset 33 mS presionando el reset
Sobrecorriente
Desconexión Ajustable por el usuario Ajustable por el usuario
Restablecimiento Al bajar el nivel ajustado Al bajar el nivel ajustado
Retardo Ajustable por el usuario Ajustable por el usuario
Salidas
Relevador de control 1P-2T NA y NC, 3A, 250V 1P-2T NA y NC, 3A, 250V
Relevador de Alarma 1P-2T NA y NC, 3A, 250V 1P-2T NA y NC, 3A, 250V
Frecuencia 50 – 60 Hz 50 – 60 Hz
Señal de tensión entre fases 220 V ± 10% 4400 V ± 10%
Temperatura de operación 0-60 °C
Consumo de energía 5 V.A Max 5 V.A Max
Salidas Analógicas Transductores
Modelo: TRAN - •••

Modelo: ••• SAL – AN Ejemplo: Transductor de tensión de corriente alterna con un rango
Ejemplo: Vóltmetro de Corriente Alterna con salida analógica de 200 V.
Modelo: VCA-SAL-AN Modelo: TRAN-VCA
Todos los equipos que fabrica Industrial Teleternik, S. A. de C.V.
tienen la posibilidad de tener salidas analógicas, adicionales a la
indicación. LÍNEA A ELEGIR:
Para solicitarla debe agregarse el modelo a el equipo deseado.
Características:
Escalas: En función de las necesidades del usuario Modelo Descripción
Salida aislada
Salida: VCC Vóltmetro de Corriente Continua

0-5 V.C.C. con impedancia de 5 KÙ VCA Vóltmetro de Corriente Alterna
0 – 20 mA.C.C. con impedancia de 500 KÙ ACC Ampérmetro de Corriente Continua
4 – 20 mA.C.C. con impedancia de 500 KÙ ACA Ampérmetro de Corriente Alterna
Hz Frecuencimetro
0 – 1 mA.C.C. con impedancia de 5 KÙ
OHM Ohmetro
Exactitud: Variable W1F Wáttmetro Monofásico
Desde (0.1%) hasta (0.5%) W3F3H Wáttmetro 3 Fases 3 Hilos
Dependiendo del equipo seleccionado W3F4H Wáttmetro 3 Fases 4 Hilos
FAS1F Fasimetro Monofásico
FAS3F Fasimetro Trifásico
VAR1F Vármetro Monofásico
VAR3F3H Vármetro 3 Fases 3 Hilos
Salidas de Alarma (1 ó 2)
VAR3F4H Vármetro 3 Fases 4 Hilos
FAC1F Factorimetro Monofásico
FAC3F Factorimetro Trifásico
RPMGT Indicador de Velocidad para Generador
Modelo: ___ - 1AL ó ___ - 2AL
RPMSO Taquimétrico de C.C. ó C.A.
Ejemplo: Vóltmetro de Corriente Alterna con 2 RPMSI Indicador de Velocidad para Sensor Optico
ITP Indicador de Velocidad para Sensor Inductivo
Salidas de alarma
Indicador de Temperatura
Modelo: VCA-2AL
Características: Y/O Cualquier otra variable eléctrica según sus necesidades
Variable a lo largo de la escala.
Salida por relevador : 3 A, 250 V.C.A. (N.A.N.C.) Características:
Ajuste: a través de potenciómetro de 25 vueltas Escalas: En función de las necesidades del usuario.
Exactitud: desde (0.1%) hasta (0.5%). Salidas aislada.
En caso de requerir alarmas los equipos se surtirán en gabinete DIN Salida:
96x96 mm. 0-5 V.C.C. con impedancia de 5 KÙ
Exactitud: Variable desde (0.1%) hasta (0.5%)
Equipo ciego.
Salidas Analógicas Mueble: Gabinete Din 96x96 mm.
Y Nota: En caso de requerir se puede surtir con indicación.
Salidas de Alarma
Transductores
Industrial Teleternik, S.A. de C.V. tiene la línea de Instrumentos
Digitales Portatiles para Laboratorio con una gran exactitud (mayo a
la que ofrecen los equipos análogos del mismo tipo).
La gama de modelos que ofrecemos es la siguiente:
Vóltmetros de Corriente Alterna.

Vóltmetros de Corriente Continua.
Ampérmetro de Corriente Continua
Ampérmetro de Corriente Alterna.
Frecuencimetro
Ohmetro
Wáttmetros Monofásicos y Trifásicos.
Fasímetro.
Vármetros Monofásicos y Trifásicos.
Tacómetros.
Termómetros.
Indicadores de Presión.
Indicadores de Flujo.
Indicadores de Porcentaje.
Características:
Pantalla: Display Luminoso o Cristal Líquido.
Dígitos: 3 ½ Dígitos.
Exactitud: Depende del modelo desde 0.1% hasta
0.5%
Para mayor información técnica favor de consultar la sección de
Resolución: Variable dependiendo del rango seleccionado
Instrumentos Digitales para Tablero donde vienen las
Alimentación: 127 V.C.A. ± 10%
especificaciones en particular de cada equipo.
Dimensiones: 192 x 96 x 140 mm.
Gabinete: Plástico.
Roper Pumps
Geared for top

performance,
Roper Pumps’
A
Series
“A” Series keep
your operation
moving through
thick and thin.
Performance By Design
Applications Features Options
• Pressure lubrication, • Cast iron standard • Packing, mechanical seal,
hydraulic service, fuel construction with Ductile or lip seals
supply, fuel additives Iron as an option • Optional internal relief
• General transfer • Capable of operating at valve
applications nominal motor speeds • Variety of mounting
• Handles a wide range of • Self priming capabilities arrangements
viscosity • Bi-rotational • Internal sleeve bearings,
• Pressures up to 300psi lubricated by the pumped
• Flows up to 59gpm fluid, are available in a

choice of materials
ø ø ø
3.76
Roper Pump Company
P.O. Box 269 • Commerce, GA 30529
Toll Free: 1-800-876-9160 • Fax: 706-335-5490
e:mail: sales@roperpumps.com
A Series Visit Us On The WorldWide Web

www.roperpumps.com
Pump Theoretical Maximum Maximum Flow Maximum Port

Model Capacity Speed at Maximum Speed Pressure Connection
(0 Discharge Pressure)
005 .0005GPR(1.9 CC/REV) 3600 RPM 1.8GPM (.41 M3/HR) 300 PSI (20 Bar) 3/8"NPT"
01 .001GPR(3.8 CC/REV) 3600 RPM 3.6GPM (.82 M3/HR) 300 PSI (20 Bar) 3/8"NPT"
02 .002GPR(7.6 CC/REV) 3600 RPM 7.2GPM (1.6 M3/HR) 300 PSI (20 Bar) 3/8"NPT"
03 .003GPR(11.4 CC/REV) 3600 RPM 10.8GPM (2.5 M3/HR) 300 PSI (20 Bar) 3/4"NPT"
06 .006GPR(22.7 CC/REV) 1800 RPM 10.8GPM (2.5 M3/HR) 150 PSI (10 Bar) 1-1/4"NPT"
21 .022PR(83.3 CC/REV) 1800 RPM 39.6GPM (9.0 M3/HR) 150 PSI (10 Bar) 1 1/2"NPT"
27 .027GPR(102.2 CC/REV) 1800 RPM 48.6GPM (11.0 M3/HR) 150 PSI (10 Bar) 2"NPT"
32 .033GPR(124.9 CC/REV) 1800 RPM 59.4GPM (13.5 M3/HR) 150 PSI (10 Bar) 2"NPT"
Materials of Construction
Housing Gears Bearings Shaft O’Rings
• Cast Iron • Dutile Iron • Bronze • Steel
Options • Ductile Iron • Iron
• Carbon
Key Features
• Cost effective Options
• Bi-directional rotation • Bearing materials
• Self priming • Internal relief valve
• Flange or foot mounted

configurations
• Pressures to 300psi
• Helical gears for quiet operation
ø ø ø
3.76
◆ A series Nomenclature:
Model 1 = Foot mounted / Model 2 = Foot mounted with relief valve
Model 17 = Flange mounted / Model 18 = Flange mounted with relief valve
Model 25 = Base mounted / Model 26 = Base mounted with relief valve
Model 33 = Close coupled / Model 34 = Close coupled with relief valve
AL-lip seal
AM-mechanical seal
AP-packed box
AE(AE series only)-mechanical seal
12 Sizes available:
005 = .0005gpr
01 = 0.001gpr
02 = 0.002gpr
03 = 0.003gpr
06 = 0.006gpr
08 = 0.008gpr
12 = 0.013gpr
16 = 0.017gpr
21 = 0.022gpr
27 = 0.027gpr
32 = 0.033gpr
40 = 0.040gpr
◆ Example: 17AM32
17 indicates flange mount, plain cover
A series
M indicates mechanical seal
32 indicates flow through pump i.e. 0.033gallons per revolution
SERIES: A40
GRAPH 1
THEORETICAL GPM
ACTUAL DELIVERY IN GPM [l/min] = GRAPH 1 - GRAPH 2
80 [302.8]
70 [265]
DISCHARGE - GPM [l/min]
60 [227.1]
50 [189.3]
40 [151.4]
30 [113.6]
20 [75.7]
10 [37.9]
0 [0]
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
RPM
SERIES: A40
GRAPH 2
SLIP
ACTUAL DELIVERY IN GPM [l/min] = GRAPH 1 - GRAPH 2
20 [75.7]
10 [37.9]
SLIP - GPM [l/min]
150 PSI [1034.2 kPa]
SHOWN ON DIAGONAL LINES

125 PSI [861.8 kPa]
DISCHARGE PRESSURE
100 PSI [689.5 kPa]
4 [15.1]
2 [7.57]
1 [3.8]
75 PSI [517.1 kPa]

50 PSI [344.7 kPa]
25 PSI [172.4 kPa]
.4 [1.51]
800 [175.8]
400 [87.7]
600 [131.8]
200 [43.3]
100 [20.7]
6000 [1320]
8000 [1760]
30 [.28]
1000 [220]
2000 [440]
4000 [880]
10000 [2200]
VISCOSITY - SSU [cSt]
SERIES: A40
GRAPH 3
INPUT HORSEPOWER
TOTAL INPUT HORSEPOWER [kW] = GRAPH 3 + GRAPH 4
7 [5.22]
a ]
kP
INPUT HORSEPOWER [kW]
6 [4.47]
4 .2
3
I [10
PS
SHOWN ON DIAGONAL LINES

0 ]
15 Pa
.8 k
DISCHARGE PRESURE
5 [3.73] 1
6
I [8
PS
125 ]
kPa
4 [2.98] 89.5
PS I [6
100
Pa]
7. 1 k
3 [2.24]
S I [51
75 P
P a]
2.0 [1.49] I [3 44.7 k
50 PS
kPa]
1 [.75] 25 PSI [172.4
0 [0]
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
RPM
SERIES: A40
GRAPH 4
VISCOUS HORSEPOWER
TOTAL INPUT HORSEPOWER [kW] = GRAPH 3 + GRAPH 4
10 [7.46]
RPM SHOWN ON DIAGONAL LINES

6 [4.47]
VISCOUS HP [kW]
4 [2.98]
1800 RPM
.2 [.15]
1200 RPM
1 [.75] 900 RPM
.8 [.6]
700 RPM
.4 [.3]
60 [10.3]
30 [.28]
200 [43.3]
40 [4.2]
80 [15.5]
100 [20.7]
800 [175.8]
1000 [220]
2000 [440]
4000 [880]
8000 [1760]
10000 [2200]
6000 [1320]
VISCOSITY - SSU [cSt]
1, 2 AM, AP 21-40
KEY A21 A27 A32 A40

DESCRIPTION
NO. QTY PART NO. QTY PART NO. QTY PART NO. QTY PART NO.
1 Case 1 P1-530 1 P1-554 1 P1-531 1 P1-591
4 Dowel Pin 4 D48-21 4 D48-21 4 D48-21 4 D48-21
5 Case Gasket 2 D11-257 2 D11-257 2 D11-257 2 D11-257
20 Backplate Assy, Brz Brgs 1 N2-800 1 N2-800 1 N2-800 1 N2-800
22 Hex Hd Cap Screw, Plain 16 G49-037100 16 G49-037100 16 G49-037100 16 G49-037100
Hex Hd Cap Screw, RV 12 G49-037100 12 G49-037100 12 G49-037100 12 G49-037100
45 Faceplate Assy, Plain, Brz Brgs 1 N3-341 1 N3-341 1 N3-341 1 N3-341
Faceplate Assy, RV, Brz Brgs 1 N3-340 1 N3-340 1 N3-340 1 N3-340
46 Poppet 1 D16-114 1 D16-114 1 D16-114 1 D16-114
48 Spring, Std Press 1 G10-399 1 G10-399 1 G10-399 1 G10-399
Spring, High Press 1 G10-400 1 G10-400 1 G10-400 1 G10-400
52 Nut, Lock & Seal 1 G33-32 1 G33-32 1 G33-32 1 G33-32
53 Adjusting Screw 1 D15-44 1 D15-44 1 D15-44 1 D15-44
55 Hex Hd Cap Screw, RV 2 G49-037225 2 G49-037225 2 G49-037225 2 G49-037225
62 Hex Hd Cap Screw, RV 2 G49-037350 2 G49-037350 2 G49-037350 2 G49-037350
70 Key, Drive 1 D30-32 1 D30-32 1 D30-32 1 D30-32
71 Key, Gear 1 D30-32 1 D30-32 1 D30-32 1 D30-32
72 Drive Shaft 1 D1-1761 1 D1-1762 1 D1-1763 1 D1-1763
73 Idler Shaft & Gear 1 D2-2013 1 D2-2014 1 D2-1997 1 D2-1497
75 Gear, RH 1 D6-1153 1 D6-1154 1 D6-1128 1 D6-642
76 Ret Ring 2 G41-148 2 G41-148 2 G41-148 2 G41-148
85 Nut, Pkg 2 G44-037 2 G44-037 2 G44-037 2 G44-037
87 Pkg Gland, Pkg 1 D5-453 1 D5-453 1 D5-453 1 D5-453
89 Stud, Pkg 2 G2-110 2 G2-110 2 G2-110 2 G2-110
Hex Hd Cap Screw, Mech Seal 2 G49-037050 2 G49-037050 2 G49-037050 2 G49-037050
91 Pkg Rings, Pkg 5 G14-63 5 G14-63 5 G14-63 5 G14-63
92 Pkg Washer, Pkg 1 G8-250 1 G8-250 1 G8-250 1 G8-250
93 Seal Retainer 1 D8-383 1 D8-383 1 D8-383 1 D8-383
96 Mech Seal, Complete 1 G4-397 1 G4-397 1 G4-397 1 G4-397
97 Ret Ring 1 G41-43 1 G41-43 1 G41-43 1 G41-43
99 Seal Locator Ring, Mech Seal 1 D8-468 1 D8-468 1 D8-468 1 D8-468
Backplate Assy includes Brz Brgs: (2) G5-139

Faceplate Assy includes Brz Brgs: (2) G5-139
Botones pulsadores y lámparas indicadoras, tipo 3SB1 22mm
Aplicaciones
Número Número
Las unidades de control y señalización ofrecen Tabla de selección de catálogo de catálogo
una variedad de elementos cuya rígida anterior actual
Descripción Tipo Peso gr
construcción y elegante presentación
satisfacen plenamente los requerimientos Botón pulsador de contacto momentáneo con 3SB 1201-0AB01-N 300 10100 A7B10000002619
para su empleo en mando de contactores, elemento de conexión incorporado. 3SB 1201-0AC01-R 300 10249 A7B10000002620 30
para iniciar procesos de maniobra automática, 3SB 1201-0AE01-V 300 10250 A7B10000002621
emitir señales y realizar disparos a distancia.
Botón pulsador tipo hongo de contacto perma- 3SB 1201-1AC01-R 300 10102 A7B10000002618 60
nente, rojo, con elemento de conexión incorpo-
Los pulsadores de control son adecuados para rado. Apropiado para circuitos de emergencia.
accionar circuitos auxiliares de mando, hasta
tensiones de 660 V c.a. y 660 V c.c. Están Manija para pulsador de contacto permanente 3SB 1201-2AB01 300 10103 A7B10000002622 50
diseñados para que funcionen a una negro, con dos posiciones, con elemento de
conexión incorporado.
frecuencia de maniobra de hasta 1000
operaciones por hora. Manija para pulsador de contacto permanente 3SB 1201-2DB01 300 10308 A7B10000002624 50
negro con tres posiciones, con elemento de 300 10098 A7B10000002623
Ventajas conexión incorporado.
NOTA: Cada elemento de conexión tiene sólo

Gran facilidad de montaje y alambrado.
un contacto, ya sea de apertura o de cierre.
Confiabilidad de operación. Como máximo se pueden colocar dos elemen-

tos.
Gran resistencia mecánica. Toda nuestra botonería se suministra con
1CA + 1CC
Excelente apariencia.
Placa indicadora:
Conectar 4000 1122 A7B93000000316 2
Amplia selectividad. Desconectar 4000 1123 A7B93000000317 2
Parar 4000 1591 A7B93000000402 2
Gran luminosidad en lámparas Arrancar 4000 1592 A7B93000000403 2
indicadoras. Adelante 4000 1124 A7B93000000318 2
Reversa 4000 1125 A7B93000000319 2
A prueba de vibraciones. Sobrecarga 4000 1593 A7B93000000404 2
No requieren mantenimiento. Todos los botones y lámparas se suministran siempre completos.

Tabla de selección
Normas: IEC 337, Número de Número de
IEC 144, VDE 0660, DIN 40050e, Descripción Tipo catálogo catálogo Peso gr
ABTN-NBR6147 anterior actual
24 vca/vcd Lente Rojo 3SB 1281-6BC06-R 300 10097 A7B10000002640 40
Lente Verde 3SB 1281-6BE06-V 300 10104 A7B10000002641 40
Su alta tecnología, la seguridad en su
Lente Amarillo 3SB 1281-6BD06-A 300 10105 A7B10000002642 40
instalación y su presentación, nos permite el
empleo en aplicaciones industriales, 115 V,60 Hz. Lente Rojo 3SB 1212-6BC06-ZR 300 10106 A7B10000002626 40
residenciales y comerciales entre otras. Lente Verde 3SB 1212-6BE06-ZV 300 10107 A7B10000002629 40
Lente Amarillo 3SB 1212-6BD06-ZA 300 10108 A7B10000002632 40
220 V,60 Hz. Lente Rojo 3SB 1212-6BC06-R 300 10109 A7B10000002625 40
Lente Verde 3SB 1212-6BE06-V 300 10110 A7B10000002631 40
Lente Amarillo 3SB 1212-6BD06-A 300 10111 A7B10000002628 40
440 V,60 Hz. Lente Rojo 3SB 1212-6BC06-ZTR 300 10099 A7B10000002627 120
Lente Verde 3SB 1212-6BE06-ZTV 300 10112 A7B10000002633 120
Lente Amarillo 3SB 1212-6BD06-ZTA 300 10113 A7B10000002630 120
Botón pulsador iluminado de contacto

momentaneo con elemento de conexión
incorporado.
115V, 60 Hz Lente Rojo 3SB 1280-0AC1-ZR 300 10292 A7B10000002635 40

Lente Verde 3SB 1280-0AE1-ZR 300 10294 A7B10000002639 40
220 V, 60 Hz Lente Rojo 3SB 1280-0AC01-R 300 10296 A7B10000002634 40

Lente Verde 3SB 1280-0AE01-V 300 10297 A7B10000002637 40
440 V, 60 Hz Lente Rojo 3SB 1280-0AC01-ZTR 300 10101 A7B10000002636 120

Lente Verde 3SB 1280-0AE01-ZTV 300 10265 A7B10000002638 120
Botón con llave de contacto permanente, 3SB 1202-4LB01 300 10098 A7B10000002623 40
con dos posiciones, con elemento de
conexión incorporado.
174 Siemens
Botones pulsadores y lámparas indicadoras, tipo 3SB1 22mm
Especificaciones técnicas
Botón pulsador Botón con llave Botón manija Lámparas
Normas de construcción DIN VDE 0660 e IEC 947-5-1
Tensión de aislamiento 660 V c.a./c.c.
Tensión nominal de servicio 660 V c.a.
Tensión de prueba aplicada 2.5 kV c.a.
Corriente nominal AC12 10 A
Corriente térmica Ith 2/AC12 10 A
Máxima tensión de operación en c.d. 660 V c.c.
Vida útil mecánica 10 x 106 maniobras
Vida útil eléctrica AC15 en combinación de maniobra con 10 x 106 maniobras

contactores 3TH8, 3TH40 y 3TB44.
Tipo de protección en gabinete. IP65
Temperatura admisible. -20 hasta +60°C
Desconexión Ie/AC15 con 220V/230V. 5 x 105 operaciones
Frecuencia de maniobra 1000 maniobras por hora
Protección contra cortocircuito. Fusible Diazed 10 Amp.
Conductor máximo aceptable. 2 x 1.... 2.5 mm2
Siemens 175
Botones pulsadores y lámparas indicadoras, tipo 3SB 22mm
Dimensiones en milimetros
Botones
Botón pulsador Botón tipo hongo Botón manija
Lámparas
Con transformador integrado Placa indicadora
176 Siemens
Pulsadores de control 3SA1
Para circuitos de mando de hasta 500 V c.a. y 600 V c.c., 10A
4
Aplicación Construcción Ejecución
Los pulsadores de control 3SA1 se emplean Los pulsadores de control 3SA1 están Instaladas adecuadamente en la placa
para mando de contactores, para iniciar pro- formados por los elementos de conexión frontal, los pulsadores de control tienen las
cesos de maniobra automáticos, emitir 3SA10 y los elementos de accionamiento clases de protección siguiente:
señales, realizar 3SA11.
disparos a distancia, etc.
La aplicación del sistema de construcción por

piezas normalizadas ofrece un gran número
de combinaciones, de tal forma que los
Con estos dos elementos se constituyen los
pulsadores de control, adaptándose a las
condiciones de cada caso.
Botones pulsadores
3SA1100
3SA1101
} Clase de
protección
IP 65
aparatos pueden adaptarse

fácilmente a la función que se pretenda
realizar. Los pulsadores de control son ade-
cuados para accionar circuitos
Los elementos de conexión 3SA10 es el
mismo para todos los pulsadores de
control, y lleva un contacto de cierre y
un contacto de apertura.
Manija con 2
posiciones
3SA1170
} Clase de
protección
IP 54
auxiliares y de mando, hasta tensiones de Clases de protección, según norma

500 V c.a. y 600 V c.c. internacional IEC - 144.
Estan diseñados para que funcionen a una

frecuencia de maniobra de hasta 1000
operaciones por hora.
Temporalmente se admite una frecuencia de
Montaje
maniobra aún mayor.
Los pulsadores de control 3SA1 pueden fun-
Los pulsadores de control se utilizan en cionar en cualquier posición de
locales con temperaturas ambientes montaje. Sin embargo, habrá que
comprendidas entre -20° y +55°C observar las distancias mínimas entre los ele-
costantes y en zonas tropicales con mentos de conexión y los de accionamiento
una humedad relativa del aire superior Para indicar la operación a realizar se sumin- indicadas en los croquis acotados. La suje-
al 80%. istran placas indicadoras que se sujetan por ción utilizada permite montar con rapidez los
detrás del anillo frontal del botón. dispositivos
citados y asegurarlos para que no se
desprendan espontáneamente. Incluso cuan-
do estén sometidos a intensos movimien-
tos.
Ilustración Ejecución Elementos constructivos Observaciones
Para fijación por la placa Elementos de conexión con Todos los elementos
frontal. pieza de sujeción 3SA10 10 constructivos deben
pedirse por separado.
Empalme de los conductores Elemento de accionamiento
por la parte posterior. (botón pulsador o manija).
Placa indicadora.
Elemento de conexión
con pieza de sujección.
Siemens 177
Elementos de accionamiento
3SA11 00 negro
3SA11 01 rojo
3SA11 04 verde
Botón pulsador para contacto Elemento de conexión 3SA10 10

momentáneo
Datos técnicos
Tensión nominal de aislamiento Ui:
corriente alterna 500 V

corriente contínua 600 V
corriente permanente Ith2 10 A
Vida útil de los contactos
Corriente de desconexión con c.a. 1 2 4 5 10 A

Números de maniobras 10 5 3 2.5 1 Millones maniobras
Vida útil mecánica aprox. 10 millones de maniobras
Temperatura ambiente máx. admisible de -20°C hasta +55°C
Sección de conexión (conductor) AWG No. 14
178 Siemens
Tabla de selección
4
Los pulsadores de control se suministran por partes, conforme a la aplicación deseada.
En el pedido hay que indicar:
Tipo y No. de catálogo del elemento de accionamiento.

Tipo y No. de catálogo e inscripción de la placa indicadora.
Elemento de conexión
Ilustración Características Tipo Número de catálogo Número de catálogo Peso

anterior actual neto kg
Elemento de conexión 1NC + 1NA 3SA10 10 3000 4887 A7B10000002613 0.08

para fijación en la placa
frontal y empalme por la 3 1
parte posterior.
4 2
Elementos de accionamiento
Tabla de selección
Control del Tipo Número de catálogo Número de catálogo Peso

Ilustración Características botón anterior actual neto kg
insertado
Botón pulsador de
negro regro 3SA11 00 3000 4888 A7B10000002614 0.03
contacto momentáneo. rojo 3SA11 01 3000 4889 A7B10000002615
El botón puede sustituirse verde 3SA11 04 3000 4890 A7B10000002616
por otro de color distinto o
por un botón tipo hongo de
contacto momentáneo.
Placas indicadoras
Para caracterizar los puntos de control.
Las placas indicadoras se colocan entre el anillo frontal y la goma de junta.
Tabla de selección
Ilustración Número de catálogo Número de catálogo Peso
anterior actual neto kg
Características
Las placas indicadoras Concectado-

son de aluminio Desconectado 3000 0578 A7B10000000107 0.001
anodizado Para-arrancar
adelante-reversa 3000 1568 A7B10000000399
sobrecarga 3000 1567 A7B10000000398

restablecer 3000 0570 A7B10000000106
Siemens 179
Montajes y dimensiones
Perforaciones para el montaje de varios

elementos de accionamiento 3SA11. Elemento de conexión 3SA10
Elemento de accionamiento 3SA11
Dimensiones en milímetros:
Placa indicadora
(colocar el anillo de la junta

debajo de la placa indicadora)
* Distancia mínima para el montaje

de varias lámparas indicadoras 3SL 10.
- Dimensiones en mm.
Elementos de conexión 3SA 10 Elemento de accionamiento 3SA 11
Carrera = 6mm.
Carrera de apertura de contacto = 4mm.
3SA11 00 a 3SA11 04 3SA11 40
3SA11 70
180 Siemens
Pulsadores de control 3SL1
4
Para tensiones de hasta 400 V con
bases roscadas E-14
Descripción Las lámparas indicadoras 3SL1 son

Las lámparas indicadoras están resistentes a los efectos del clima, es decir,
compuestas por la base roscada con pueden emplearse incluso en lugares donde
la pieza de sujeción y lente completo. la humedad del aire sea superior al 80% y
En su aspecto exterior y dimensiones, tengan lugar
las lámparas indicadoras son parecidas condensaciones frecuentes.
a los pulsadores de control.
El lente está protegido contra polvo y chorros
de agua (clase de protección IP65).
Para fijación en la placa Base roscada E 14 Las placas indicadoras

frontal y empalme de los con pieza de sujeción. y los focos se solicitarán
conductores por la parte por separado.
posterior. Lente completo.
Placa indicadora.
Base roscada
con pieza de
sujeción.
Lente completo.
Orificios de sujeción y perforaciones de montaje para lámparas indicadoras 3SL1
Dimensiones en milímetros
* Distancia mínima para el montaje de varias

lámparas indicadoras 3SL 10.
Siemens 181
Pulsadores de control 3SL1
Las lámparas indicadoras se suministran siempre completas.

Las placas indicadoras y los focos se solicitan por separado.
Tabla de selección
Ilustración Material Color del lente Tipo Número de Número de Peso
e inscripción catálogo catálogo neto Kg
de la placa anterior actual
Lámpara indicadora rojo 3SL1020 3000 4892 A7B10000002644 0,07

para fijación en la placa verde 3SL1021 3000 4893 A7B10000002643
frontal. blanco 3SL1025 3000 4894 A7B10000002646
ámbar 3SL1022 3000 4895 A7B10000002645
Focos
incandescentes 24 V 133 M2 40000 0584 0,003
5W 115 V 125 M1 40000 0585
220 V 120 M (7/10W) 40000 1569
Placas indicadoras Conectar - 4000 0578 0,001

Desconectar
Parar - 4000 1568
Arrancar
Adelante - 4000 0568
Reversa
Sobrecarga 4000 0570
Montaje y dimensiones Dimensiones en milímetros
Fijación en la placa frontal
Conexión por la parte posterior. Base roscada E 14
Si se emplean lámparas indicadoras con placa, el anillo de junta debe colocarse debajo de la placa.
182 Siemens
Pulsadores de botón doble 3SA8
Datos técnicos
Tensión de aislamiento 500 V c.a.; 600 Vc.c.
Corriente térmica Ith2 6A

4
Corriente nominal Ie (AC5) 3 A con 220 V c.a.
1.5 A con 440V c.a.
Protección contra cortocircuito: 10 A

Fusibles rápidos Diazed
Vida útil mecánica 1 000 000 maniobras
Vida útil de los contactos: corriente de desconexión en A 0,5 4

millones de maniobras 1 0,1
Temperatira ambiente admisible de -25°C hasta +55 °C
Clase de protección IP 40
Tabla de selección
Ilustración Diagrama de Ejecución Tipo No. de No. de Peso

conexión Catálogo Catálogo neto Kg
Anterior Nuevo
Pulsador doble
longitud del conductor
de conexión: 0.5m
Descripción: 0 -1 3SA8 100 3000 4903 A7B10000002617 0,05
Dimensiones en mm.

botones 3SA8 1
perforación 3,2
Clavija plana 2.8 x 0.8
“conectar” botón verde
“desconectar” boton rojo
Tipo 3SA8 1
c = normal 500 Dimensiones b c
Dimensiones mínimas 47 34
1) Para montaje incorporado

2) Empalme a través de un enchufe tripolar
con conductor de conexión.
Siemens 183
Datos técnicos
Tensión de aislamiento 500 V c.a.; 600 Vc.c.
Corriente térmica Ith2 6A

4
Corriente nominal Ie (AC5) 3 A con 220 V c.a.
1.5 A con 440V c.a.


Tabla de selección
Ilustración Diagrama de Ejecución Tipo No. de No. de Peso

conexión Catálogo Catálogo neto Kg
Anterior Nuevo
Pulsador doble
de conexión: 0.5m
Descripción: 0 -1 3SA8 100 3000 4903 A7B10000002617 0,05
Dimensiones en mm.

botones 3SA8 1
perforación 3,2
“conectar” botón verde
“desconectar” boton rojo
Tipo 3SA8 1
c = normal 500 Dimensiones b c

Siemens 183
• • • • • • •
• • • • • • Fulflo® Honeycomb™ Filter Cartridges
• • • • • • • Food and Drug Grade
■ Acetate ■
• • • • • • • Polypropylene
■ Cotton
• • • • • • • • ■ Food and Drug ■ Industrial Grade
• • • • • • • • Grade Rayon Polypropylene
• • • • • • • • • ■ Glass Fiber ■ Rayon
• • • • • • • • • • ■ Polyester ■ Nylon
• • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • • • • • Wound Depth Series

Multipurpose Filtration Solutions
With Parker’s Wound Depth
Cartridges
Parker Process Filtration has been a leader in filter media
innovation and performance since we first invented the
Honeycomb™ Filter Tube over 50 years ago. Parker has
one of the world’s largest manufacturing plants for wound
cartridges, offering superior quality along with technical,
engineering and marketing support.
Effective removal ratings at nominal 90% efficiency from

100µm to 0.5µm range.
Applications
■ Animal Oils ■ Oxidizing Agents
■ Concentrated ■ Petroleum Oils
Alkalies ■ Photo Solutions
■ Dilute Acids ■ Potable Liquids
& Alkalies ■ Vegetable Oils
■ Mineral Acids ■ Water
■ Organic Acids ■ Prefilter for Membranes
& Solvents ■ Amines
Features and Benefits

■ A broad range of media providing excellent compat- ■ Special density and cartridge dimension requirements
ibility with a variety of organic solvents, animal, are available. Consult the Process Filtration Division at
petroleum and vegetable oils. 1-765-482-3900 for minimum order requirement.
■ Optional core covers available on selected cartridges ■ Cotton, rayon, polypropylene, polyester and acetate
assure fiber migration control. materials are FDA listed as acceptable for potable and
■ Multiple length cartridges minimize change out time, edible liquid contact according to CFR Title 21.
eliminate spacers and are available to fit competitive ■ Extended center cores are available in tinned steel,
filter vessels. 316 stainless steel and 304 stainless steel.
■ One-piece extended center core option eliminates the ■ A special snap-in extender is available for
need for cartridge guides in all competitive and Fulflo® polypropylene cores.
multicartridge housings. ■ Various O-ring and end cap options are available.
Process Filtration Division

WARNING! FAILURE OR IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR RELATED ITEMS CAN
Bulletin C-1000 Effective 5/97 CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
© 1997 Parker Hannifin Corporation This document and other information from Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or system options for further
investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you analyze all aspects of your application and review the information concerning the product or system
All Rights Reserved in the current product catalog. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is
Page 1 of 4 solely responsible for making the final selection for the products and systems and assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.
The products described herein, including without limitation, product features, specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change by Parker Hannifin
Corporation and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.
Fulflo® Honeycomb™ Filter Cartridges
■ Acetate ■ Food and Drug Grade
■ Cotton Polypropylene
■ Food and Drug ■ Industrial Grade
Grade Rayon Polypropylene
■ Glass Fiber ■ Rayon
■ Polyester ■ Nylon
Wound Depth Series
Wound Depth Cartridge Design Function

Wound cartridges offer a gradual of tapered filtering passages of filtration by trapping its share of
pressure increase during cartridge controlled size and shape. As the particles. In addition, the irregular
life versus surface-type media that cartridge is wound, each layer of outer surface reduces surface
have an abrupt flow cutoff when roving is napped to increase filtration blinding, assuring both longer
loaded. All wound cartridges provide capabilities. The result, each layer cartridge life and full cartridge
true depth filtration utilizing hundreds of roving contributes to true depth utilization.
Unique Ultrafine Wound Depth Cartridges

for Critical Filtration Applications
Included in the Honeycomb™ wound 99% of test contaminants with 39% Suggested applications include:
depth cartridge family is a unique filter distribution of particles in the 0.5µm ■ Prefilter for membranes
cartridge specifically designed for range (AC Fine Dust). This type of ■ Fine filtration of photoresists
critical filtration applications in the filtration provides excellent protection for the semiconductor industry
0.5µm range. Where absolute 0.5µm for equipment or processes that must ■ Rinse water in semiconductor
filtration is required, the Ultrafine be protected from fine particles. manufacturing
cartridge can be used as a prefilter, Laboratory testing concluded that ■ Fine filtration for ultrasonic
thereby significantly extending mem- 90% of micro-organism contamination parts, washer solvents and
brane life. Ultrafine cartridges remove is removed with ultrafine filtration. other high-purity solvents
■ Prefilter for industrial reverse
osmosis equipment
Ultrafine cartridges are offered in Cotton (C), Rayon (E), Acetate (W), FDA Grade Polypropylene (M) and Industrial
Grade Polypropylene (T). Available core options are 316 Stainless (S) or Polypropylene (A) and are available in 10,
20 and 30 in lengths. Desired combination can be ordered from cartridge symbols shown below:
Length FDA Grade Industrial Grade

(in) Core Material Cotton Rayon Acetate Polypropylene Polypropylene
10 (S) 316 Stainless or C10S E10S W10S M10S T10S
(A) Polypropylene C10A E10A W10A M10A T10A
Bulletin C-1000
Page 2 of 4
■ Wound Cartridge Flow Factors for Aqueous ■ Wound Cartridge Flow Factors for Nonaqueous
(Water Based) Fluids (psid/gpm @ 1 cks) (Solvent or Oil Based) Fluids (psid/gpm @ 1 cks)
Polypropylene Cotton Polypropylene Cotton

Rating Polyester Rayon Rating Polyester Rayon
(µm) Nylon Acetate Glass (µm) Nylon Acetate Glass
1 0.7463 2.0000 0.5000 1 1.0000 0.7519 0.5000
3 0.3330 0.6250 0.4211 3 0.5800 0.3003 0.4211
5 0.2381 0.3636 0.3478 5 0.3003 0.1949 0.3478
10 0.1429 0.1931 0.1951 10 0.1299 0.1000 0.1951
20 0.0898 0.1075 0.1096 20 0.0560 0.0350 0.1096
30 0.0704 0.0855 0.0816 30 0.0200 0.0175 0.0816
50 0.0595 0.0709 0.0678 50 0.0141 0.0130 0.0678
75 0.0538 0.0645 0.0611 75 0.0120 0.0100 0.0611
100 0.0500 0.0624 0.0590 100 0.0080 0.0065 0.0590
■ Wound Cartridge ■ Wound Cartridge Nominal Micrometer Ratings

Length Factors
Cartridge Rating Compressed Air and
Length Length Designation (µm) Gas Micron Rating
(in) Factor
8R, E8R, W8R, N8R, U8R,
4 0.4 S8R, M8R, R8R, T8R, WC8R 100 15
10 1.0 10R, E10R, W10R, N10R, U10R,
20 2.0 S10R, R10R, T10R, M10R, WC10R 75 13
30 3.0
11R, E11R, W11R, N11R, U11R,
40 4.0
S11R, M11R, R11R, T11R, WC11R 50 12
12R, E12R, W12R, N12R, U12R,
Flow Rate and Pressure Drop Formulas: S12R, M12R, R12R, T12R, WC12R 40 ——
Flow Rate (gpm) = Clean ∆P x Length Factor 13R, E13R, W13R, N13R, U13R,
Viscosity x Flow Factor S13R, M13R, R13R, T13R, WC13R 30 10
Clean ∆P = Flow Rate x Viscosity x Flow Factor 15R, E15R, W15R, N15R, U15R,
Length Factor S15R, M15R, R15R, T15R, WC15R 20 7
17R, E17R, W17R, N17R, U17R,
Notes: S17R, M17R, R17R, T17R, WC17R 15 5
1. Clean ∆P is PSI differential at start. 19R, E19R, W19R, N19R, U19R,
2. Viscosity is centistokes. S19R, M19R, R19R, T19R, WC19R 10 3
Use Conversion Tables for other units.
3. Flow Factor is ∆P/GPM at 1 cks 21R, E21R, W21R, N21R, U21R, —
for 10 in (or single). S21R, M21R, R21R, T21R, WC21R 7 —
4. Length Factors convert flow or ∆P from 10 in 23R, E23R, W23R, N23R, U23R,
(single length) to required cartridge length.
S23R, M23R, R23R, T23R, WC23R 5 2
27R, E27R, W27R, N27R, U27R,
S27R, M27R, R27R, T27R, WC27R 3 1
39R, E39R, W39R, N39R, U39R,
S39R, M39R, R39R, T39R, WC39R 1 Less than 1
Bulletin C-1000
Page 3 of 4
Wound Depth Series
Specifications ■ Wound Cartridge Glass Fiber Nominal Micrometer Ratings
Nominal Removal Ratings: Cartridge Compressed

■ @ 90% efficiency from Designation Liquids Air and Gases
100µm to 0.5µm K5B 100-150 100+
K5R 75-100 10
Recommended Operating Conditions:
K6R 40 7
■ Change Out ∆P: 30 psi (2.1 bar)
K8R 30 5
■ Maximum Operating ∆P @
Ambient Temperature: 60 psi (4.1 bar) K10R 20 3
K12R 15 1
Dimensions: K15R 10 <1
■ 1 in ID x 2-1/2 OD K19R 5 <1
3 in to 50 in lengths K27R 1 <1
K39R 0.5 <1
■ Maximum Operating Temperature
Cartridge Metal Polypropylene Glass-Filled

Material Core Core Polypropylene
Acetate 250°F (121°C) 120°F (49°C) 180°F (82°C)
Cotton 250°F (121°C) 120°F (49°C) —
Glass 750°F (402°C) — —
Nylon 275°F (135°C) 120°F (49°C) —
Polypropylene 200°F (93°C) 120°F (49°C)† 180°F (82°C)
Polyester 275°F (135°C) 120°F (49°C) —
Rayon 250°F (121°C) 120°F (49°C) —
†
200°F (93°C) if ∆P is limited
Ordering Information
E 13R 10 2 A V L TC N
Cartridge Code Density Micron Nominal Nominal Cartridge Core Material Core Cover End End Cap Options Seal Options
Number Rating (µm) Cartridge Diameter Material Treatment
Length (in)
No Symbol = Cotton (FDA) 8R 100 3 = 3 No Symbol = No Symbol = Tinned Steel No Symbol = No Symbol = TC = 222 Closed N = Buna
E = FDA Grade Rayon 10R 75 4 = 4 1 in ID x 2-1/2 in OD A = Polypropylene No Cover No Treatment TF = 222 Fin E = EPR
K = Glass Fiber 11R 50 6 = 6 2 =1 in ID x 2-3/4 in OD A3 = Glass-Filled V = Nonwoven L = Lacquer SC = 226 Closed S = Silicone
M = FDA Grade 12R 40 7 = 7 Special Dimensions Polypropylene W = Nonwoven E = Acetone SF = 226 Fin V = Viton*
Polypropylene 13R 30 8 = 8 Available G = 304L Stainless Steel Paper D = Sodium XA = Poly Extender None = DOE
N = Nylon 15R 20 9-4 = 9-3/4 S = 316 Stainless Steel Y = Polypropylene Silicate XC = Tinned Steel
R = Rayon 17R 15 10 = 10 SR = Passivated 316 SS M = Singed Extender
S = Polyester (FDA) 19R 10 19-4 = 19-1/2 (Special Order) GXC = 304L SS
T = Industrial Grade 21R 7 20 = 20 Extender
Polypropylene 23R 5 29-4 = 29-1/4 SXC = 316 SS
U = Natural Cotton 27R 3 30 = 30 Extender
W = Acetate (FDA) 39R 1 39-4 = 39 None=DOE
WC = White Cotton 40 = 40
Special Order
50 = 50

Parker Hannifin Corporation
* A trademark of E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Co.
P.O. Box 1300
Lebanon, Indiana 46052
Telephone (765) 482-3900
Bulletin C-1000 Fax (765) 482-8410
Page 4 of 4 http://www.parker.com
Contactores tripolares,
tipos SIRIUS 3RT y 3TF 1
Alta calidad y confiabilidad
• En la técnica de mando
• Elevada vida útil mecánica
• Tamaño S0 y S1 (DIN) 15 millones de

maniobras
• S2 hasta 10 millones de maniobras
• Larga vida eléctrica
• Fácil mantenimiento
• Disponibilidad de las piezas de repuesto
• Conexión de bobina tanto superior, inferior

y diagonal
• Mismos accesorios adosados en los tamaños

S0 al S3
• Seguridad en el servicio
• Sencillez en el manejo
• Compacto en su forma
• Accesorios enchufables
¡Características que hacen la

diferencia!
Normas:
NMX-J-290
VDE 0660
IEC 337-1b
Siemens 9
Contactores de corriente alterna tripolares 3RT
Descripción
Accionamiento a.c. y c.c. Limitación de sobretensión

lEC 947, DIN EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
Todos los contactores 3RT1 podrán
Ejecución conectarse posteriormente con elementos RC
o con varistores para amortiguar las
Los contactores 3RT1 son resistentes a los sobretensiones de desconexión de la bobina.
efectos del clima y están asegurados contra Asimismo se pueden emplear también
contactos involuntarios, según DIN VDE diodos o combinaciones de diodos
0106, parte 100. Los contactores 3RT1 (combinación de diodo de limitación y diodo
disponen de conexiones por tornillo o de la Z para tiempos breves de desconexión). Los
técnica de conexión por resorte Cage Clamp. contactores del tamaño S00 tienen espacio
En el aparato básico de los contactores del para enchufar las limitadores de sobretensión
tamaño S00 se encuentra integrado un par el lado delantero, junto a un bloque de
contacto auxiliar. Los aparatos básicos de los contactos auxiliares montado. En las
tamaños S0 hasta S3 sólo contienen vías de contactores de los tamaños S0 hasta S3, se
corriente principales. Todos los aparatos pueden enchufar varistores y elementos RC
básicos pueden ampliarse con bloques de bien por arriba a bien por abajo,
contactos auxiliares. Los contactores del directamente en las conexiones de bobina.
tamaño S3 tienen bornes de caja extraíbles Combinaciones de diodos sólo se pueden
para las conexiones de conductores enchufar por arriba (por razón de polaridad).
principales. Ello hace posible la conexión de El sentido de enchufe viene predeterminado
terminales de cable en anillo o de platinas. por una codificación. Los contactores de
acoplamiento se suministran, según la
ejecución, sin conexiones o bien conectadas
Fiabilidad de los contactos en serie con varistor o diodo.
Cuando se hayan de conectar tensiones Indicación

≤ 110V e intensidades ≤100 mA, se deberán
emplearlos contactos auxiliares de los Los tiempos del retraso de apertura de
contactores 3RT1 o bien los de los contacto de cierre y de retraso de cierre del
contactores 3RH11, los cuales garantizan una contacto de apertura, aumentarán cuando
Contactores 3RT10 1. (tamaño S00) según
elevada seguridad de contacto. Estos las bobinas de contactor estén amortiguadas
DIN EN 50 012 ó 50 005
contactos auxiliares son apropiados para contra picos de tensión (diodo de limitación.
circuitos electrónicos con intensidades ≤1 6 hasta 10 veces; combinaciones de diodo:
mA con una tensión de 17 V. 2 hasta 6 veces; varistor: +2 hasta 5 ms).
Todos los contactores del tamaño S00 con un
contacto auxiliar, No. característico 10E ó 01,
Protección contra cortocircuito de los Bloques de contactos auxiliares
y los contactores con 4 contactos principales,
contactores
se pueden ampliar con bloques de contactos
Los aparatos básicos 3RT1 se pueden ampliar,
auxiliares con los No. característicos 40 hasta
Para la protección contra cortocircuito de los dependiendo de cada aplicación, con
02 en contactores con 3 ó 5 contactos
contactores sin relé de sobrecarga, véanse los diterentes bloques de contactos auxiliares:
auxiliares (los contactores con 4 contactos
datos técnicos. Para el tamaño S00 sirve la
principales: 2 ó 4 contactos auxiliares), según
protección de fusible 20 A, más allá del tipo Tamaño S00
DIN EN 50 005. Los números característicos
de coordinación "2"; es al mismo tiempo una
que se encuentran en los bloques de
protección resistente a la fundición. Para la Los contactores con un contacto de cierre
contactos auxiliares sólo sirven paro los
protección contra cortocircuito de los (NA) como contacto auxiliar, con técnica de
interruptores auxiliares montados.
contactores con relé de sobrecarga, En el conexión por tornillo o por resorte (Cage
Los bloques de contactos auxiliares de 1 ó 2
montaje de derivaciones de consumidores Clamp), No. característico 10E, se pueden
polos con posibilidades de conexión por
sin fusibles se deberán elegir combinaciones ampliar con bloques de contactos auxiliares
arriba o por abajo, hacen posible,
de interruptores automáticos y contactores, en contactores con contactos auxiliares,
especialmente en el montaje de
según DIN EN 50012. Los No. característicos
derivaciones, que el cableado sea sencillo y
11E, 22E, 23E y 32E que se encuentran en los
claro. Estos bloques de contactos auxiliares
Protección de motor bloques de contactos auxiliares sirven para
sólo se ofrecen con conexión por tornillo.
las contactores completos. Estos bloques de
Todas las variantes de contactos auxiliares
Para la protección contra sobrecarga, se contactos auxiliares no pueden combinarse
mencionadas se pueden fijar por abroche en
pueden montar relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 con contactores que tengan un contacto de
la apertura prevista en el lado frontal de los
en los contactores 3RT1. Los relés de apertura en el aparato básico, No.
contactores. Para desmontarlos, el bloque de
sobrecarga se han de pedir por separado. característico 01, dado que éstos están
contactos auxiliares tiene una palanca de
codificados.
desenclavamiento en el centro.
14 Siemens
Descripción
1
Tamaños S0 hasta S3 Tamaño S3:
Existe un variado programa de bloques de Como máximo se pueden montar 8

contactos auxiliares para los diversos casos contactos auxiliares, debiendose tener en
de aplicación. Los contactores en sí, no cuenta lo siguiente:
poseen ninguna vía de corriente auxiliar • de esos 8 contactos auxiliares, cuatro
integrada. como máximo podrán ser contactos de
Las variantes de contactos auxiliares son apertura (NC).
unitarias para los contactores de los tamaños • se podrán montar a la derecha o a la
S0 hasta S3. izquierda 2 bloques de contactos auxiliares
En el lado frontal de los contactores se de 2 polos. debiéndose también tener en
pueden montar, bien un solo bloque de consideración la simetría.
contactos auxiliares de 4 polos, bien hasta Al conectar los contactores se abrirán
cuatro bloques de 1 polo (técnica de primero los contactos de apertura (NC) y
conexión por tornillo o por resorte Cage luego se cerrarán los contactos de cierre
Clamp). Las designaciones de conexión (NA).
constan de cifras de orden sobre el aparato
básico y de cifras de función en los bloques
de contactos auxiliares.
Se dispone además de bloques de contactos
auxiliares de 2 polos (conexión por tornillo)
Contactores 3RT10 2. hasta 3RT10 4.
para la guía de conductor por arriba y por (tamaños S0 hasta S3)
abajo con una construcción en forma de bloques de contactos auxiliares de 1 polo
bloque cuadrangular (interruptor auxiliar de
derivación).
Cuando el espacio de montaje tenga una

profundidad de montaje limitada, se podrán
montar lateralmente bloques de contactos
auxiliares de 2 polos (conexión por tornillo),
utilizables por la derecha o por la izquierda.
Los bloques de contactos auxiliares de
colocación frontal se pueden desmontar
sirviéndose de una palanca de
desenclavamiento situada en el centro; los
bloques de contactos auxiliares de montaje
lateral se pueden sacar fácilmente ejerciendo
presión sobre las superficies de sujeción
acanaladas.
La designación de conexión de los distintos
bloques de contactos auxiliares se
corresponde con DIN EN 50 005 ó DIN EN 50
012, y la de los contactores completos, con
bloque de contactos auxiliares 2 NA + 2 NC
se corresponde con DIN EN 50012.
Tamaños S0 y S2:
Como máximo se pueden montar 4

contactos auxiliares, siendo de elección a
discreción la ejecución de los bloques de
contactos auxiliares empleados. Por razones
de simetría, cuando se utilicen dos bloques
de contactos auxiliares de montaje lateral de
2 polos, se deberá montar uno a la derecha y
otro a la izquierda respectivamente.
Contactores 3RT10 2. hasta 3RT10 4.
(tamaños S0 hasta S3)
bloques de contactos auxiliares de 4 polos, designaciones de los contactores conforme a DIN EN 50 005
o bien DIN EN 50 012
Siemens 15
Descripción
Accionamiento c.a. y c.c. Tamaños S0 hasta S3: Con los contactores de los tamaños S2 y S3
• Con accionamiento por contacto en combinación con el enclavamiento
lEC 947, DIN EN 60 947 (VDE 0660) permanente. mecánico montable en el lado frontal, no se
Los contactores no tienen ningún pueden utilizar los juegos de piezas de
Ejecución contacto auxiliar en el aparato básico; combinación de contactores 3RA1 9 33-2B ni
por ello, en el enclavamiento mecánico 3RA19 43-2B.
Combinaciones de aparatos completas lateralmente montable al contactor, se ha
Las combinaciones de contactores para invertir previsto un contacto de apertura, para el Modo de funcionamiento
completamente cableadas del tamaño S00, contactor de la derecha y de la izquierda
son resistentes a los efectos del clima y están respectivamente, para el enclavamiento Los tiempos de conexión de los distintos
aseguradas contra contactos involuntarios, eléctrico. contactores 3RT10 se han de dimensionar de
según DIN VDE 0106, parte 100. • Con accionamiento por pulsador tal manera, que en las conmutaciones no se
Las combinaciones de contactores se Enclavamiento eléctrico igual que con produzcan entrecruzamientos de los
componen respectivamente de 2 accionamiento por contacto contactos ni de la duración del arco voltaico
contactores de la misma potencia con un permanente: adicionalmente, se necesita entre dos contactores, si están enclavados a
contacto de apertura en el aparato básico. un contacto auxiliar con un contacto de través de un interruptor auxiliar
Los contactores están enclavados mecánica y cierre (NA) por cada contactor, para el (enclavamiento del contacto de apertura) y a
eléctricamente (enclavamiento del contacto automantenimiento. través de un emisor de órdenes. Con
de apertura). Los circuitos principales y de Este puede abrocharse a los contactores tensiones > 500 V se debe prever una pausa
mando se deben cablear conforme a los por arriba. De forma alternativa, también de conmutación de 50 ms.
esquemas de conexión de la página 3/61. se pueden utilizar bloques de contactos Los tiempos de conexión de los distintos
Para la protección de motor se habrán de auxiliares de montaje lateral, que tendrán contactores no se ven influenciados por el
pedir por separado relés de sobrecarga que montarse respectivamente por fuera enclavamiento mecánico.
3RU11 para el montaje directo o individual, o al contactor.
bien aparatos de disparo por termistor para Limitación de sobretensión
la protección del motor. Componentes para Cuando se utilice el enclavamiento mecánico
el automontaje Para el automontaje de montable por el lado frontal en contactores En todas las combinaciones de contactores
combinaciones de contactores para invertir, de los tamaños S0 hasta S3, se dispone con se pueden montar elementos RC o varistores
se ofrecen juegos de piezas de todos los S0 y S2 de 2 aperturas de fijación por para amortiguar las sobretensiones de
tamaños. Los contactores, los relés de contactor en el lado frontal para bloques de desconexión de la bobina.
sobrecarga así como, a partir del tamaño SO, contactos auxiliares de 1 polo; con S3 se Al igual que con los contactores individuales,
el enclavamiento mecánico y, con pueden montar además tres bloques de los limitadores de sobretensión se pueden
accionamiento por pulsador, los bloques de contactos auxiliares de 1 polo. Al hacerlo se colocar. o bien en los contactores por arriba
contactos auxiliares para el automan- habrá de tener en cuenta la dotación máxima (S00). o bien en los bornes de conexión de la
tenimiento, se han de pedir por separado. de contactos auxiliares de los contactores, bobina por arriba o por abajo (S0 hasta S3).
Se han de observar las siguientes

indicaciones:
Tamaño S00:
• Con accionamiento por contacto permanente
Utilizar contactores con un contacto de
apertura en el aparato básico para el
enclavamiento eléctrico.
• Con accionamiento por pulsador
Utilizar contactores con un contacto de
apertura en el aparato básico, para el
enclavamiento eléctrico, adicionalmente se
requiere un bloque de contactos auxiliares
por contactor con un contacto de cierre
como mínimo para el automantenimiento.
Combinación de contactores para

arrancador reversible, tamaño S00
16 Siemens
Tabla de selección
Contactores
Tamaño Tipo Tensión y frecuencia Número Número Peso
nominal de la bobina
V. 60Hz
de catálogo
anterior
de catálogo
actual
kg 1
S00 3RT1016 - 1AB01 24 40016889 3RT10161AB01 0.19
9A 3RT1016 - 1AK61 120 40015050 3RT10161AK61 0.19
3RT1016 - 1AN21 220 40015051 3RT10161AN21 0.19
3RT1016 - 1AR11 440 40015052 3RT10161AR11 0.19
S00 3RT1017 - 1AB01 24 40020684 3RT10171AB01 0.19

12 A 3RT1017 - 1AK61 115 40020658 3RT10171AK61
3RT1016
3RT1017 - 1AN21 220 40032802 3RT10171AN21
3RT1017 - 1AS61 440 40032803 3RT10171AS61
S0 3RT1026 - 1AK60 120 40024191 3RT10261AK60 0.31

25 A 3RT1026 - 1AN20 220 40024192 3RT10261AN20 0.31
3RT1026 - 1AR10 440 40024193 3RT10261AR10 0.31
S2 3RT1034 - 1AJ16 115 30012376 3RT10341AJ16 0.78

32 A 3RT1034 - 1AN16 220 30012414 3RT10341AN16 0.78
3RT1034 - 1AR16 440 30012429 3RT10341AR16 0.78
S2 3RT1036 - 1AJ16 115 30012449 3RT10361AJ16 0.85

3RT1026 50 A 3RT1036 - 1AN16 220 30012450 3RT10361AN16 0.85
3RT1036 - 1AR16 440 30012451 3RT10361AR16 0.85
S3 3RT1045 - 1AJ16 115 30012430 3RT10451AJ16 1.78

80 A 3RT1045 - 1AN16 220 30012431 3RT10451AN16 1.78
3RT1045 - 1AR16 440 30012432 3RT10451AR16 1.78
S6 3RT1054 - 1AF36 115 40029668 3RT10541AF36 3.5

115 A 3RT1054 - 1AP36 220 40029669 3RT10541AP36
3RT1054 - 1AR36 440 40029820 3RT10541AR36
S6 3RT1056 - 6AF36 115 40029670 3RT10566AF36 3.1

185 A 3RT1056 - 6AP36 220 40029671 3RT10566AP36
3RT1056 - 6AR36 440 40029821 3RT10566AR36
3RT1034/36
S10 3RT1065 - 6AF36 115 40029672 3RT10656AF36 5.7
265 A 3RT1065 - 6AP36 220 40029673 3RT10656AP36
3RT1065 - 6AR36 440 40029822 3RT10656AR36
S12 3RT1075 - 6AF36 115 40029674 3RT10756AF36 9.1

400 A 3RT1075 - 6AP36 220 40029675 3RT10756AP36
3RT1075 - 6AR36 440 40029823 3RT10756AR36
S12 3RT1076 - 6AF36 115 40033241 3RT10766AF36 9.1

500A 3RT1076 - 6AP36 220 40036673 3RT10766AP36
3RT1076 - 6AR36 440 40036674 3RT10766AR36
S00 9A 3RT1016 - 1BB41 24 V c.c. 40018014 3RT10161BB41 0.25

3RT1045 S0 17A 3RT1025 - 1BB40 40018015 3RT10251BB40 0.55
S0 25A 3RT1026 - 1BB40 40018016 3RT10261BB40 0.55
S2 40A 3RT1035 - 1BB40 40018017 3RT10351BB40 1.3
Tipo de Tipo Ejecución de No. de Número Peso

Accesorios para
montaje contactos catálogo de catálogo kg
3RT contactores auxiliares anterior actual
frontal
para S00 3RH1911-1FA22 2NA + 2NC 40016080 3RH19111FA22 0.45
para S0 a 3RH1921-1FA22 2NA + 2NC 40016081 3RH19211FA22 0.45
S12
lateral 3RH1921-1DA11 1+1 40015809 3RH19211DA11 0.3

para S0
a S12
Siemens 17
Contactores de corriente alterna tripolares SIRIUS 3RT
Accesorios para contactores 3RT

Tamaño Tipo Ejecución Tipo Número de Número de
Cámara de extinción para contactor catálogo catálogo
anterior actual
S2 3RT1034 Cámara de 3RT1934-7A 30016065 3RT19347A
S2 3RT1036 extinción tripolar 3RT1936-7A 30016066 3RT19367A
S3 3RT1045 3RT1946-7A 30016067 3RT19467A
S6 3RT1054 3RT1954-7A 40030747 3RT19547A
S6 3RT1056 3RT1956-7A 40030748 3RT19567A
S10 3RT1065 3RT1965-7A 40030749 3RT19657A
S12 3RT1075 3RT1975-7A 40030750 3RT19757A
S12 3RT1076 3RT1976-7A 40036740 3RT19767A
Juego de contactos principales Fijo Removible
S2 3RT1034 6 3 3RT1934-6A 30016061 3RT19346A
S2 3RT1036 6 3 3RT1936-6A 30016062 3RT19366A
S3 3RT1045 6 3 3RT1946-6A 30016063 3RT19466A
S6 3RT1054 6 3 3RT1954-6A 40024913 3RT19546A
S6 3RT1056 6 3 3RT1956-6A 40031026 3RT19566A
S10 3RT1065 6 3 3RT1965-6A 40024914 3RT19656A
S12 3RT1075 6 3 3RT1975-6A 40030746 3RT19756A
S12 3RT1076 6 3 3RT1976-6A 40036739 3RT19766A
Juego de auxiliares S00 2NA + 2NC 3RTH1911-1FA22 40016080 3RTH19111FA22
Montaje frontal S0 a S12 2NA + 2NC 3RTH1921-1FA22 40016081 3RTH19211FA22
Bobinas magnéticas para Tamaño Contactor V Tipo Número de Número de
accionamientos en c.a. 60 Hz. catálogo catálogo
anterior actual
S0 3RT1026 24 3RT1924-5AC21 40016890 3RT19245AC21
120 3RT1924-5AK61 40016082 3RT19245AK61
220 3RT1924-5AN21 40016083 3RT19245AN21
440 3RT1924-5AR11 40016084 3RT19245AR11
S2 3RT1034 24 3RT1934-5AC11 30016107 3RT19345AC11
120 3RT1934-5AJ11 30016068 3RT19345AJ11
220 3RT1934-5AN11 30016069 3RT19345AN11
440 3RT1934-5AR11 30016070 3RT19345AR11
3RT1036 24 3RT1935-5AC11 30016108 3RT19355AC11
120 3RT1935-5AJ11 30016101 3RT19355AJ11
220 3RT1935-5AN11 30016102 3RT19355AN11
440 3RT1935-5AR11 30016103 3RT19355AR11
S3 3RT1045 24 3RT1945-5AC11 30016109 3RT19455AC11
120 3RT1945-5AJ11 30016104 3RT19455AJ11
220 3RT1945-5AN11 30016105 3RT19455AN11
440 3RT1945-5AR11 30016106 3RT19455AR11
Bobinas para contactor S6 3RT1054/56 115 3RT1955-5AF31 40024915 3RT19555AF31
220 3RT1955-5AP31 40030736 3RT19555AP31
440 3RT1955-5AR31 40030737 3RT19555AR31
S10 3RT1065 115 3RT1965-5AF31 40024916 3RT19655AF31
220 3RT1965-5AP31 40030738 3RT19655AP31
440 3RT1965-5AR31 40030743 3RT19655AR31
S12 3RT1075 / 76 115 3RT1975-5AF31 40024917 3RT19755AF31
220 3RT1975-5AP31 40030744 A7B10000004062
440 3RT1975-5AR31 40030745 3RT19755AR31
Contacto auxiliar S0 a S12 3RH1921-1EA11 40036736 3RT19755AF31
Montaje lateral 40036737 3RT19755AP31
40036738 3RT19755AR31
Enclavamiento mecánico S0, S2, S3 3RA1924-2B 40016098 3RA19242B

S6, S10, S12 3RA1954-2A 40033181 3RA19542A
Módulo de cableado S00* 3RA1913-2A 40016097 3RA19132A
S0 3RA1923-2A 40016099 3RA19232A
S2 3RA1933-2A 40016110 3RA19332A
S3 3RA1943-2A 40016111 3RA19432A
Módulo de unión S00 3RA1911-1A 40015974 3RA19111A
Contactor S0 3RA1921-1A 40015975 3RA19211A
Guardamotor S2 3RA1931-1A 40015976 3RA19311A
S3 3RA1941-1A 40015977 3RA19411A
*Incluye enclavamiento mecánico
18 Siemens
Datos técnicos de contactor tripolar S00

Datos generales
Contactor Tamaño
Tipo
S00
3RT10 16 1
Vida útil mecánica Aparatos básicos Ciclos de 30 mill.
Aparatos básicos con bloque de contactos maniobras 10 mill.
aux. montado
Tensión asignada de aislamiento Ui V 690

(grado 3 de ensuciamiento)
Separación segura entre bobina y contactos principales V 400

(según DIN VDE 0106, parte 101 y A1
Guía forzada sí, tanto en el aparato básico y en el bloque de contactos

auxiliares como entre el aparato básico y el bloque de contactos
auxiliares montado
Temperatura ambiente admisible °C -25 hasta +60 en servicio, -55 hasta +80 en almacenamiento
Grado de protección según IEC 947-1 y DIN 40 050 IP 20, sistema de accionamiento IP 40
Resistencia al choque Impulso rectangular c.a. g/ms 7/5 y 4,2/10

c.c. g/ms 7/5 y 4,2/10
Impulso senoidal c.a. g/ms 9,5/5 y 9,5/10

c.c. g/ms 9,5/5 y 9,5/10
Secciones de conexión
Conexión por tornillo Conductores principales y auxiliares:

(se pueden conectar unifilar mm2 2 x (0,5... 1,5); 2 x (0,75... 2,5) conforme a IEC 947; máx. 2 (0,75... 4)
1 ó 2 conductores) flexible con manguito mm2 2 x (0,5... 1,5); 2 x (0,75... 2,5)
para destornilladores
normalizados del cables AWG, unifilar o multifilar AWG 2 x (18.. 14)
tamaño 2 y Pozidriv 2 Tornillos de conexión M3
Par de apriete Nm 0,8... 1,2 (7 hasta 10.3 lb. in)
Siemens 19

Datos generales
Contactor Tamaño S0
Tipo 3RT10 26
Aparatos básicos con bloque de contactos maniobras 10 mill.
aux. montado


Guía forzada sí, entre los contactos principales y los contactos auxiliares de apertura, al
igual que dentro de los bloques de contactos auxiliares
Temperatura ambiente admisible °C -25 hasta +60 en servicio, -55 hasta +80 en almacén
Grado de protección según IEC 947-1 y DIN 40 050 IP 20, sistema de accionamiento IP 20
Resistencia al choque Impulso rectangular c.a. g/ms 8,5/5 y 4,9/10
c.c. g/ms 10/5 y 7,5/10
Impulso senoidal c.a g/ms 12,5/5 y 7,8/10
c.c g/ms 15/5 y 10/10
Conexión por tornillo Conductor principal

(se pueden conectar unifilar mm2 2 x (1 hasta 2,5); 2 x (2,5 hasta 6)
1 ó 2 conductores) flexible con manguito mm2 2 x (1 hasta 2,5); 2 x (2,5 hasta 6) conforme a IEC 947; máx. 1 x 10
cables AWG, unifilar o multifilar AWG 2 x (14 hasta 10)
Tornillos de conexión M4
par de apriete Nm 2,0 hasta 2,5 (18 hasta 22 lb.in)
Conductor auxiliar mm 2
2 x (0,5... 1,5); 2 x (0,75... 2,5) conforme a IEC 947; máx. 2 x (0,75... 4)
unifilar mm2 2 x (0,5 hasta 1,5); 2 x (0,75 hasta 2,5)
flexible con manguito

par de apriete Nm 0,8 hasta 1,2 (7 hasta 10,3 lb.in)
20 Siemens
Contactores de corriente alterna tripolares SORIUS 3RT

Datos generales
Contactor Tamaño
Tipo
S2
3RT10 3. 1
Aparatos básicoscon bloque de contactos maniobras 10 mill.
aux. montado


Guía forzada sí, entre los contactos principales y contactos auxiliares de

apertura, así como de los bloques de contactos auxiliares
Grado de protección según IEC 947-1 y DIN 40 050 IP 202), sistema de accionamiento IP 40
Resistencia al choque Impulso rectangular c.a./c.c. g/ms 10/5 y 5/10
Impulso senoidal c.a./c.c g/ms 15/5 y 8/10
Conexión por tornillo Conductor principal Conectado el punto Conectado el punto Conectado ambos
(se pueden conectar con borne de caja de presión delantero de presión trasero puntos de presión
1 ó 2 conductores) (según DIN EN 50 027)
flexible con manguito mm2 0,75 hasta 25 0,75 hasta 25 máx. 2 x 16
flexible sin manguito mm2 0,75 hasta 25 0,75 hasta 25 máx. 2 x 16
multifilar mm2 0,75 hasta 35 0,75 hasta 35 máx. 2 x 25
unifilar mm2 0,75 hasta 16 0,75 hasta 16 máx. 2 x 16
conductor de cinta plana (cantidad x mm 6 x 9 x 0,8 6 x 9 x 0,8 2 x (6 x 9 x 0,8)
ancho x grosor)
cables AWG, unifilar o multifilar AWG 18 hasta 2 18 hasta 2 máx. 2 x 2

par de apriete Nm 3 hasta 4,5 (27 hasta 40 lb.in)
Conductor auxiliar
unifilar mm2 2 x (0,5... 1,5); 2 x (0,75... 2,5) conforme a IEC 947; máx. 2 x (0,75... 4)
flexible con manguitos mm2 2 x (0,5 hasta 1,5); 2 x (0,75 hasta 2,5)
Siemens 21

Datos generales
Tipo 3RT10 45.
Aparatos básicoscon bloque de contactos maniobras 5 mill.
aux. montado


Guía forzada sí, entre los contactos principales y contactos auxiliares de apertura, así como
de los bloques de contactos auxiliares
Grado de protección según IEC 947-1 y DIN 40 050 IP 20), sistema de accionamiento IP 40
Resistencia al choque Impulso rectangular c.a./c.c g/ms 10/5 y 5/10
Impulso senoidal c.a./c.c
g/ms 15/5 y 8/10
Conexión por tornillo Conductor principal Conectado el punto Conectado el punto Conectado ambos
(se pueden conectar con borne de caja de presión delantero de presión trasero puntos de presió
1 ó 2 conductores) (según DIN EN 50 027) mm2 0,75 hasta 25 0,75 hasta 25 máx. 2 x 16
flexible con manguito mm2 0,75 hasta 25 0,75 hasta 25 máx. 2 x 16
flexible sin manguito mm2 0,75 hasta 35 0,75 hasta 35 máx. 2 x 25
multifilar mm2 0,75 hasta 16 0,75 hasta 16 máx. 2 x 16
unifilar mm 6 x 9 x 0,8 6 x 9 x 0,8 2 x (6 x 9 x 0,8)
conductor de cinta plana (cantidad x
ancho x grosor)
cables AWG AWG 18 hasta 2 18 hasta 2 máx. 2 x 2
Conexión de pletinas mm 18 x 10 En la conexión de pletinas mayor de 12 x 10 mm, se
de coble taladradas máx. dimensiones transversales necesita la tapa 3RT19 46-4EA1 para mantener la
distancia entre fases
Sin borne de caja con flexible con terminal de cable mm2 10 hasta 50 En la conexión de conductores mayores de
terminales de cable multifilar con terminal de cable mm2 10 hasta 70 25 mm2 se necesita la tapa 3RT19 46-4EA1
(se pueden conecta cables AWG, unifilar o multifilar AWG 7 hasta 1/0 para mantener la distancia entre fases
1 ó 2 conductores)
Tornillo de conexión M 6 x 20
par de apriete
Nm 4 hasta 6 (36 hasta 53 lb.in)
Conductor auxiliar:
unifilar mm2 2 x (0,5... 1,5); 2 x (0,75... 2,5) conforme a IEC 947; máx. 2 x (0,75... 4)
flexible con manguitos mm2 2 x (0,5 hasta 1,5); 2 x (0,75 hasta 2,5)
Tornillos de conexión
M3
22 Siemens

Datos generales
Contactor Tamaño
Tipo
S6
3RT1054, 3RT1056 1
Vida útil mecánica Aparatos básicos Ciclos de 10 mill
maniobras


Guía forzada Sí tanto entre contactos principales y contactos NC auxiliares, así como
dentro de los bloques de contactos auxiliares.
Temperatura ambiente admisible °C -25 hasta +60/+55 con interface As-i, -55 hasta +80
Grado de protección según IEC 947-1 y DIN 40 050 IP 00/abierto, sistema de accionamiento IP20
Resistencia al choque Impulso rectangular c.a./c.c. g/ms 8,5/5 y 4,2/10
Impulso senoidal c.a./c.c g/ms 13,4/5 y 6,5/10
Conexión por tornillo Cables principales Borne delantero Borne posterior Ambos bornes
con borne tipo marco conectado conectado conectado
3RT19 55-4G (55 kW)
flexible con manguito mm2 16 a 70 16 a 70 max.1x50.1x70
flexible sin manguito mm2 16 a 70 16 a 70 max.1x50.1x70
NSB00480
NSB00481
NSB00479
multifilar mm2 16 a 70 16 a 70 máx. 2 x 70
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 6a2/0 6 a 2/0 máx.2x 1/0
cable de cinta plana mm min. 3 x 9 x 0,8 mln. 3 x 9 x 0,8 máx. 2 x (6x15,5x0,8)

(cantidad x ancho x grosor) mm máx. 6 x 15,5 x 0,8 máx.6x 15,5x0,8
con borne tipo marco 3RT19 56-4G
flexible con manguito mm2 16 a 120 16 a 120 máx. 1 x95, 1 x120

flexible sin manguito mm2 16 a 120 16 a 120 máx. 1 x 95, 1 x
multifilar mm2 16 a120 16 a 120 120
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 6 a 250 kcmil 6 a 250 kcmil máx. 2 x 12
máx. 2 x 3/0
cable de cinta plana mm mín. 3 x 9 x 0,8 mín. 3 x 9 x 0,8 máx. 2 x (10 x
(cantidad x ancho x grosor) mm máx 10 x 15,5 x 0,8 máx. 10 x 15,5 x0.8 15,5x0,8)
tornillos de conexión M 10(hex.int.llave del 4)
par de apriete Nm 10a12(90a110lb.in)
sin bornes tipo marco/conexión por

barras
flexible con terminal de cable mm2 16 a 95 Si se conectan terminales de cable según
multifilar con terminal de cable mm2 25 a 120 DIN 46 235, a partir de la sección de conductor
95 mm2 se necesita la tapa 3RT19 56-4EA1 para
mantener la distancia entre fases.
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 4 a 250 kcmil
barra de conexión (ancho máx.) 17
tornillos de conexión mm M8x25
(llave del 13)
par de apriete Nm 10a14(89a124lb.in)
Cables auxiliares:
unifilar mm2 2 x (O 5 a 1.5); 2 x (0,75 a 2.5) según IEC 60 947; máx. 2 x (0.75 a 4)
flexible con manguito mm2 2 x (0,5 a 1.5); 2 x (0.75 a 2.5)
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares AWG 2 x (18 a 14)
tornillos de conexión M 3 (PZ 2)
Siemens 23

Datos generales

Tipo 3RT1065
maniobras


con borne tipo marco 3RT19 66-4G conectado conectado conectado
flexible con manguito mm2 70 a 240 120 a 185 mín. 2 x 50,

máx. 2 x 185
NSB00480
NSB00481
NSB00479
flexible sin manguito mm2 70 a 240 120 a 185 mín. 2 x 50,
máx. 2 x 185
multifilar mm2 95 a 300 120 a 240 mín. 2 x 70,
máx. 2 x 240
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 3/0 a 600 kcmil 250 a 500 kcmil mín. 2 x 2/0,
máx. 2 x 500 kcmil
cable de cinta plana mm min. 6 x 9 x 0,8 mln. 6 x 9 x 0,8 máx. 2 x (20x24x0,5)

(cantidad x ancho x grosor) mm máx. 20 x 24 x 0,5 máx.20 x 24 x 0,5
par de apriete Nm 20a22(180 a195lb.in)
barras
flexible con terminal de cable mm2 50 a 240 En caso de conexión de terminales de cable
multifilar con terminal de cable mm2 70 a 240 según DIN 46 234 a partir de una sección de
240 mm2 así como DIN 46 235 a partir de una
sección de 185 mm2 se requiere la tapa
cubrebornes 3RT19 66-4EA1 para respetar la
distancia entre fases.
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 2/0 a 500 kcmil

barra de conexión (ancho máx.) mm 25
tornillos de conexión M 10 x 30
(llave del 17)
par de apriete Nm 14 a 24(124 a 210lb.in)
Cables auxiliares:
unifilar mm2 2 x (0,5 a 1,5); 2 x (0,75 a 2,5) según IEC 60 947; máx. 2 x (0,75 a 4)
flexible con manguito mm2 2 x (0,5 a 1,5); 2 x (0,75 a 2,5)
tornillos de conexión M3(PZ 2)
par de apriete Nm 0,8 a 1,2 (7 a 10,3lb.ln)
24 Siemens

Datos generales
Contactor Tamaño
Tipo
S12
3RT1075 / 3RT1076 1
maniobras


con borne tipo marco 3RT19 66-4G conectado conectado conectado
flexible con manguito mm2 70 a 240 120 a 185 mín. 2 x 50,

máx. 2 x 185
NSB00480
NSB00481
NSB00479
flexible sin manguito mm2 70 a 240 120 a 185 mín. 2 x 50,
máx. 2 x 185
multifilar mm2 95 a 300 120 a 240 mín. 2 x 70,
máx. 2 x 240
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 3/0 a 600 kcmil 250 a 500 kcmil mín. 2 x 2/0,
máx. 2 x 500 kcmil
cable de cinta plana mm min. 6 x 9 x 0,8 mln. 6 x 9 x 0,8 máx. 2 x (20x24x0,5)

(cantidad x ancho x grosor) mm máx. 20 x 24 x 0,5 máx.20 x 24 x 0,5
par de apriete Nm 20a22(180 a195lb.in)
barras
flexible con terminal de cable mm2 50 a 240 En caso de conexión de terminales de cable
multifilar con terminal de cable mm2 70 a 240 según DIN 46 234 a partir de una sección de
240 mm2 así como DIN 46 235 a partir de una
sección de 185 mm2 se requiere la tapa
cubrebornes 3RT19 66-4EA1 para respetar la
distancia entre fases.
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 2/0 a 500 kcmil

barra de conexión (ancho máx.) mm 25
tornillos de conexión M 10 x 30
(llave del 17)
par de apriete Nm 14 a 24(124 a 210lb.in)
Cables auxiliares:
unifilar mm2 2 x (0,5 a 1,5); 2 x (0,75 a 2,5) según IEC 60 947; máx. 2 x (0,75 a 4)
flexible con manguito mm2 2 x (0,5 a 1,5); 2 x (0,75 a 2,5)
tornillos de conexión M3(PZ 2)
par de apriete Nm 0,8 a 1,2 (7 a 10,3lb.ln)
Siemens 25
Datos técnicos
Vida útil de los contactos principales
Las curvas características muestran la vida

útil de los contactos de contadores al
maniobrar cargas trifásicas óhmicas e
inductivas (AC-1/AC-3) en dependencia de la
intensidad de corte y de la tensión asignada
de empleo. Condición previa para ello son
auxiliares de mando de maniobra arbitraria,
es decir, no en fase con la red.
La intensidad asignada de empleo Ie

conforme a la categoría de empleo AC-4
(corte de una intensidad asignada 6 veces
mayor que la de empleo) está concebida para
una vida útil de los contactos de por los
menos 200 000 ciclos de maniobra.
Cuando sea suficiente una vida útil de los

contactos inferior, la intensidad asignada de
empleo Ie/AC-4 podrá ser aumentada.
Cuando exista un servicio mixto, es decir,

cuando el servicio de maniobra normal (corte
de la intensidad asignada de empleo,
conforme a la categoría de empleo AC-3) esté
combinado con un servicio pulsatorio
témporal (corte de múltiplos de la intensidad
asignada de empleo, conforme a la categoría
de empleo AC-4). se tendrá que calcular la
vida útil de los contactos, de manera
aproximativa, con la siguiente fórmula:
En la fórmula significan:
X Vida útil de los contados en servcio
mixto, en ciclos de manibra
A Vida útil de los contados en servicio
normal (Ia =Ie) en ciclos ce maniobra
B Vida útil de los contactos en servicio
pulsatorio (Ia = múltiplo de Ie) en ciclos de
maniobra
C Porcentaje de maniobras pulsatorias
dentro de las maniobras totales en
tanto por ciento
En el diagrama significan:
PN = Potencia asignada de motores trifásicos
con rotor de jaula con 400 V
Ia= Intensidad de corte
Ie = Intensidad asignada de empleo
26 Siemens
Contactores de corriente alterna tripolares 3TF
Datos técnicos
Vida útil de los contactos principales

1
Siemens 27
Dimensiones en mm
Distancia lateral con las piezas puestas a tierra = 6 mm
Dimensiones divergentes para

contactores, tamaño S00 con conexión
por resorte (Cage Clamp):
Altura: 60mm
Profundidad de construcción con
bloque de contactos auxiliares: 110 mm
2) Bloque de contactos auxiliares

(también en ejecución compatible
con a electrónica 3RH19 11-1N...)
3) Limitador de sobretensión (también
con bloque de apoyo a la
desconexión 3RH19 16-1GA00)
Contactores 3RT10 1
Tamaños S00, conexión por tornillo con limitador de sobretensión,
bloque de contactos auxiliares y relé de sobrecarga montado
a = 3 mm con < 240 V

a = 7 mm con < 240 V
b = c.c. 10 mm más profundo que c.a.
1) Bloque de contactos auxiliares,
lateralmente montable
enchufable por el lado frontal
(de 1, 2 y 4 polos)
3) Limitador de sobretensión
Contactores 3RT10 2
Tamaños S0 con limitador de sobretensión, bloque de
contactos auxiliares y relé de sobrecarga montado
a = 0 mm con varistor, diodo y < 240 V

a = 3,5 mm con varistor y < 240 V
a = 21 mm con elemento RC y
combinación de diodos
(de 1, 2 y 4 polos)
Contactores 3RT10 3
Tamaños S2 con limitador de sobretensión, bloque de
contactos auxiliares y relé de sobrecarga montado
28 Siemens
Dimensiones en mm
1
(de 1, 2 y 4 polos)
4) Plano de taladros
5) Fijación sobre perfil de 35 mm y
15 mm de profundidad según
DIN EN 50 022 o perfil de 75 mm
según DIN EN 50 023
6) Hexágono interior de 4 mm
Contactores 3RT10 4
Tamaños S3
con limitador de sobretensión, bloque de
contactos auxiliares y relé de sobrecarga
montado
Distancia a piezas puesias a tierra con relé de sobrecarga montado en contactor.

lateral 10 mm frontal 20 mm
k = 120 mm (distancia mínima para
sacar la bobina)
1) 2ºbloque de cont aux , montable
lateralmente
2) Bloque de contactos aux , montable
frontalmente
3) Elemento RC
4) Relé de sobrecarga 3RB10 montado
5) Bloque de bornes 3RT 19 55-4G
(hexágono interior 4 mm)
6) Bloque de bornes 3RT 19 56-4G
(hexágono interior 4 mm)
7) Conexión PLC 24 V DC y conmutador
(en3RT1...-.N) '¡
8) Módulo electrónico con señalización
de vida útil restante (en el lateral
derecho no es posible montar un
bloque de contactos auxiliares)
Contactores 3RT10 5, 3RT14 5

Tamaño S6
con bloque de contactos auxiliares,
montado lateral y frontalmente, relé de
sobrecarga montado y bornes tipo marco,
módulo electrónico lateral con indicación de
vida útil restante.
Siemens 29
Dimensiones en mm

(de 1, 2 y 4 polos)
4) Plano de taladros
5) Fijación sobre perfil de 35 mm y
15 mm de profundidad según
DIN EN 50 022 o perfil de 75 mm
según DIN EN 50 023
6) Hexágono interior de 4 mm

Tamaño S10
Para tamaños S 10 y S 12 Distancia a piezas puestas a tierra con relé de sobrecarga

montado contacto lateral: 10mm frontal 20 mm
k =150 mm (distancia mínima pará

sacar la bobina)
1) 2º Bloque de cont. aux,. montable
lateralmente
2) Bloque de contados aux,. montable
frontalmente
3) Elemento RC
4) Relé de sobrecarga 3RB10 montado
5) Bloque de bornes (hexágono interior
6 mm)
6) Conexión PLC 24 V DC y conmutador
(en3RT1...-.N)
7) Módulo electrónico con indicación de
vida útil restante (en el lateral
derecho no es posible montar un
bloque de contactos auxiliares)

Tamaño S12
30 Siemens
D50 PLC
User’s Manual
The information contained in this manual is the property of Cutler-Hammer, Inc. Information in this
manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Cutler-
Hammer, Inc.
Any Cutler-Hammer software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement. The
software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the
law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement. No part of
this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of Cutler-Hammer, Inc.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in paragraph
(b)(3)(B) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DAR 7-104.9(a).
Contractor/Manufacturer is Cutler-Hammer, P.O. Box 6166, Westerville, OH 43086-6166.
TRADEMARKS
Commercial names of products from other manufacturers or developers that appear in this manual are
registered or unregistered trademarks of those respective manufacturers or developers, which have
expressed neither approval nor disapproval of Cutler-Hammer products.
Copyright Cutler-Hammer, Inc. 1998. All rights reserved.
Catalog Number D50SA122
P/N 01-00478-00
Preface i
Preface
Welcome to Cutler-Hammer’s D50 PLC User's Manual. This preface describes the contents of this
manual and provides information on Support Services.
ii D50 PLC User's Manual
About This Manual
Purpose
This manual focuses on describing the D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).
What’s Inside
This manual is organized in the following way:
Preface
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 2: System Configuration
Chapter 3: Product Specification
Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring
Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory
Chapter 6: Instructions
Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems
Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol
Appendix B: Special I/O Functions
Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor
Preface iii
Support Services
It is Cutler-Hammer’s goal to ensure your greatest possible satisfaction with the operation of our
products. We are dedicated to providing fast, friendly, and accurate assistance. That is why we offer
you so many ways to get the support you need. Whether it’s by phone, fax, modem, or mail, you can
access Cutler-Hammer support information 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Our wide range of
services include:
Technical Support 1-800-809-2772

If you are in the U.S. or Canada, you can take advantage of our toll-free line for technical assistance
with hardware and software product selection, system design and installation, and system debugging
and diagnostics. Technical support engineers are available for calls during regular business hours
(8 am - 5:30 pm EST) by calling 1-800-809-2772. International calls can be made to either the Tech
Line at 1-800-809-2772 (toll call) or the Cutler-Hammer main business line at 614-882-3282.
Emergency Technical Support 1-800-809-2772

Because machines do not run on a nine-to-five schedule, we offer emergency after-hours technical
support. A technical support engineer can be paged for emergencies involving plant down situations or
safety issues. Emergency support calls are automatically routed directly to our answering service after-
hours (5:30 pm - 8 am EST) and weekends. For emergency technical support, call 1-800-809-2772.
Does not currently include product repairs or shipping outside normal business hours.
Technical Support Fax 614-882-0417

You can also contact our technical support engineers by faxing your support requests directly to APSC
Westerville at 614-882-0417.
Information Fax-Back Service 614-899-5323

The latest Cutler-Hammer product information, specifications, technical notes and company news is
available to you via fax through our direct document request service at 614-899-5323. Using a touch-
tone phone, you can select any of the info faxes from our automated product literature and technical
document library, punch in a fax number and receive the information immediately.
Bulletin Board Service 614-899-5209

Parameters: 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity none, 9600-28.8K baud.
If you have modem access, you can dial in directly to our electronic bulletin board service for the latest
product and company information. File sharing, product software downloads and our user message
service are just a few of the things you will find online at 614-899-5209.
Website and E-mail Address

http://www.cutlerhammer.eaton.com/automation
chatechsupport@ch.etn.com
If you have Internet capabilities, you also have access to technical support via our website at
http://www.cutlerhammer.eaton.com. The website includes technical notes, frequently asked questions,
release notes, and other technical documentation. This direct technical support connection also offers
you the ability to request assistance and exchange software files electronically.
Technical support messages and files can be sent to chatechsupport@ch.etn.com.

iv D50 PLC User's Manual
Software Update Service 1-800-809-2772

FAX 614-899-4141
We also offer you the opportunity to take advantage of software upgrades, advanced software notices,
and special software promotions through our Software Update Service. When you register your
software, you will receive one-year of free or reduced-price upgrades along with all the other benefits
of membership, including 48-hour shipping of software upgrades. Contact the Software Update Service
at 1-800-809-2772 or fax 614-899-4141.
Repair and Upgrade Service 614-882-3282 ext. 7601

FAX 614-882-3414
Our well-equipped Customer Service department is ready to assist you with repairs, upgrades, and
spare parts services. If a situation arises where one of these services is needed, just call 614-882-3282
x7601 or fax 614-882-3414.
Product Ordering Service 614-882-3282

FAX 614-882-6532
Authorized Cutler-Hammer distributors may place product orders directly with our Order Processing
department by calling 614-882-3282 x406 or faxing 614-882-6532. For information on your local
distributor, call the Cutler-Hammer Tech Line.
Customer Support Center 1-800-356-1243

Authorized Cutler-Hammer distributors and Cutler-Hammer sales offices can get assistance for Cutler-
Hammer standard and component product lines through the Customer Support Center. Call the
Customer Support Center for the following assistance:
1. Stock availability, proof of shipment, or to place an order.

2. Expedite an existing order.
3. Product assistance and product price information.
4. Product returns other than warranty returns.
For information on your local distributor or sales office, call the Cutler-Hammer Tech Line at 1-800-
809-2772.
Correspondence Address Cutler-Hammer

173 Heatherdown Drive
Westerville, OH 43081
Table of Contents v
Table of Contents
Preface I
About This Manual ................................................................................................................................................ii
Purpose...........................................................................................................................................................ii
What's Inside ..................................................................................................................................................ii
Support Services....................................................................................................................................................iii
Table of Contents v
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
Overview of the Manual......................................................................................................................................... 2
Features of the D320 PLC...................................................................................................................................... 2
Self Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................. 3
Large Program Memory................................................................................................................................. 3
Integrated 700mA Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 3
Battery-Free Program Backup........................................................................................................................ 3
I/O Module Support ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Peripheral Support.......................................................................................................................................... 4
System Installation Considerations ........................................................................................................................ 4
Environmental Considerations ....................................................................................................................... 4
Preventing PLC System Malfunctions ........................................................................................................... 4
Chapter 2: System Configuration 5
D50 PLC System Components............................................................................................................................... 6
D50 PLC Product List............................................................................................................................................ 7
D50 PLC Expansion Configurations...................................................................................................................... 9
Chapter 3: Product Specification 11
Environmental Operating Ranges ........................................................................................................................ 12
CPU Performance Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 12
Electrical Specifications....................................................................................................................................... 13
Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................................ 13
24VDC Input Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 14
115VAC Input Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 15
Relay Output Specifications......................................................................................................................... 16
Transistor (24VDC) Output Specifications .................................................................................................. 17
SSR (115VAC) Output Specifications ......................................................................................................... 18
Name and Function of Controller Components.................................................................................................... 19
Chapter 4: Installation And Wiring 21
System Design Considerations............................................................................................................................. 22
Power Supply Wiring................................................................................................................................... 22
Interlock Circuit and Emergency Stop Circuit (Safety measures in system design) .................................... 22
Momentary Power Failure and Voltage Drop .............................................................................................. 23
System Installation Guidelines............................................................................................................................. 23
Environmental Usage Conditions................................................................................................................. 23
Control Panel Installation............................................................................................................................. 24
System Wiring and Installation Procedures ......................................................................................................... 26
Installation Dimensions................................................................................................................................ 26
vi D320 PLC User's Manual
DIN Rail Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 26

Unit Installation Height ............................................................................................................................... 27
Expansion Cable Connection....................................................................................................................... 27
Power Supply Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Power wiring................................................................................................................................................ 28
Grounding.................................................................................................................................................... 28
Chapter 5: CPU Operation And Memory 29
Terminology ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
Overview of CPU Operation Mode ..................................................................................................................... 31
What Is the CPU Operation Mode? ............................................................................................................. 31
Run Mode (operating).................................................................................................................................. 31
Stop Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 31
Error Mode .................................................................................................................................................. 31
CPU Processing Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 32
Program Processing Procedure .................................................................................................................... 32
Introduction to Registers...................................................................................................................................... 33
Internal/External Address Designation ................................................................................................................ 33
Expression Example ............................................................................................................................................ 35
Double Mode Address Designation ..................................................................................................................... 36
Absolute Address Designation............................................................................................................................. 37
I/O Address Designation...................................................................................................................................... 38
Digital I/O Address Designation.................................................................................................................. 38
Analog I/O Address Designation ................................................................................................................. 38
Special Internal Addresses................................................................................................................................... 39
Timer/Counter (TC0-255) ................................................................................................................................... 44
Chapter 6: Instructions 47
Basic Instructions................................................................................................................................................. 48
Timer/Counter Instructions.................................................................................................................................. 49
Comparison Instructions ...................................................................................................................................... 50
Substitution, Increment/Decrement Instructions.................................................................................................. 50
Arithmetic Instructions ........................................................................................................................................ 51
Logic Instructions ................................................................................................................................................ 52
Rotation Instructions............................................................................................................................................ 52
Word Conversion Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 53
Bit Conversion Instructions ................................................................................................................................. 54
Transfer Instructions............................................................................................................................................ 55
Block Processing Instructions.............................................................................................................................. 56
How to Read the Description of Instructions....................................................................................................... 57
Instruction.................................................................................................................................................... 57
Ladder.......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Description................................................................................................................................................... 58
Example ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
Basic Instruction Details...................................................................................................................................... 59
STR, STN .................................................................................................................................................... 59
AND, ANN, (ADN)..................................................................................................................................... 60
OR, ORN ..................................................................................................................................................... 61
OUT, SET, RST........................................................................................................................................... 62
NOT............................................................................................................................................................. 63
STR DIF, STR DFN, AND DIF, AND DFN, OR DIF, OR DFN ............................................................... 64
ANB, ORB................................................................................................................................................... 65
MCS, MCR.................................................................................................................................................. 66
Table of Contents vii
Timer/Counter Instruction Details........................................................................................................................ 67

TIM, SST ..................................................................................................................................................... 67
UC, DC......................................................................................................................................................... 69
UDC ............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Comparison Instruction Details............................................................................................................................ 73
=, <>, >, >=, <=, < ....................................................................................................................................... 73
Substitution, Increment, Decrement Instruction Details ...................................................................................... 74
LET, DLET .................................................................................................................................................. 74
INC, DINC, INCB, DINCB ......................................................................................................................... 75
DEC, DDEC, DECB, DDECB..................................................................................................................... 76
Arithmetic Instruction Details.............................................................................................................................. 77
ADD, DADD, ADDB, DADDB .................................................................................................................. 77
SUB, DSUB, SUBB, DSUBB...................................................................................................................... 79
MUL, DMUL, MULB, DMULB ................................................................................................................. 80
DIV, DDIV, DIVB, DDIVB ........................................................................................................................ 81
ADC, DADC, ADCB, DADCB ................................................................................................................... 82
SBC, DSBC, SBCB, DSBCB....................................................................................................................... 84
ABS, DABS, NEG, DNEG, NOT, DNOT ................................................................................................... 86
Logic Instruction Details...................................................................................................................................... 87
AND, DAND ............................................................................................................................................... 87
OR, DOR...................................................................................................................................................... 88
XOR, DXOR................................................................................................................................................ 89
XNR, DXNR................................................................................................................................................ 90
Rotation Instruction Details ................................................................................................................................. 91
RLC, DRLC ................................................................................................................................................. 91
RRC, DRRC................................................................................................................................................. 92
ROL, DROL................................................................................................................................................. 93
ROR, DROR ................................................................................................................................................ 95
SHL, DSHL.................................................................................................................................................. 96
SHR, DSHR ................................................................................................................................................. 98
Word Conversion Instruction Details................................................................................................................... 99
BCD, DBCD, BIN, DBIN............................................................................................................................ 99
XCHG, DXCHG ........................................................................................................................................ 100
SEG ............................................................................................................................................................ 101
ENCO, DECO ............................................................................................................................................ 102
DIS, UNI .................................................................................................................................................... 104
Bit Conversion Instruction Details ..................................................................................................................... 106
BSET, BRST, BNOT, BTST ..................................................................................................................... 106
SUM........................................................................................................................................................... 108
SC, RC, CC ................................................................................................................................................ 109
Transfer Instruction Details................................................................................................................................ 110
LDR, DLDR............................................................................................................................................... 110
STO, DSTO................................................................................................................................................ 112
MOV, FMOV............................................................................................................................................. 114
BMOV, BFMV .......................................................................................................................................... 116
Block Processing Instruction Details ................................................................................................................. 117
FOR, DFOR, NEXT................................................................................................................................... 117
JMP, LBL................................................................................................................................................... 119
JMPS, JMPE .............................................................................................................................................. 120
CALL, SBR, RET ...................................................................................................................................... 122
WAT .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
END ........................................................................................................................................................... 125
viii D320 PLC User's Manual
Chapter 7: Testing And Troubleshooting 127

Test Precautions................................................................................................................................................. 128
System Checks................................................................................................................................................... 128
Testing Procedures............................................................................................................................................. 130
Correcting Errors ............................................................................................................................................... 132
System Check ............................................................................................................................................ 132
Power Supply Check.................................................................................................................................. 133
Run Check ................................................................................................................................................. 134
Error Check................................................................................................................................................ 135
I/O Check................................................................................................................................................... 136
Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection Tables....................................................................................... 138
Periodic Inspection and Preventive Maintenance ...................................................................................... 141
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems 143
Noise Occurrence............................................................................................................................................... 144
Types of Noise........................................................................................................................................... 144
Electrical Noise Fundamental Definitions ................................................................................................. 144
Sources of Noise ........................................................................................................................................ 145
Advised Installation Practices............................................................................................................................ 146
Shield the PLC........................................................................................................................................... 146
Proper Cable Selection .............................................................................................................................. 146
Ground the PLC......................................................................................................................................... 146
Isolation and Filtering Techniques..................................................................................................................... 147
Isolation ..................................................................................................................................................... 147
Filters ......................................................................................................................................................... 148
Methods of Handling Large Voltage Spikes Such as Lightning........................................................................ 149
Surge Absorber .......................................................................................................................................... 149
Burying Wire ............................................................................................................................................. 149
Shielding Cabling .............................................................................................................................................. 150
Methods to Handle I/O Inductive Loads............................................................................................................ 151
Warning ............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................. 154
Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol 155
Communication Rules ....................................................................................................................................... 156
Communication Environment.................................................................................................................... 156
Communication Protocol ................................................................................................................................... 156
Step 1Query (Q)..................................................................................................................................... 156
Step 2Query Acknowledge (QA)........................................................................................................... 156
Step 3Response Request (RR) ............................................................................................................... 156
Step 4Response (R)................................................................................................................................ 156
Step 5Repeated Response ...................................................................................................................... 157
Communications Delay.............................................................................................................................. 157
Example ..................................................................................................................................................... 157
CPU ID ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
Function Codes Included in the Query ...................................................................................................... 158
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) ........................................................................................................ 159
The Structure of the Communications Frame .................................................................................................... 160
Read Bits.................................................................................................................................................... 161
Write Bits................................................................................................................................................... 162
Read Words ............................................................................................................................................... 163
Write Words .............................................................................................................................................. 164
Table of Contents ix
Read Bits and Words.................................................................................................................................. 165

Write Bits and Words................................................................................................................................. 166
Communication Program Example .................................................................................................................... 167
Appendix B: Special I/O Functions 173
Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 174
High Speed Counter ................................................................................................................................... 174
Configurable Input Response Delay........................................................................................................... 174
Pulse Catch Input ....................................................................................................................................... 174
Pulse Output............................................................................................................................................... 174
Special I/O Function Registers........................................................................................................................... 175
High Speed Counter ........................................................................................................................................... 176
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 176
Bit Registers............................................................................................................................................... 177
Programming Procedure............................................................................................................................. 178
Configurable Input Response Delay................................................................................................................... 179
Pulse Catch Input ............................................................................................................................................... 180
Pulse Output....................................................................................................................................................... 181
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 181
Pulse Mode Programming Procedure......................................................................................................... 183
PWM Mode Programming Procedure........................................................................................................ 184
Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor 185
Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 186
Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
Part Descriptions ................................................................................................................................................ 187
Instruction LED’s....................................................................................................................................... 187
Status LED’s .............................................................................................................................................. 187
Register LED’s........................................................................................................................................... 188
Address/Data LED Display........................................................................................................................ 188
Instruction Keys ......................................................................................................................................... 188
Function Keys ............................................................................................................................................ 189
Operating Procedures ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Clear Program ............................................................................................................................................ 191
Add Instruction........................................................................................................................................... 192
Monitor Program........................................................................................................................................ 193
Edit Program .............................................................................................................................................. 197
Error Checking ........................................................................................................................................... 200
Monitor I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 201
Run/Stop PLC ............................................................................................................................................ 204
Instruction Codes ............................................................................................................................................... 205
Basic Instructions ....................................................................................................................................... 205
Advanced Instructions................................................................................................................................ 206
Programming Examples ..................................................................................................................................... 208
Example 1 – Basic Instructions .................................................................................................................. 208
Example 2 – Timer Instructions ................................................................................................................. 210
Example 3 – Counter Instructions .............................................................................................................. 211
Example 4 – Comparison/Advanced Instructions ...................................................................................... 213
x D320 PLC User's Manual
Introduction
Welcome to the D50 PLC User's Manual. The D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a small
application industrial controller, designed to provide maximum flexibility at a minimum cost. This
manual will give you a complete understanding of how to install and program the D50 PLC. It also
includes complete product specifications, and a description of the various products that work with the
D50 PLC.
This chapter contains:
• An overview of this manual

• The features of the D50 PLC
• System installation considerations
2 D50 PLC User's Manual
Overview of the Manual

This manual contains the following information:
• Chapter 1 introduces the D50 PLC by describing its features and discussing installation
considerations.
• Chapter 2 discusses various system configurations and products that can be used with the D50
PLC.
• Chapter 3 gives performance specifications and operating ranges of the CPU and the D50
series products.
• Chapter 4 describes installation and wiring guidelines and procedures including system design
considerations, wiring the power supply, and connecting the PLC to a PC.
• Chapter 5 introduces many concepts you need to know to program the D50 PLC including
terminology, how the registers are used, different types of address designations, and the CPU
processing procedure.
• Chapter 6 presents detailed information on the Instruction Set that is used by the D50 PLC.
• Chapter 7 discusses testing and troubleshooting procedures.
• Chapter 8 describes electrical interference or noise and the ways you can reduce its influence.
• Appendix A gives rules and procedures for D50 PLC communication.
• Appendix B details the configuration and operation of the integrated special I/O functions of
the D50 PLC, including High Speed counters, Pulse Output, and adjustable inputs.
• Appendix C describes mnemonic programming and the use of the D50 Pocket Editor.
Features of the D50 PLC

The D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a versatile and dependable industrial controller,
designed to handle a wide range of small control applications to improve productivity and reduce
operating costs. This “micro” or “brick” PLC provides high-speed processing of user control programs,
and comes with a complete line of expansion I/O modules, including digital and analog. These features
combine to provide the right solution for a multitude of applications.
• The D50 PLC is designed for small-sized control applications that require from 1 to 56
control points, high-speed count or analog capability, and advanced functionality.
• The D50 PLC is built to simplify operation, maintenance, and repair with its modular design.
• I/O flexibility is achieved through the wide variety of available digital and analog modules,
covering a broad range of voltage and current ratings.
The D50 PLC has many additional features that combine to make it the ideal choice for many control
applications.
Self Diagnostics
When placed in the Run mode, the D50 PLC performs startup self-diagnostics and error-checking on
the processor, control program, and I/O system. Error status information is stored internally, providing
for quick and easy troubleshooting of system and programming errors.
Large Program Memory

Sufficient program capacity is furnished for even the most demanding applications. Internal program
memory handles up to 2048 separate control steps.
Integrated 700mA Power Supply

The AC-powered D50 PLC controller provides up to 700mA of 24VDC output power. This can
eliminate the need for an additional power supply for standard 24VDC control power requirements.
Battery-Free Program Backup

An EEPROM is used to provide battery-free permanent program and data storage.
I/O Module Support

The D50 PLC I/O expansion module line includes complete coverage of all major standard I/O
requirements. Digital inputs can be of 24 VDC or 115 VAC type, while digital outputs can be 24 VDC
transistor, 115VAC SSR, or relay type. Analog support is available for voltage and current A/D and
D/A.
Peripheral Support
The D50 PLC has two program loader software packages available for use on standard PCs: the DOS-
based GPC5, and the Windows-based WinGPC. These packages provide advanced programming,
monitoring, editing, and troubleshooting for the D50 PLC. A dedicated hand-held programmer is also
available for harsh environments. Cutler-Hammer also offers a complete line of Operator Interface
products and HMI software packages compatible with the D50 PLC.
Note: When this manual uses the term GPC, either GPC5 or WinGPC can be used.
System Installation Considerations
Environmental Considerations
The D50 PLC system should never be installed under the following environmental conditions:
1. Ambient temperature outside the range of 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F).

2. Direct sunlight.
3. Humidity outside the range of 20% to 90%.
4. Altitudes greater than 10,000 ft. (3,000 m).

5. Corrosive or dusty air.
6. High voltage, high magnetics, or high electromagnetic waves.
7. Locations subject to direct impact greater than 10G or vibrations greater than 1G @ 57-2000
Hz.
Preventing PLC System Malfunctions

1. Use an isolation transformer and line filter on the incoming power to the PLC when in the
vicinity of equipment using or producing high current, high voltage, or large magnetic fields.
2. Separate the main PLC power line ground from all other power grounds. Always use triple-
grounding.
3. Do not exceed the current and power rating of the external 24 VDC provided by the D50
power supply.
4. Avoid system faults due to programming errors by reading and fully understanding this
system manual and the PLC instruction set.
5. Perform regular preventive maintenance on installed systems, checking devices and wiring for
potential breakdowns and failures.
System Configuration
This chapter provides information on the various products that are available for the D50 PLC. It
includes diagrams that show the D50 PLC system components and expansion configurations.
• Information about the D50 PLC system components

• Descriptions of the line of D50 PLC products
• The D50 PLC expansion configurations
D50 PLC System Components
Programming Cable
D50CBL10
RS485
RS232
RS232/485 GPC5/WinGPC
Adapter Program Loader
D50CPM485 Software
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7 DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7 +24VDC 0

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN IN NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
D50 Programmable Controller D50 Programmable Controller D50 Series

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RUN CONVERSION
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN ERR IN
ERROR
OUT RUN OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5
STOP 0 1 2 3 4 5
ANALOG OUTPUT
Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer

IN 100-240V GND OUT OUT OUT NC NC NC NC CH0 CH1 CH0 CH1
GND OUT OUT OUT
C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5 NC NC C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5 I G I G V G V G
D50 Controller Digital Expander Analog Expander

(up to 3) (up to 2)
D50 PLC Product List

Controllers
Name Catalog # Product Description Remarks

Controller D50CR14 115/230VAC Power, 24VDC Inputs, Relay Outputs All controllers
D50CRA14 115/230VAC Power, 115VAC Inputs, Relay Outputs have 8 digital
inputs and 6
D50CD14 115/230VAC Power, 24VDC Inputs, 24VDC Outputs digital outputs.
D50CAA14 115/230VAC Power, 115VAC Inputs, 115VAC Outputs
D50DCR14 24VDC Power, 24VDC Inputs, Relay Outputs
D50DCD14 24VDC Power, 24VDC Inputs, 24VDC Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion

Digital D50ER14 24VDC Inputs, Relay Outputs All expanders
Expander D50ERA14 115VAC Inputs, Relay Outputs have 8 digital
inputs and 6
D50ED14 24VDC inputs, 24VDC Outputs digital outputs.
D50EAA14 115VAC inputs, 115VAC Outputs
Analog I/O Expansion

Analog D50AIM410V 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, or 4-20mA Analog Inputs 4 Channels
Expander D50AOM210V 0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, or 4-20mA Analog Outputs 2 Channels
Analog/Frequency Converters

A/F Converter 48160-450 Convert Analog 0-10VDC input signal to 0-10kHz Maximum of 2 may
Frequency input to D50 PLC be used per D50
F/A Converter 48160-480 Convert Pulse output from D50 PLC into a 0-10VDC Maximum of 1 may
or 4-20mA analog output signal be used per D50
Programming Equipment

Write, edit, monitor program (mnemonic only) Does not include
Handheld Memory BACK-UP function cable
Program D320PGM500 Also supports the
Loader Backlit LCD screen
D300/D320 PLC’s.
Supports RS-232C/485 communication

Write, edit, monitor program (mnemonic only) Includes cable
Pocket Editor D50PGM10
Supports RS485 communication

GPC5 (DOS) D50CCS35 Software for computer which provides programming, For MS-DOS
WinGPC D50WINCS35 monitoring, uploading, downloading, online editing, For Windows 3.1,
(Windows) error checking, PLC status monitoring, and other 95, 98, NT
troubleshooting and diagnostic features.
Note: When this manual uses the term GPC, either GPC5 or WinGPC can be used.
Programming Cables

RS232C/485 D50CBL10 Handheld Program Loader (PGM500) 6 ft (2 m)
Cable For IBM-PC communication (GPC)
Manuals

D50 Hardware D50SA122 Installation and programming manual for the D50 Must be ordered
Manual PLC. separately
Analog Expander D50SA495 Configuration and operation manual for the Must be ordered
Manual D50AIM410V and D50AOM210V analog I/O. separately
GPC5 Manual D50SA464 Software Instruction manual for GPC5
WinGPC Manual D50SA467 Software Instruction manual for WinGPC
D50 PLC Expansion Configurations

• All digital I/O modules, both controller and expander, contain 14 I/O points – 8 digital inputs,
and 6 digital outputs.
• Up to 3 digital expansion units can be added to the controller.
• Up to 2 analog expansion units can be added to the controller. These can be either two analog
input modules, two analog output modules, or one of each.
• Any type of digital and analog expansion unit can be mixed and matched as required for the
application.
• The digital and analog expansion units may be added in any order.
• A maximum of 56 digital points and 8 analog channels are available. This is achieved by
using three digital expansion units, and two analog input expansion units.
Product Specification
This chapter outlines the environmental conditions for D50 PLC operation and the performance
specifications and component functions of the controller.
This chapter discusses:
• The environmental operating ranges for the D50 Series products

• The performance specifications of the controller and expansion modules
• The name and function of the controller components
Environmental Operating Ranges

Item Specifications
Ambient Operating temp. 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F)
temperature
Storage temp. -10 to 75°C (14.0 to 167°F)
Ambient Operating 20% to 90% RH (Non-condensing)
humidity
Storage 10% to 90% RH (Non-condensing)
Breakdown voltage Between AC external terminal and earth, AC 1500 V for 1 min.
Insulation resistance Min. 20Mohms, between AC external terminal and earth, 500 VDC.
Vibration resistance 16.7Hz, amplitude 3 mm, each direction of X, Y, Z for 2 hours.
Impact resistance 10G for 2 hours, X, Y, Z each direction.
Noise resistance 1500 Vp-p pulse width 50 ns, 1 µs (according to noise simulator method)
Usage condition No corrosive gas or severe dust conditions.
Controller Performance Specifications

Control method Program storage, Repeat calculation method
External I/O Digital Onboard 14 points; Max. 56 points
Analog Max. 8 Input Channels, or4 Output Channels, or 4 In/2 Out
Basic instruction 25 types
Instruction Application instruction About 130 types
Process Basic instruction 2 to 4 µS/step
speed
Program capacity 2k steps (1 step = 1 word) (1k step = 1,024 steps)
Local I/O (R) R000.0 to R03.7 (32 Input); R015.0 to R18.5 (24 Output)
Special I/O (R) R004 to R14; R19 to R29
Internal contact (M) M000.0 to M31.15 (512 points, 32 words)
Retentive internal K000.0 to K15.15 (256 points, 16 words)
contact (K)
Memory System flags (F) F000.0 to F001.15 (32 points)
capacity Timer/Counter (TC or 256 channels (timer + counter), set point: 0 to 65,535
TIM) Timer: 0.01 second: TC000 to TC015 (16 channels)
0.1 second: TC016 to TC255 (240 channels)
counter: TC000 to TC255 (256 channels)
Data word (W) W0000 to W255 (256 words)
System registers SR000 to SR255 (256 words)
(W, SR)
High-speed Counter 2 channel (24bit up/down; single phase 10kHz, dual-phase 5kHz)
Special Pulse Output 1 point (20Hz to 5kHz); 24VDC Transistor output units only
functions Input Delay 0 to 64msec adjustable
Pulse Catch Input 150µsec minimum width
Comm. Port Interface RS485 Multidrop at 9600bps
Electrical Specifications
Power Supply Specifications

Internal Circuit Diagram
FUSE
AC
85-264V Internal
Circuit
FG
Wiring Diagram
24VDC Out
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7
OUT IN IN
D50 Programmable Controller

RUN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN
ERR
OUT RUN
0 1 2 3 4 5 STOP
Cutler-Hammer
IN 100-240V GND OUT OUT OUT
C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
85-264VAC In
Specifications
Voltage Input AC Models: 85-264VAC; DC Models: 20-28VDC

AC Frequency 47-63Hz
Current Consumption Max. 0.6A
Output Power 24VDC @ 700mA max.
24VDC Input Specifications

COM INPUT
Wiring Diagram
Current Current
Sinking Sourcing
Devices Devices
24VDC 24VDC
+ - - +
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7
OUT IN IN
Specifications
Rated Voltage 12 to 24VDC

Operating Voltage Range 9 to 30VDC
Input Resistance 3.3 kΩ
Off On Less than 10ms
Input Delay Time
On Off Less than 10ms
Number of Inputs 8 points
Points per Common 4 points/common
Isolation Photocoupler
115VAC Input Specifications

COM INPUT
Wiring Diagram
110VAC
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7
OUT IN IN
Specifications
Rated Voltage 110VAC

Operating Voltage Range 85 to 132VAC
Input Current 5mA to 14mA
Min. On 85VAC
Operating Voltage
Max. Off 30VAC
Input Delay Time
Number of Inputs 8 points
Points per Common 4 points/common
Relay Output Specifications

+24VDC
24VDC
GND COM OUT
Wiring Diagram

C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
Specifications
Rated Voltage 110/220VAC; 30VDC

Electrical Life 200,000 operations @ rated current
Mechanical Life 10M operations
Per Output 2A
Max. Load Current
Per Common 4A
Min. Load Current Per Output 30mA
Output Delay Time
Number of Outputs 6 points
Points per Common 2 Isolated, 1 group of 4 points/common
Transistor (24VDC) Output Specifications

COM OUT GND
Wiring Diagram

C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
- - -
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
24VDC
+ + +
Specifications
Rated Voltage 24VDC

Operating Voltage Range 5 to 27VDC
Per Output 0.5A
Max. Load Current
Per Common 4A
Output Delay Time
SSR (115/230VAC) Output Specifications

OUT
COM
Wiring Diagram

C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
Specifications
Rated Voltage 110/220VAC

Per Output 0.5A
Max. Load Current
Per Common 3A
Output Delay Time
Name and Function of Controller Components
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7
OUT IN IN

RUN
IN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Status LED’s
ERR
OUT RUN
0 1 2 3 4 5 STOP
I/O Expansion Port

Cutler-Hammer
C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
Mode Switch
RS485 Communication Port
The mode switch has the following settings:
State Function
RUN CPU set in Run or Stop/Program Override mode.
PROG. CPU set in Stop/Program mode.
The Status LED’s provide the following information:
LED Color Function

On when the CPU is in Run mode.
RUN Green
Flashing when the CPU is in Stop/Program mode.
ERROR Red On when CPU has an error.
The I/O Expansion Port supplies a 10-pin connector for adding digital and/or analog expansion
modules to the base controller.
The RS485 Communication Port supports an RS485 connection for programming, configuring, and
monitoring the PLC. For communication with most RS232 peripherals, such as a personal computer,
an RS232/485 converter must be used. When placed on an RS485 network with other D50, D300, or
D320 PLC’s, the ends of the network should be properly terminated with 120 Ohm resistors to prevent
communication errors due to noise and reflections on the transmission line.
Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring 21
Installation and Wiring
This chapter provides considerations and information on installing and wiring the D50 PLC.
Diagrams are included to illustrate the installation procedures.
• System design considerations

• System installation guidelines
• System wiring and installation procedures
System Design Considerations
Power Supply Wiring
Physical and Electrical Isolation of Power Supplies

When wiring the PLC, external control I/O, and large power equipment such as motors, each system
should be electrically separated as shown:
Main power Power

source Device
External
I/O device
PLC
Isolation transformer
Interlock Circuit and Emergency Stop Circuit (Safety measures in

system design)
In any PLC application, abnormal and potentially dangerous operation can occur. These system
malfunctions may result from power surges, brownouts, blackouts, shorted or opened I/O devices, or
any type of system component failure. Any errors of the PLC, the external power source, and/or
external devices can cause a system malfunction. The potentially dangerous effects of these errors on
the whole system can be prevented with proper safety precautions. The use of properly designed safety
circuits external to the PLC will protect against both equipment damage and human injury.
Interlock Circuit
An interlock circuit can control and prevent problems such as those caused by unexpected or reversed
operation of a motor. Install the interlock circuit external to the PLC control wiring and circuitry.
Emergency Stop Circuit

Every industrial control application involving electrical or moving parts should be wired with an
emergency stop circuit. The emergency stop circuit turns off the power immediately to all output
devices in the system. The emergency stop circuit should provide independent power cutoff from the
PLC system.
Power-Up Sequence
In a properly designed control system, the default Off state of the system is the safe state, in which no
machinery is operating. Before the PLC is powered-up, line power and control power are applied to the
system. Once the system is powered up in the safe/default state, the PLC is powered up and begins
system control. As necessary, the control system should be modified to ensure the proper delayed
startup to prevent problems on power-up.
For example: 1) Run the PLC after turning on the power

2) Use an external or internal timer to delay the operation of the PLC.
Momentary Power Failure and Voltage Drop
Momentary Power Failure

The D50 PLC will ride through momentary power failures of 10 msec or less. The PLC will stop and
turn off its outputs if a momentary power failure greater than 20 msec occurs. For momentary power
failures between 10 msec and 20 msec, the PLC's operation depends on circumstances at that time, and
is not defined. The control system should be designed specifically to ensure safe operation for these
potential power-loss conditions.
Voltage Drop (Brownouts)

The PLC will stop and turn off its outputs if the PLC 's power supply voltage drops below the
allowable fluctuating voltage range (see specifications for power supply units).
CAUTION: Steps should be taken to prevent damage to the PLC system through fluctuating
voltages, brownouts, blackouts, shorts, ground faults, or other power supply
failures. For example, you may need to apply an isolation transformer before the
incoming PLC power supply and/or I/O control wiring.
System Installation Guidelines
Environmental Usage Conditions
Avoid the Following Environments:

• Ambient temperature outside the range of 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F).
• Humidity levels outside the range of 20% to 90%.
• Abrupt temperature variations which lead to the formation of dew.
• Presence of corrosive or flammable gases.
• Presence of dense dust, salt, and iron concentrations.
• Presence of corrosive solutions such as benzene, thinner, alcohol, ammonia and caustic soda.
• Locations subject to direct impact greater than 10 G or vibrations greater than 1 G @

57-2000 Hz.
• Direct sunlight.
• Presence of water, oil, and other chemicals.
Electrical Noise Considerations

• Do not install near high-tension wires, high-voltage devices, power cables, power devices,
and other devices which generate large power surges or electromagnetic fields when starting
and stopping.
• Do not place near wireless communications devices with transceivers, such as walkie talkies,
cellular phones, or shortwave radios.
Control Panel Installation
• Leave enough space at the top of unit from other devices or wiring ducts to allow ventilation
space and easy replacement and wiring of the unit (see the following diagrams).
• Do not mount the PLC system rotated vertically, or facing up or down. This will prevent
proper air cooling of the PLC CPU, which will cause abnormal overheating inside the PLC
(see the following diagrams).
7

6
C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
OUT
IN
5
3
Programmable Controller
RUN
ERR
4
2
RUN
STOP
C
C
Cutler-Hammer
7
1
3
OUT
6
5
C
2
4
3
3
IN
2
1
0
OUT
1
1
D50
0
C
0
OUT
IN
GND
C
IN 100-240V
DC 24V
OU T
Incorrect: Horizontal Mounting
Incorrect: Vertical Mounting
• Avoid installation over heat generating equipment such as heaters, transformers, and power
resistors.
• Avoid radiation noise by leaving a minimum distance of 4 inches (100 mm) from the surface
of each unit to the power cable, and the noise-generating device (motor starter, solenoid, etc.).
Wiring Duct, device,

or cabinet wall
At least 2 in. (50mm)
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7 DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7 DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7 DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7

OUT IN IN OUT IN IN OUT IN IN OUT IN IN
D50 Programmable Controller D50 Programmable Controller D50 Programmable Controller D50 Programmable Controller
RU N
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN IN IN IN
ER R
OUT RU N
0 1 2 3 4 5 OUT OUT OUT
STOP 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5
Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer

IN 100-240V GND OUT OUT OUT GND OUT OUT OUT GND OUT OUT OUT GND OUT OUT OUT
C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5 NC NC C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5 NC NC C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5 NC NC C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
At least 2 in. (50mm)
Leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) from the duct or other devices:
• To prevent overheating.
• For easy replacement and wiring of the unit.
When installing the PLC in a cabinet or enclosure:
• Leave 4 inches (100 mm) or more from the front surface of unit.
• This area in front of the PLC helps to avoid the effects of emission, noise, and heat.
• The additional space also allows for easier connection to the programming port as needed.
System Wiring and Installation Procedures
Installation Dimensions
0.197“ (5mm) Dia.
2 Holes
1.97“
(50mm)
3.15“
(80mm)
0.59“
(15mm)
3.58“
(91mm)
3.93“
(100mm)
DIN Rail Mounting
Attachment Removal
2
1
2 1
Unit Installation Height

The depth of the D50 PLC is 3 inches (76 mm) when the unit is installed on DIN rail. When the
communication cable is connected and the unit is installed in an enclosure, additional space is required.
The minimum installation sizes are given in the following diagram.
Expansion Cable Connection
Connecting the Expansion Cable

• The expansion cable is connected between the I/O expansion ports on the controller and
expander units.
• The expansion cable is keyed to prevent incorrect wiring, with Pin 1 at the top of the
connector.
• The connector can be up to 12” in length for mounting the expansion unit above, below, or
farther away from the controller. A 2.5” cable is included with each expansion unit. The
following table lists the parts required to construct a longer cable.
Expansion Cable Components
Part Description
AMP #746286-1 10-socket socket connectors (2)
AMP #499252-5 Strain relief connectors (2) for socket connectors above
Ribbon cable 28AWG stranded wire, 0.050 spacing 10 conductor w/ PVC insulation, 105deg. C, wire #1
color-coded
Power Supply Wiring
Power wiring
• When connecting the power cable:

To reduce power loss in the wiring, use at least 14 AWG (2 mm) cable.
To reduce the effect of noise, use twisted, shielded cable.
• An isolation transformer can be used to further reduce noise and to prevent failures from
power problems such as ground faults.
Grounding
• In normal low-noise environments such as closed-room control cabinets, it is possible to

operate the PLC without frame grounding. However, it is necessary to ground the PLC for
noisy environments, and is recommended for all installations regardless of electronic noise
levels.
• For the frame ground, use a cable of at least 14 AWG (2 mm) in size. The ground should be
exclusive to the PLC. Sharing the ground connection with other devices can cause problems
due to ground loops and current feedback.
PLC Other PLC Other

device device
Right Wrong
Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory 29
CPU Operation and Memory
This chapter provides you with information about memory addresses and the CPU operation. It
includes a terminology section and an overview of registers.
• The terminology used in the D50 PLC manual

• CPU operation and processing
• Internal/external address designation
• Special function internal addresses
Terminology
This section introduces some terminology you should know.
1. Address (register)
Address refers to the location of memory being used. It can refer to the external input/output
module or internal memory. An address is categorized into 1 bit, 16 bit (word), or 32 bit
(double word).
2. Bit
A bit is the minimum unit required for calculation. It can be either On (1) or Off (0).
3. Byte
A byte is made up of 8 bits. It can hold data values from 0 to 255. In base 16, or hexadecimal,
a byte can be expressed as 0 to FF. You cannot have a value greater than 255 when using one
byte.
4. Word
A word is made of 16 bits. It can hold data values from 0 to 65,535. In base 16 a word can be
expressed as 0 to FFFF.
5. Double Word
A double word is made of 32 bits. It can hold data values from 0 to 4,294,976,295. In base 16
a double word can be expressed as 0 to FFFFFFFF. In the D50, a double word is made up of
two consecutive word addresses.
6. Scan Time
The CPU follows a procedure in which it 1) reads the inputs, 2) processes the ladder program,
and 3) updates the outputs. It continually repeats this process. This 3-step process is called a
“scan,” and the time it takes to complete this process is the “scan time.” In a typical PLC
application, most of the scan time is used to process the program. When programming, keep
in mind that the scan time will increase as you increase the number of inputs and outputs
and/or the size of the program.
7. Edge
An edge is defined as the point when an input changes state. For example, a rising edge
occurs during the very first scan after the input has changed from Off to On. A falling edge
occurs after the input has changed from On to Off.
8. Hex (Hexadecimal)
A hexadecimal number is a value expressed in Base 16. Base 16 values consist of digits from
0 to F. In a byte, word, or double word, each set of 4 bits corresponds to a single hex digit.
For example, the binary value 01001111 would correspond to the hex value 4F, and a decimal
value of 79. A hex value is designated by the use of the symbol “$” in front of the value (i.e.
$4F is the hex value 4F).
8. BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
BCD is used to express a decimal digit (0 to 9) using 4 bits. Conversion of BCD values can be
done in hexadecimal calculations. For example, the BCD representation of decimal 27 would
be two sets of 4 bits: 0010 0111.
9. EEPROM
EEPROM is electronically erasable and programmable memory that retains its data even
through loss of power. The PLC program is stored in EEPROM and will be retained when
power is off.
10. GPC
Graphic Programming Console. Cutler-Hammer offers two program loader software packages
for programming, monitoring, and configuring the D50 PLC. The DOS-based package is
GPC5, the Windows-based package is WinGPC. In this manual, GPC is used to refer to
either of these programs.
Overview of CPU Operation Mode
What Is the CPU Operation Mode?

The CPU has an external RUN/STOP switch. The PLC performs a system check that determines the
position of the switch. The switch position determines which operating mode the PLC is in. It can be in
Run, Stop, or Error mode.
Run Mode (operating)

The D50 PLC reads the external input signals and executes the user program stored in RAM. The
external outputs are updated every scan according to program results. When the switch is in Run
Mode, the user can also use the GPC program loader software to switch between the RUN and STOP
states.
Stop Mode
The user program is stopped and the external outputs are turned Off. In the Stop mode, you can
correct, delete, and transfer the program.
Error Mode
The Error mode occurs when the D50 PLC finds an error after running the self-diagnostics. When an
error occurs, the CPU stops program operation and turns off all external outputs. When the Error mode
occurs, do one of the following:
• Check the error code and take appropriate measures, then change power from Off to On.
• Switch the mode switch back to the STOP position. When the switch is returned to RUN the
program and data are re-initialized (excluding the retentive data).
CPU Processing Procedure
Program Processing Procedure
1. Mandatory
input/output
2. Process 1 scan
input/output time
3. Watchdog
time → 0
4. Program
analysis
5. Peripheral device
signal processing
The diagram above indicates the PLC program processing procedure. The CPU regularly repeats
procedure 1 through 5. This cycle is called 1 scan time.
1. Mandatory input/output processing

The internal force table is applied to internal/external I/O, turning forced I/O On or Off.
2. Input/output processing
Preserves the On/Off state of the external I/O and uses it as input in the next scan. (For
accurate processing, input should continue for more than 1 scan time.) The processed program
outputs are sent from the internal memory to the external modules.
3. Watchdog time initialization
The watchdog elapsed time value is set to 0. This value is the watchdog calculation point until
the next scan.
4. Program analysis
Executes the program from its first step to its final step and stores the internal/external output
in the working RAM.
5. Peripheral device signal processing
Stores data from communications module or peripheral device in the internal memory.
The following illustration shows the difference between the relay board and PLC sequence processing.
The relay carries out all sequences simultaneously while the PLC processes sequentially throughout
the program.
LS1 LS2 R0.1 R0.2

M0.0
X1 (OUT)
M0.0
X1
X1 M0.0
TIM CH = 0
T1 V = 100
T1 TC0
R15.0
Y1
(OUT)
Processing of relay sequence Processing of PLC program

(parallel process) (serial process)
Introduction to Registers
The D50 PLC has a series of registers for storing data. Different registers store different types of data.
1. R (Relay) register (Can be bit, byte, or word)

Indicates the internal memory address which is directly linked with the real-world external
input/output module. The address and number of R registers are predefined for the controller
and expansion module I/O.
2. M (Memory) register (Can be bit, byte, or word)
An internal bit memory address which supports relay logic operations. Can also be used as a
byte or word variable for general calculations and programs. M Registers are non-retentive—
when the power of the PLC is Off or the CPU has stopped, the register value is reset to 0.
3. W (Word) register (Can be byte or word)
Used for general calculations, data storage, and recipe values. Values are cleared after the
power is turned off, or by new program download.
4. K (Keep) register (Can be bit, byte, or word)
Same usage as M registers. The K Registers are retentive—the value is preserved when the
power is turned off.
5. F (Flag) register (Can only be bit)
These bit registers provide special application specific functions to the programmer of the
PLC. They are also used as diagnostic and system control bits, providing Run/Stop control of
the PLC and other system conditions.
Each type of register is used for a variety of purposes. The register used will be determined by the type
of function being performed.
1. When a calculation or input value exceeds 255 ($FF), use double mode instructions which can
store and calculate values up to 65,535 in the K, M, R, and W registers..
2. When a value needs to be stored even through a loss of system power, use the K area. The K
area is preserved unless specifically erased. The W area is erased by program downloads or
loss of power.
3. For bit operations, such as setting, resetting, shifting, or rotating use the M, K, or R registers.
You cannot perform bit operations on W registers.
4. The Set Value of timers and counters is stored in a special area of the W registers, W2048 to
W2303. These values can also be addressed using register type SV. The Set Values are then
referenced as SV000 to SV255.
5. The Present Value of timers and counters is stored above the Set Values in the W registers,
from W2304 to W2559. These values can also be addressed using the PV designation, PV000
to PV255. The Present Values for channels 0 to 16 are maintained in the Stop state. It is also
retentive—the value is maintained through loss of power.
Internal/External Address Designation

• The memory address designation types are R, L, M, K, F, W, SV, PV, SR, and TC.
Types F and TC can only be used to designate bits.
Types W, SV, PV, and SR can only be used to designate words.
Types R, L, M, and K can be used for either bits or words.
• A bit address is composed of a character (R, L, M, K, F), a three digit word address (000 to
127), a decimal point, and a bit address (0 to 15). The timer/counter contact is represented by
the TC label followed by three digits. The three digits indicate the channel number of the
timer/counter (TC000 to TC255).
• A word address is composed of a character (R, L, M, K, W) and a four digit number (i.e.
W0000 to W0255). Special areas of word memory have alternate designations. For example,
words W2560 to W2815 are also referred to as the System Registers, and can be represented
as SR0000 to SR0511.
• The bit address indicates an On (1) or Off (0) state. The byte address is composed of 8 bits
that holds data values of 0 to 255. The word address is composed of 16 bits that holds data
values of 0 to 65,535.
D50 Memory Addresses
Type Scope Features

External I/O Area R000.0 to R003.7 Local I/O memory area.
R015.0 to R018.5 56 points, 8 words
Special I/O Area R004 to R014 Configuration register for High-speec counters,
R019 to R029 Pulse Output, Input delay, and Pulse catch.
Internal Contact M000.0 to M031.15 Internal auxiliary contact memory area.
512 points, 32 words
Retentive Contact K000.0 to K015.15 Retentive internal auxiliary contact memory area.
256 points, 16 words
System Flag F000.0 to F001.15 Special internal contact memory area.
32 points, 2 words
Timer/Counter TC000 to TC255 256 channel common use.
Set Value: W2048 (SV000) to TC is contact signal or “Done” bit.
W2303 (SV255) SV is Set Value, PV is Present Value.
Present Value: W2304 (PV000) to SV can hold values from 0 to 65535.
W2559 (PV255)
Data Word W0000 to W0255 Word value memory area.
Used for tables, data storage, and math operations.
Cannot be designated with a bit.
System Register SR000 to SR255 Special internal data area for CPU status.
Expression Example
M 012 . 12
Bit number
• 2 digits, range is 0 to 15.
Word number
• When used with bit number, 3 digits (000 to 127) are used.
• When used for word number only, express in 4 digits (0000 to 3071).
Register Type
• R, L, M, K, F, or W indicates address type.
• The W memory contains the data area (W0000 to W0255), the timer Set Value
area (W2048 to W2303 = SV000 to SV255), the timer Present Value area (W2304
to W2559 = PV000 to PV255), and the System Register area (W2560 to W2815 =
SR000 to SR255).
Note: The basic contact and coil instructions require a bit designation and use the 3.2 bit address
format. Comparison and application instructions most often use word parameters, and are
expressed using the 4 digit word address.
Double Mode Address Designation

• Words are composed of two bytes put together. The designation for a word is exactly the
same as the designation for the byte, consisting of a one character register type and a 4 digit
word address. Bytes hold 8 bits of data, words hold 16 bits of data.
• The type of instruction used determines whether the register is processed as a single byte or a
word. For comparison instructions (>, <, ==, etc.), the programmer must be in “Double
Mode” to enter a word comparison (refer to program loader manual for details). For
application instructions, those instructions that start with a D in front of the related instruction
are word instructions, and process the data as 16-bit words instead of bytes.
Example 1:
LET W0 is processed as 8 bit (1 byte) data (0 to

Byte
D=W0 255).
S=250 S is processed as a value from 0 to 255.
Word DLET Word W0 is processed as 16 bit (1 word) data

D=W0 (0 to 65,535).
S=2500 S can be a value from 0 to 65,535.
Example 2: Comparison Instruction
W0005 The example shows comparison instructions being used in the single mode
=<M0003 of GPC. The parameters W0005 and M0003 represent only 8 bits of data.
The high 8 bits are NOT used as part of the comparison.
D W0005 In this example, GPC is in double mode and comparison instructions are
used. The comparison is performed on 16 bits of data. All of word W0005
=<M0003
and M0003 will be compared.
Absolute Address Designation

In LDR, DLDR, STO, DSTO instructions, the absolute address is used to perform indirect memory
operations using pointers. The absolute address is also used by the D50 program loader port protocol
for reading and writing memory areas.
Register Absolute Address Register Absolute Address
Address Address
Dec. Hex. Dec. Hex.
R0000 0 0000 W0000 512 0200
R0001 1 0001 W0001 513 0201
External R0002 2 0002 Data W0002 514 0202
I/O : : : Words : : :
R0028 28 001C W0254 766 02FE
R0029 29 001D W0255 767 02FF
M0000 192 00C0 SV000 512 0200
M0001 193 00C1 T/C Set SV001 2560 0A00
M0002 194 00C2 Value : : :
Internal
Contact : : : SV255 2815 0AFF
M0030 222 00DE PV000 2816 0B00
M0031 223 00DF T/C PV001 2817 0B01
Present
K0000 320 0140 Value : : :
K0001 321 0141 PV255 3071 0BFF
Internal K0002 322 0142 SR000 3072 0C00

Keep K0003 323 0143 SR001 3073 0C01
Contact System
: : : : : :
Registers
K0014 334 014E SR254 3326 0CFE
K0015 335 014F SR255 3327 0CFF
When accessing a bit absolute address using the program loader port communications protocol, the bit
address (0 to 15) is kept separate from the word address (as shown below).
15 4 3 0
1 word display Word absolute address bit number
For example, the absolute bit address for K012.12 internal contact is $14CC (hex).
(word absolute address = $014C + bit number = $C = $14CC)
Refer to the appendix for a detailed explanation of the communications protocol.

I/O Address Designation
Example I/O Addressing Configuration
Module No. 00 01 02 03 06 07
I/O Points 14 14 4 words 14 2 words 14
Word No. R0, R15 R1, R16 W240 – W243 R2, R17 W248, W249 R3, R18
R0.0 – R0.7 R1.0 – R1.7 - R2.0 – R2.7 - R3.0 – R3.7
Bit No.
R15.0 – R15.5 R16.0 – R16.5 R17.0 – R17.5 R18.0 – R18.5
Digital I/O Address Designation
• The CPU assigns addresses to the digital inputs in sequential order, starting at address R0.
Each module uses 8 bits of the address for the 8 inputs.
• The CPU assigns addresses to the digital outputs in sequential order, starting at address R15.
Each modules uses 6 bits of the address for the 6 outputs.
• A maximum of 3 digital modules, of any mix of voltage I/O type, may be added.
Analog I/O Address Designation
• The first analog input module uses data words W240 to W243 for its four analog input
channels. Each word contains the 12-bit representation of the analog input signal for the
channel. The second analog input module is assigned words W244 to W247. These
assignments are independent of the position of the module in the chain, or whether an analog
output module is present.
• The first analog output module uses data words W248 and W249 for its two analog output
channels. The 12-bit representation to be output as an analog signal on the channel must be
placed in these words. The second analog input module is assigned words W250 and W251.
These assignments are independent of the position of the module in the chain, or whether an
analog input module is present.
• A maximum of two analog modules, input and/or output, may be added.
Special Internal Addresses

F0.0 to F0.15 (F0 word register) System/Diagnostic Functions
Address Function Details Remarks

F0.0 System check When power is applied, the system runs self- Normal: Off
diagnostics. Should any fault exist, the error lamp is
turned on. Output and operation are halted.
F0.1 CPU ROM check When power is applied, the system self-checks the Normal: Off
ROM. Should any faults exist, the error lamp is
F0.2 CPU RAM check When the power is applied, the system self-checks Normal: Off
the RAM. Should any faults exist, the error lamp is
F0.3 User program memory If the user program memory is damaged or the Normal: Off
error program is faulty, the error lamp is turned on.
Output and operation are halted.
F0.4 Program check The CPU initially runs and checks the user Normal: Off
program's syntax. In the case of an error, the error
lamp is turned on. Output and operation are halted.
F0.5 Not Used
F0.6 Module change error On when an I/O module is removed/added/fails Normal: Off
while the system is running. The error lamp is
turned on, and output and operation are halted.
F0.7 Module type error On when module information that is stored in the Normal: Off
CPU and module that is installed are different types.
The error lamp is turned on and operation stops.
F0.8 Input data control Off when the running CPU input module's data is Normal: On
not updated. (Input update is turned Off.)
F0.9 Output data control Off to suspend updating of the output modules while Normal: On
the CPU is in the run state. (Output update is turned
Off.) The outputs are maintained in their last valid
state prior to update being disabled.
F0.10 All outputs OFF Turns all outputs off while CPU is in the run state. Normal: On
(Outputs are disabled.)
F0.11 Not Used
F0.12 Not Used
F0.13 Not Used
F0.14 Program changes during On when error-checking the program while in run Normal: Off
run mode. If there are syntax errors, the CPU is
stopped.
F0.15 Run state control On when the CPU is in the run state. Off when Normal: On
stopped or paused.
F1.0 to F1.15 (F1 word register) Special Application Functions
Address Function Details Note

F1.0 First single scan Maintain On state for first single-scan period, when
the CPU changes its status from Stop to Run.
F1.1 Scan clock Cycle On/Off state for each scan during the
program. (1Scan On, 1Scan Off)
F1.2 0.02 sec. Clock 10 ms: On, 10 ms: Off
10ms 10ms 10ms
F1.3 0.1 sec. Clock 50 ms: On, 50 ms: Off
50ms 50ms 50ms
F1.4 1 sec. Clock 500 ms: On, 500 ms: Off
500ms 500ms 500ms
F1.5 Instantaneous interrupt On when power is off for over 20 ms. Maintained
F1.6 Execute status On when the CPU is in the run state.
F1.7 Keep error display On when the K retentive data is destroyed and/or
changed on power loss.
F1.8 Carry Flag On in the event of carry when performing math
instructions (ADD, SUB, etc.)
F1.9 Division by zero error On when the denominator of division commands is
zero.
F1.10 Range designation error On when the absolute address used in LDR and
STO instructions exceeds the specified range.
F1.11 Reserved System use. Do not use.
Note: The 16 bits in the F1 address provide the CPU's special function and self diagnosis result. They
are used for status contacts only, and are not used to modify or control the PLC. Only the F1.5
instantaneous interrupt display contact should be used as an output contact by the user, to be
turned off after power loss indication.
System Registers SR0 to SR255
Address Function Detail

SR000 CPU address Indicates the CPU ID number in the lower 8 bits. 0 to 223 are the
valid user-defined values, 255 is the default value.
SR001 CPU status Indicates current CPU information state. (stop/remote control
mode/run mode/error)
MSB 03 02 01 00
Error = 1
Run control (same as F15)
CPU switch RUN, Remote Stop = 1
CPU switch RUN = 1
CPU switch STOP = 0
SR002 User watchdog Indicates the user program watchdog time. (unit: msec)
SR003 Scan time Indicates the scan time when executing a program. (unit: msec)
SR004 Max. scan time Indicates maximum value of scan time when executing a program.
Initialized as zero when the program mode changes from the stop
state to the run state.
SR005 to Reserved System Use – Do not use.
SR0016
SR017 System error information Gives result of self-check by CPU. Indicates error content when
F0.0 turns On.
MSB 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Watchdog time error

Undefined instruction
during run state
Peripheral device fault
Misc. faults
Logic circuit fault
Microcomputer fault
SR018 Location of undefined Indicates the location of the instruction (the step number) that
instruction caused an undefined instruction error during program execution.
SR019 Reserved System use.
SR020 Multiplication Stores high order 8 bit values upon executing 16 bit multiplication
instructions.
SR021 Remainder – Low Stores the remainder after a division instruction has been
executed (low order 16 bits).
SR022 Remainder – High Stores the remainder after a division instruction has been
executed (high order 16 bits).
SR023 to Reserved System use.
SR0029
Address Function Detail

SR030 Syntax Error information Stores syntax error information when the user program fails the
system diagnostic check. Each bit in the word indicates a different
error condition. See table below.
SR031 Reserved System Use.
SR032 Error Step # Contains step number where error occurred when bit 0 of word
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
SR030 is turned On.
Syntax Check Data (16 bits of SR30)
Indicates the result of the automatic check on user program syntax when the programmer or GPC
executes a syntax check, and when operation mode is switched from the Stop state to the Run state. If
the value of SR30 is not zero, F0.4 turns On. The error lamp also turns On.
There are two error correction methods:
Method 1: Find the error in the CPU online mode, then correct the program.
Method 2: Use the syntax checking function, then correct the program.
Word Bit Detail

0 On if the I/O number range of bit process instruction is beyond the specified range or
designates an external contact/output module which is not installed.
1 On if the channel number of the timer or the counter exceeds 255 or is duplicated.
2 On if the bit or word number in the application program is beyond the specified range or if it
designates a module which is not installed.
3 Not used.
4 On if an undefined instruction exists.
5 On in the event of a user program memory error.
6 On in the event of miscellaneous errors.
7 On if the user program memory is destroyed.
8 On if an external I/O register address is improperly used within the program.
For example, OUT R0.1 is used in the program, and R0.1 is an input.
SR30 9 On if the label numbers of the JMP or CALL instructions exceed 63, the corresponding
instruction (LBL, SBR) does not exist, and/or the corresponding LBL/SBR instructions exist
prior to JMP/CALL instructions.
10 On if the label number of the LBL instruction exceeds 63 and/or is duplicated.
11 On if the JMPS/JMP instructions are mistakenly combined and/or used.
12 On if the FOR/NEXT instructions are mistakenly combined and/or used more than five
times. (Loop)
13 On if SBR/RET instructions are not combined and/or used and/or the SBR instructions
overlap or exceed 63.
14 Not used.
15 On if no END instruction exists.
Timer/Counter (TC0-255)
The table below gives the alternate Word address for the timer/counter Set Value and Present Value
Ch SV PV Ch SV PV Ch SV PV
0 W2048 W2304 40 W2088 W2344 80 W2128 W2384
1 W2049 W2305 41 W2089 W2345 81 W2129 W2385
2 W2050 W2306 42 W2090 W2346 82 W2130 W2386
3 W2051 W2307 43 W2091 W2347 83 W2131 W2387
4 W2052 W2308 44 W2092 W2348 84 W2132 W2388
5 W2053 W2309 45 W2093 W2349 85 W2133 W2389
6 W2054 W2310 46 W2094 W2350 86 W2134 W2390
7 W2055 W2311 47 W2095 W2351 87 W2135 W2391
8 W2056 W2312 48 W2096 W2352 88 W2136 W2392
9 W2057 W2313 49 W2097 W2353 89 W2137 W2393
10 W2058 W2314 50 W2098 W2354 90 W2138 W2394
11 W2059 W2315 51 W2099 W2355 91 W2139 W2395
12 W2060 W2316 52 W2100 W2356 92 W2140 W2396
13 W2061 W2317 53 W2101 W2357 93 W2141 W2397
14 W2062 W2318 54 W2102 W2358 94 W2142 W2398
15 W2063 W2319 55 W2103 W2359 95 W2143 W2399
16 W2064 W2320 56 W2104 W2360 96 W2144 W2400
17 W2065 W2321 57 W2105 W2361 97 W2145 W2401
18 W2066 W2322 58 W2106 W2362 98 W2146 W2402
19 W2067 W2323 59 W2107 W2363 99 W2147 W2403
20 W2068 W2324 60 W2108 W2364 100 W2148 W2404
21 W2069 W2325 61 W2109 W2365 101 W2149 W2405
22 W2070 W2326 62 W2110 W2366 102 W2150 W2406
23 W2071 W2327 63 W2111 W2367 103 W2151 W2407
24 W2072 W2328 64 W2112 W2368 104 W2152 W2408
25 W2073 W2329 65 W2113 W2369 105 W2153 W2409
26 W2074 W2330 66 W2114 W2370 106 W2154 W2410
27 W2075 W2331 67 W2115 W2371 107 W2155 W2411
28 W2076 W2332 68 W2116 W2372 108 W2156 W2412
29 W2077 W2333 69 W2117 W2373 109 W2157 W2413
30 W2078 W2334 70 W2118 W2374 110 W2158 W2414
31 W2079 W2335 71 W2119 W2375 111 W2159 W2415
32 W2080 W2336 72 W2120 W2376 112 W2160 W2416
33 W2081 W2337 73 W2121 W2377 113 W2161 W2417
34 W2082 W2338 74 W2122 W2378 114 W2162 W2418
35 W2083 W2339 75 W2123 W2379 115 W2163 W2419
36 W2084 W2340 76 W2124 W2380 116 W2164 W2420
37 W2085 W2341 77 W2125 W2381 117 W2165 W2421
38 W2086 W2342 78 W2126 W2382 118 W2166 W2422
39 W2087 W2343 79 W2127 W2383 119 W2167 W2423
Timer/Counter Word addressing
Ch SV PV Ch SV PV Ch SV PV
120 W2168 W2424 166 W2214 W2470 212 W2260 W2516
121 W2169 W2425 167 W2215 W2471 213 W2261 W2517
122 W2170 W2426 168 W2216 W2472 214 W2262 W2518
123 W2171 W2427 169 W2217 W2473 215 W2263 W2519
124 W2172 W2428 170 W2218 W2474 216 W2264 W2520
125 W2173 W2429 171 W2219 W2475 217 W2265 W2521
126 W2174 W2430 172 W2220 W2476 218 W2266 W2522
127 W2175 W2431 173 W2221 W2477 219 W2267 W2523
128 W2176 W2432 174 W2222 W2478 220 W2268 W2524
129 W2177 W2433 175 W2223 W2479 221 W2269 W2525
130 W2178 W2434 176 W2224 W2480 222 W2270 W2526
131 W2179 W2435 177 W2225 W2481 223 W2271 W2527
132 W2180 W2436 178 W2226 W2482 224 W2272 W2528
133 W2181 W2437 179 W2227 W2483 225 W2273 W2529
134 W2182 W2438 180 W2228 W2484 226 W2274 W2530
135 W2183 W2439 181 W2229 W2485 227 W2275 W2531
136 W2184 W2440 182 W2230 W2486 228 W2276 W2532
137 W2185 W2441 183 W2231 W2487 229 W2277 W2533
138 W2186 W2442 184 W2232 W2488 230 W2278 W2534
139 W2187 W2443 185 W2233 W2489 231 W2279 W2535
140 W2188 W2444 186 W2234 W2490 232 W2280 W2536
141 W2189 W2445 187 W2235 W2491 233 W2281 W2537
142 W2190 W2446 188 W2236 W2492 234 W2282 W2538
143 W2191 W2447 189 W2237 W2493 235 W2283 W2539
144 W2192 W2448 190 W2238 W2494 236 W2284 W2540
145 W2193 W2449 191 W2239 W2495 237 W2285 W2541
146 W2194 W2450 192 W2240 W2496 238 W2286 W2542
147 W2195 W2451 193 W2241 W2497 239 W2287 W2543
148 W2196 W2452 194 W2242 W2498 240 W2288 W2544
149 W2197 W2453 195 W2243 W2499 241 W2289 W2545
150 W2198 W2454 196 W2244 W2500 242 W2290 W2546
151 W2199 W2455 197 W2245 W2501 243 W2291 W2547
152 W2200 W2456 198 W2246 W2502 244 W2292 W2548
153 W2201 W2457 199 W2247 W2503 245 W2293 W2549
154 W2202 W2458 200 W2248 W2504 246 W2294 W2550
155 W2203 W2459 201 W2249 W2505 247 W2295 W2551
156 W2204 W2460 202 W2250 W2506 248 W2296 W2552
157 W2205 W2461 203 W2251 W2507 249 W2297 W2553
158 W2206 W2462 204 W2252 W2508 250 W2298 W2554
159 W2207 W2463 205 W2253 W2509 251 W2299 W2555
160 W2208 W2464 206 W2254 W2510 252 W2300 W2556
161 W2209 W2465 207 W2255 W2511 253 W2301 W2557
162 W2210 W2466 208 W2256 W2512 254 W2302 W2558
163 W2211 W2467 209 W2257 W2513 255 W2303 W2559
164 W2212 W2468 210 W2258 W2514
165 W2213 W2469 211 W2259 W2515
Note: Channel: The inherent number of the timer and the counter.
Set Value (SV): The designated value for the timer (to turn On) and the counter (number of
times On) to start operation.
Present Value (PV): Current processing value of the timer (elapsed time) and the counter
(number of counts).
Note: When using GPC software, the above W registers can be represented as follows.
Ch Set Value (SV) Present Value (PV)

0 W2048 = SV0 W2304 = PV0
1 W2049 = SV1 W2305 = PV1
: : :
255 W2303 = SV255 W2559 = PV255
Where SV is Set Value and PV is Present Value.
CAUTION: Be sure you understand the programming of the timer/counter thoroughly. If you
change the above registers while the program is running or program them
incorrectly, errors or damage may occur.
Instructions
This chapter contains all of the instructions that are used with the D50 PLC. The instructions are
grouped by function, and then explained in detail.
• The instructions that are used with the D50 PLC

• How to read the descriptions of the instructions
• Detailed information concerning the usage of the instructions
Basic Instructions
Mnemonic Command Ladder Symbol Description
STR Start Start NO contact.
STN Start Not Start NC contact.
AND And NO contact series circuit.
ANN (ADN) And Not NC contact series circuit.
OR Or NO contact parallel circuit.
ORN Or Not NC contact parallel circuit.
OUT Out (OUT) Relay output.
SET Set (SET) Turn On output.
RST Reset (RST) Turn Off output.
NOT Not Invert logic result.
STR DIF Start Differential R Start rising edge contact ( ).
STR DFN Start Dif. Not F Start falling edge contact ( ).
AND DIF And Dif. R Rising edge series connection ( ).
AND DFN And Dif. Not F Falling edge series connection ( ).
OR DIF Or Dif R Rising edge parallel connection ( ).
OR DFN Or Dif. Not F Falling edge parallel connection ( ).
ANB And Block Circuit block series connection.
ORB Or Block Circuit block parallel connection.
MCS Master Control Set (MCS) Start batch processing block.

MCR Master Control Reset (MCR) End batch processing block.
Note: NO = Normally Open

NC = Normally Closed
Timer/Counter Instructions
Mnemonic Command Ladder Description Remarks
Symbol
TIM On Delay Timer TIM
T CH = 10 Turn on after set Time Base: Ch 0-15: 0.01s
SV = 500
delay time from Ch 16-255: 0.1s
input on. Setting range: SV = 0-65535
input Done Contact: TC + channel no.
output
SST Single Shot Timer SST

T CH = 12 Turn off after set Time Base: Ch 0-15: 0.01s
SV = 500
delay time from Ch 16-255: 0.1s
input on. Setting range: SV = 0-65535
input Done Contact: TC + channel no.
output
UC Up Counter UC
U CH = 13 Up counter Range of channel: Ch 0 to 255
SV = 5
input (Shared with timer)
R present set
value value Setting range: SV = 0-65535
output
reset Done Contact: TC + channel no.
DC Down Counter DC
U CH = 14 Down counter Range of channel: Ch 0 to 255
SV = 5
input (Shared with timer)
R present set
value value Setting range: SV = 0-65535
output
reset
Done Contact: TC + channel no.
UDC Up-Down Counter UDC

U CH = 16 Up/down counter Range of channel: Ch 0 to 255
SV = 3
input U (Shared with timer)
D input D
present set value Setting range: SV = 0-65535
R value
output Done Contact: TC + channel no.
reset
Comparison Instructions
Mnemonic Command Byte Word Description
STR = START = A D C
On if A(C) value and B(D) value are
AND = AND = = B = D the same.
OR = OR =
STR <> START <> A D C
On if A(C) value and B(D) value are
AND <> AND <> <> B <> D different. <> means the same as ≠.
OR <> OR <>
STR > START > A D C
On if A(C) value is greater than B(D)
AND > AND > > B > D value.
OR > OR >
STR >= START >= A D C
On if A(C) value is greater than or
AND >= AND >= >= B >= D equal to B(D) value.
OR >= OR >=
STR <= START <= A D C
On if A(C) value is less than or equal
AND <= AND <= <= B <= D to B(D) value.
OR <= OR <=
STR < START < A D C
On if A(C) value is less than B(D)
AND < AND < < B < D value.
OR < OR <
Substitution, Increment/Decrement Instructions

Note: Application instructions that operate in double mode on whole words (16-bit) are designated
with a “D” in front of the single mode instruction. For example, DINC refers to double mode
word decimal increment, DDEC refers to double mode word decimal decrement, etc.

LET Let (Substitution) LET DLET Store value of designated register S
D= D=
(DLET) S= S= into D.
INC Decimal increment INC DINC D value increased by 1 whenever

D= D=
(DINC) input is On.
DEC Decimal decrement DEC DDEC D value decreased by 1 whenever

D= D=
(DDEC) input is On.
INCB BCD increment INCB DINCB D value increased by 1 (BCD)

D= D=
(DINCB) whenever input is On.
DECB BCD decrement DECB DDECB D value decreased by 1 (BCD)

D= D=
(DDECB) whenever input is On.
Arithmetic Instructions
ADD Decimal addition ADD
D =
DADD
D =
D = S1 + S2
(DADD) S1 = S1 = (Decimal operation)
S2 = S2 =
SUB Decimal subtraction SUB

D =
DSUB
D =
D = S1 - S2
(DSUB) S1 = S1 = (Decimal operation)
S2 = S2 =
MUL Decimal MUL

D =
DMUL
D =
D = S1 × S2
(DMUL) multiplication S1 = S1 = (Decimal operation)
S2 = S2 =
DIV Decimal division DIV

D =
DDIV
D =
D = S1/S2
(DDIV) S1 = S1 = (Decimal operation)
S2 = S2 =
ADDB BCD addition ADDB

D =
DADDB
D =
D = S1 + S2
(DADDB) S1 = S1 = (BCD operation)
S2 = S2 =
SUBB BCD subtraction SUBB

D =
DSUBB
D =
D = S1 - S2
(DSUBB) S1 = S1 = (BCD operation)
S2 = S2 =
MULB BCD multiplication MULB

D =
DMULB
D =
D = S1 × S2
(DMULB) S1 = S1 = (BCD operation)
S2 = S2 =
DIVB BCD division DIVB

D =
DDIVB
D =
D = S1/S2
(DDIVB) S1 = S1 = (BCD operation)
S2 = S2 =
ADC Decimal addition ADC

D =
DADC
D =
D = S1 + S2 + CY
(DADC) w/carry S1 = S1 = (Decimal operation, include carry)
S2 = S2 =
SBC Decimal subtraction SBC

D =
DSBC
D =
D = S1 - S2 - CY
(DSBC) w/carry S1 = S1 = (Decimal operation, include carry)
S2 = S2 =
ADCB BCD addition ADCB

D =
DADCB
D =
D = S1 + S2 + CY
(DADCB) w/carry S1 = S1 = (BCD operation, include carry)
S2 = S2 =
SBCB BCD subtraction SBCB

D =
DSBCB
D =
D = S1 - S2 - CY
(DSBCB) w/carry S1 = S1 = (BCD operation, include carry)
S2 = S2 =
ABS Absolute value ABS

D =
DABS
D =
D = |D|
(DABS) (Absolute value operation)
NEG Negative NEG

D =
DNEG
D =
Store the 2’s complement of D in D
(DNEG) (2’s complement) (1’s complement + 1).
NOT NOT NOT

D =
DNOT
D =
Store the 1’s complement of D in D.
(DNOT) (1’s complement)
Logic Instructions
WAND Bitwise AND (logic AND DAND Store AND of S1 and S2 in D.
(DAND) multiply) D = D =
S1 0 0 1 1
S1 = S1 =
S2 = S2 = S2 0 1 0 1
D 0 0 0 1
WOR Bitwise OR (logic OR DOR Store OR of S1 and S2 in D.

(DOR) sum) D = D =
S1 0 0 1 1
S1 = S1 =
S2 = S2 = S2 0 1 0 1
D 0 1 1 1
XOR Exclusive OR XOR DXOR Store exclusive OR of S1 and S2 in

(DXOR) D = D = D.
S1 = S1 =
S2 = S2 = S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
D 0 1 1 0
XNR Exclusive OR NOT XNR DXNR Store exclusive OR NOT of S1 and

(DXNR) (equal circuit) D = D = S2 in D.
S1 = S1 =
S2 = S2 = S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
D 1 0 0 1
Rotation Instructions
RLC Rotate left without RLC DRLC Rotate contents of designated
(DRLC) carry D = D = register D to the left N times.
N = N =
(lower→higher)
F1.8 15 ...D... 0
RRC Rotate right without RRC DRRC Rotate contents of designated

(DRRC) carry D = D = register D to the right N times.
N = N =
(higher→lower)
15 ...D... 0 F1.8
ROL Rotate left ROL DROL Rotate (shift) to the left N times.
(DROL) D = D = (lower→higher)
N = N =
(Input F1.8 value for low bit)
15 ...D... 0 F1.8
ROR Rotate right ROR DROR Rotate (shift) to the right N times.
(DROR) D = D = (higher→lower)
N = N =
(Input F1.8 value for high bit)
15 ...D... 0 F1.8
SHL Shift left SHL DSHL Shift value of designated register D to

D = D =
(DSHL) N = N = the left N times. (Input 0 for low bit)
F1.8 15 ...D... 0 0
SHR Shift right SHR DSHR Shift value of designated register D to

(DSHR) D = D = the right N times. (Input 0 for high bit)
N = N =
0 15 ...D... 0 F1.8
Word Conversion Instructions

BCD Binary Coded BCD DBCD Convert binary number of S to BCD
(DBCD) Decimal D = D = and store in D.
S = S =
S ...... 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 =63
D ...... 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 =$63
BIN Binary BIN DBIN Convert BCD of S to binary number

(DBIN) D = D = and store in D.
S = S =
S ...... 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 =$39
D ...... 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 =39
XCHG Exchange XCHG DXCHG Exchange D1 and D2.

(DXCHG) D1 = D1 =
D1 .. 0 1 0 1 D1 .. 0 0 1 1
D2 = D2 =
D2 .. 0 0 1 1 D2 .. 0 1 0 1
SEG Segment SEG Convert the low-order 4 bit value of S

D = to 7-segment display pattern and
S =
store in D.
=5
a
S ... 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 f b
g
D ... 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 e c
g f e d c b a d
ENCO Encode ENCO Store the location of the highest set

D = bit in S in D.
S =
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S 0..0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
invar
D iable 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 6+1=7
DECO Decode DECO Convert the low-order 4 bit value of S

s
D = to a power of 2 (2 ) and store in D.
S =
S ..... x x x x 0 1 0 1 =5
D 0..0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DIS Dissemble DIS Separate Sr into Nd+1 units of 4 bits

D = each, and store in the low 4 bits of
Nd =
Sr = words starting at D. (N = 0-3)
Sr $ 7 4 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
D $0000 0 1 0 1
Nd+1
D+1 $0000 1 1 1 0
Nd=3 D+2 $0000 0 1 0 0 4
D+3 $0000 0 1 1 1 7
UNI Unify UNI Combine the low 4 bits of Nd+1

D = words starting at Sr, and store in D.
Sr =
Nd = (Nd = 0-3)
Sr $ 0 1 0 1
Nd+1
S+1 $ 1 1 1 1
Nd=3 S+2 $ 1 0 1 0
S+3 $ 0 1 0 0
D $ 4 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
Bit Conversion Instructions

BSET Bit Set BSET Set Nth bit of D to 1.
D =
N = D ...... 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
N=5 1
BRST Bit Reset BRST Reset Nth bit of D to 0.

D =
N = D ...... 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
N=3 0
BNOT Bit Not BNOT Reverse state of Nth bit of D.

D =
N = D ...... 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
N=4
D ...... 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
BTST Bit Test BTST Set carry bit F1.8 to the state of the
D = Nth bit of D.
N =
D ...... 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
N=6 F1.8
SUM Sum SUM Store the number of bits in S that are

D = 1 in D.
S =
S $00 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 4 ON(=1)s
D 0..0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 D=4
SC Set Carry SC Set carry bit (F1.8) to 1.

1 F1.8
RC Reset Carry RC Reset carry bit (F1.8) to 0.

0 F1.8
CC Complement Carry CC Reverse carry bit (F1.8).

F1.8 F1.8
1 0
0 1
Transfer Instructions
LDR Load D←(Sr) LDR DLDR Store value at absolute address Sr in
(DLDR) D = D = D.
Sr = Sr =
Register Absolute Data
Value Address Value
Sr = X
? X Y
D= Y
STO Store (D)←Sr STO DSTO Store Sr in register at absolute

(DSTO) Sr = Sr = address D.
D= D=
Register Absolute Data
Value Address Value
Sr = X
D= Y
? Y X
MOV Move MOV Copy Ns words from Sr to D.

D =
Sr = Sr ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Ns = Sr+1 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Sr+2 ...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Ns=3
D ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D+1 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
D+2 ...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
FMOV Fill Move FMOV Repeatedly copy the value V, Ns

D = times to words starting at D.
Ns =
V = V value ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Ns=4
D ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D+1 ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D+2 ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D+3 ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
BMOV Bit Move BMOV Move Ns bits from bit address Sb to

Db = bit address Db.
Sb =
Ns = Sb ...... 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
If Ns=4
Db ...... 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
BFMV Bit Fill Move BFMV Repeatedly copy the bit value V, N
Db = times to bit address Db. (V = 0,1) (Ns
Ns =
V = = 0, 1,…, 15).
V=1
Ns=5
Db ...... 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
Block Processing Instructions

FOR For Loop FOR DFOR Begin execution of instructions
(DFOR) D = D = between FOR and corresponding
NEXT. Repeat execution D times.
NEXT Next NEXT Decrease D of FOR instruction by 1.

If not zero, repeat from FOR
Instruction.
JMP Jump JMP Jump to LBL instruction L.

L =
(L = 0 to 63)
LBL Label LBL Position jumped to by JMP

L = instruction.
(L = 0 to 63)
JMPS Jump Start JMPS Jump to JMPE instruction.
JMPE Jump End JMPE Position jumped to by JMPS

instruction.
CALL Call Subroutine CALL Call subroutine Sb.

Sb =
(Sb = 0 to 31)
SBR Subroutine Start SBR Start subroutine.

Sb =
(Sb = 0 to 31)
RET Subroutine Return RET End subroutine. Returns execution to

instruction after CALL.
WAT Watchdog Timer WAT Clear watchdog elapsed value.
END END END End program. This instruction is

automatically added by GPC.
How to Read the Description of Instructions

Each instruction is explained in three parts: the instruction itself, its ladder diagram, and a description.
This section explains how to read the instructions.
Sample Instruction
Mnemonic Substitution Formula Range

(Assignment expression)
LET Direct substitution of number Bit
DLET (direct output of number) ■ Byte
■ Word
Explanation of Codes
= unavailable option
■ = available option
$xx indicates a hexadecimal number.
Explanation of Table
• Mnemonic—A byte (single mode) instruction, D designates word (double mode) instruction.
• Assignment expression—Description of the instruction.
• Range—Size of data that can be used by this instruction.
Sample Ladder
R
LET
D=
D: Destination
S=
S: Source
Example: S = M0, and M0 is 123
D = R17, and R17 is 45
Before execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 45
After execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 123
Explanation of Ladder
The ladder diagram shows the structure of the instruction as it is displayed. Additional text typically
gives an example and explains the processing structure.
Sample Description
Range: LET: 0 to 255
DLET: 0 to 65,535
1. Either a register (R, M, K, L, or W) address or a constant number can be assigned for S.
2. When S is a register address, copy the data of the register to D.
3. When S is a constant number, copy the value to D.
4. This operation occurs on every scan for which the input condition to the instruction is true.
Explanation of Description
The description provides details of the instruction.
Sample Example
Program Expression Time Chart
R000.2 LET R000.2
D = M0000 R000.3
S = 123 0000 0123 0123
M0000
0000 0100 0100
LET M0001
0000 0000 0123
D = M001 R0017
S = 100
R000.3
LET
R D = R017
S = M0000
Explanation of Example
The example shows an application of an instruction as programmed in GPC. The time chart
demonstrates how the instruction operates with respect to time and the changing input conditions for
the example. The results of the operation may also be shown as part of the example.
Basic Instruction Details
Instruction
Mnemonic Start of the Circuit Range

STR Start rung with NO contact ■ Bit
STN Start rung with NC contact Byte
Word
Ladder
A
( ) Used for the start of a circuit.
B ( ) STR: Start NO (normally open) contact
STN: Start NC (normally closed) contact (STR NOT)
A: Circuit started with NO contact→STR
B: Circuit started with NC contact→STN
Description
1. Every rung in the ladder program begins with either a STR or STN.
2. Every rung will contain one or more contacts.
3. Every rung will end in one or more output coils or application instructions.
4. When programming a ladder with NO and NC contacts, GPC will automatically use the
proper contact instruction (STR, STN, AND, ANN, OR, ORN).
R000.2 R015.2
(OUT) Start of circuit: R000.2, R000.3
R000.3 R015.3
(OUT) End of circuit: R015.2, R015.3
Example

R000.0 M000.0 R000.1
(OUT)
M000.1
R000.1 M000.1
(OUT) R000.1
M000.2 M000.1
(OUT) M000.2
M000.0 has the same logic as R000.0

M000.1, M000.2 have the opposite logic as R000.1
Instruction
Mnemonic Series Connection Range

AND Series connection ■ Bit
ANN Byte
(ADN) Word
Ladder
AND: NO (normally open) contact series connection.
ANN: NC (normally closed) contact series connection.
Description
1. AND and ADN (AND NOT) indicate a series connection of each contact.
2. The number of ANDs and ADNs used within one branch (rung) is unlimited.
R000.3 R000.4 M010.15
(OUT)
3. M010.15 is On only when contact R000.3 is On and contact R000.4 is Off. M010.15 is Off
for all other cases.
Example

R000.1 R000.2 M000.0 R000.1
(OUT)
R000.2
M000.0 M000.1
(OUT) M000.0
M000.1
Contact M000.0 is On only when R000.1 is On and R000.2 is Off. M000.0 is Off for all other cases.
Instruction
Mnemonic Parallel Circuit Range

OR Parallel connection ■ Bit
ORN Byte
Word
Ladder
OR: NO (normally open) contact parallel connection.
ORN: NC (normally closed) contact parallel connection.
Description
1. OR and ORN (OR NOT) indicate parallel connection of each contact.
2. The number of ORs and ORNs used within a branch is unlimited.
(OUT)
Example

R000.1 M000.1
R000.1
(OUT)
R000.2 R000.2
R000.0
Contact M000.1 is On if contact R000.1 is On or contact R000.2 is Off.

Instruction
Mnemonic Output Range

OUT Relay output ■ Bit
SET On output Byte
RST Off output Word
Ladder
(OUT) OUT: Relay coil turns On or Off based on the state of the input conditions.
(SET) SET: Relay coil turns On when the input conditions are true.
(RST) RST: Relay coil turns Off when the input conditions are true.
Description
For an OUT instruction, you cannot use the same address twice.
OUT, SET, and RST instructions must be connected to the right bus and not in the middle of the
circuit.
1. OUT—Use for external I/O (R), internal (M), and retentive (K) contacts. On or Off according
to status of the input condition.
2. SET—Use for external I/O (R), internal (M), and retentive (K) contacts. The same address
can be used more than once. When the input conditions are true, the coil is turned On and
stays on unless turned off by a RST. The output is turned Off in the Stop mode.
3. RST—Use for external I/O (R), internal (M), and retentive (K) contacts. The same address
can be used more than once. When the input conditions are true, the coil is turned Off and
stays off unless turned on by a SET. The output is Off in the Stop mode.
4. When using retentive coils (K) in OUT, SET, or RST, the state is maintained. It will remain
On or Off even after placed in the Stop mode and power is turned off.
Example
R001.1 M000.4
(OUT) R001.1 R002.2
R002.2 M000.5 R002.2

(SET)
M000.4 M000.5
R002.3 M000.5
(RST)
M000.4 follows contact logic for R001.1 input.

When R002.2 contact is On, M000.5 output is On.
When R002.3 contact is On, M000.5 output is Off.
Instruction
Mnemonic Reverse Range

NOT Reverse the previous status of the ■ Bit
logic. Byte
Word
Ladder
A B Reverse the logic result of the input conditions before A at B.

Reverse the previous On/Off state and transfer to the next input.
The results of the NOT execution:
Before After
A (On)→ B (Off)
A (Off)→ B (On)
Description
1. The instruction cannot be connected directly to the busit must come after a contact or set of
contacts.
2. The instruction directly inverts the result of the input conditions before it. The instruction can
be used for verification of the circuit or in the test stage.
A B C
On On Off
C
A B (OUT) Off On On
On Off On
Off Off On
Example
R000.0 R000.1 R015.0
R000.0
(OUT)
R000.1
R015.0
Instruction
Mnemonic Edge Contact Range

STR DIF Contact which is On for one scan ■ Bit
STR DFN at the up or down point of contact Byte
AND DIF Word
AND DFN
OR DIF
OR DFN
Ladder
DIF R DIF: On at the rising edge ( ) (Off→On) for one scan.
DFN F
DFN: On at the falling edge ( ) (On→Off) for one scan.
Description
1. The DIF and DFN instructions may be used more than once in the ladder program for any of
the bit addresses (R, L, M, K, F, and TC).
2. The DIF instruction is a contact which is On for the first scan after the signal has changed
from Off→On. The contact is Off for all other scans, when the signal has not changed from
Off or On.
3. The DFN instruction is a contact which is On for the first scan after the signal has changed
from On→Off. The contact is Off for all other scans, when the signal has not changed from
Off or On.
4. Both DIF and DFN can be used on the same bit address in a single scan.
Example
R001.4 M002.4
R (OUT) R001.4
R001.5 R001.5
F 1scan 1scan 1scan
M002.4
Contact M002.4 is On if contact R001.4 changes from Off→On or contact R001.5 changes from
On→Off.
Instruction
Mnemonic Block Circuit Range

ANB Connect circuit by block ■ Bit
ORB Byte
Word
Ladder
A block
R000.0 R000.2 R015.0
(OUT) R000.0 R000.2 R015.0
(OUT)
R000.1 R000.3
R000.1 R000.3
A block B block
B block
ANB: block in series ORB: block in parallel
Description
1. Block in series:
Series connection of more than two contacts.
Starts with STR or STN.
Ends with ANB.
2. Block in parallel:
Parallel connection of more than two contacts.
Starts with STR or STN.
Ends with ORB.
3. When programming in ladder, GPC will automatically add the proper ANB and ORB
instructions as required by the contact connections.
Example
Program Expression (ANB) Program Expression (ORB)
R000.0 R000.2 R015.0

(OUT) R0.0 R0.2 R15.0
(OUT)
R000.1 R000.3
R0.1 R0.3
A block B block
Instruction
Mnemonic Master Control Set (Reset) Range

MCS Execute block circuit using the Bit
MCR specified conditions. Byte
Word
Ladder
condition (MCS)
MCS: Enable processing of the following block of instructions.
MCR: End block of instructions enabled by MCS.
circuit block
(MCR)
Description
1. MCS (Master Control Set)—Marks the start of a conditional block of instructions. When the
input conditions to the MCS are false, the block of instructions that follow are executed as
false. Must be used with MCR.
2. MCR (Master Control Reset)—Marks the end of a conditional block of instructions. Must be
used with MCS.
3. Up to seven MCS/MCR blocks can be nested.
MCS.. Loop 1
MCS.. Loop 2
MCS.. Loop 3
MCR
MCR
MCR
4. If you use eight or more MCS/MCR nested blocks, a syntax error will occur.
Example
F0.15 R15.0
(SET) R00.0
R000.0 R15.0
(MCS)
R15.0
(RST)
(MCR) The circuit block R15.0 bit is reset (0) by R000.0.

Timer/Counter Instruction Details

Instruction
Mnemonic Timer Range

TIM On delay timer ■ Bit
SST Single shot timer Byte
Word
Ladder
TIM
T CH = In t seconds (t = SV × time base) after the input is On, the output is On.
SV =
If the input is Off, the output is Off.
Valid channel numbers: Ch 0 through Ch 255 (256 channels)
Done contact: TC + channel number
SV set range: 0 to 65,535
SST
T CH = For t seconds (t = SV × time base) after input is On, the output is On. At
SV = the end of t seconds, the output is Off.
If the input is Off, the output is Off.
Valid channel numbers: Ch 0 through Ch 255 (256 channels)
Done contact: TC + channel number
Description
1. Ch 0 to Ch 15: Time base = 0.01 sec (10 msec)
Ch 16 to Ch 255: Time base = 0.1 sec (100 msec)
Input t sec
TIM
SST
2. The output done contact of the timer is TC + channel number.

3. The channel number can only be used once. It cannot be reused by other timer or counter
instructions (UC, DC , UDC).
4. To change the Set Value or Present Value of the timer while the program is running, modify
registers W2048 to W2559. In GPC, you may also reference these registers using the PV or
SV designation.
5. The Present Value (PV) is reset to zero when the input is Off, in Stop mode, or when power is
off.
Example
R000.0 TIM
T CH = 12
SV = 70 R000.0
0.7 sec
R000.1 SST TC12
T CH = 200
SV = 70
TC012 R000.1
M11.5 7 sec
(OUT)
TC200
TC200 M22.5
(OUT)

Instruction
Mnemonic Timer (I) Range

UC Up counter ■ Bit
DC Down counter Byte
Word
condition
UC Example of UC with SV = 3.
U CH =
1
condition
R
SV = Whenever count input condition (U input) turns On, PV
3 increases by 1. When PV and SV are the same, the output
TC0
(OUT) TC done contact is On. When the reset input condition (R
input) is On, the output contact is Off.
Input
(condition 1) While the count input pulses On, the PV will continue to
Input
5
count up to a maximum of 65,535. When the reset input is
(condition 3)
3
4 On, the PV is reset to a value of 0.
2 Set Value
1 1 (SV)
Present 0
Value (PV)
Output
(TC)
condition
DC
D CH =
Example of DC with SV = 3.
2
condition R
SV =
Whenever count input condition (D input) turns On, PV
3
decreases by 1. When PV is 0, the output TC done contact
is On.
Input
(condition 2) When the reset input condition (R input) is turned On, the
Reset
(condition 3) TC done contact is turned Off, and the PV is set to 0.
Set Value
(SV)
1
Present 2 0 0 0 2
Value (PV)
Output
(TC)
Description
1. The timer/counter channel can only be used once. It cannot be reused by other timer or
counter instructions (TIM, SST , UDC). A maximum of 256 channels (Ch 0 to
Ch 255) can be used.
2. The output done contact is displayed as TC + channel no. in the counter.
3. The elapsed value (PV) of the counter is maintained in case of a power failure and for
retentive purposes.
4. When SV is 0, the output contact (TC) turns On if one pulse of input occurs.
5. SV can be specified from 0 to 65,535.
CAUTION: Each input condition to the counter should be on its own line of the rung. They
should not share a common contact or be connected in any way.
Example
R000.0 UC
U CH = 0 R000.0
R000.1 SV = 3
R
TC000 R000.1
M0.0 counter
(OUT) time value 0 1 2 3 4 0 0 1
Output TCO
Instruction
Mnemonic Up/Down Counter Range

UDC Up/Down counter ■ Bit
Byte
Word
Ladder
UDC U input
condition
U CH = (condition 1)
1
SV = D input
condition
S (condition 2)
2
condition Reset
R (condition 3) Set Value
3
Present (SV)
Value (PV)
Output (TC)
Description
1. When the up count input (U input) turns On, the Present Value (PV) increases by 1. When the
down count input (D input) turns On, PV decreases by 1. When PV is greater than or equal to
the Set Value (SV) or is reduced to 0, the output done contact turns On.
2. In the following cases, the output done contact changes from On to Off:
When the reset input is turned On.
When the PV is decreased below the SV by the down count pulse input.
When the PV increases from 0 to 1 by the up count pulse input.
3. If the reset input (R input) is On, the output is Off. In this state, the up/down counter input
pulses are ignored and the Present Value stays reset to 0.
4. When the up count input pulse and the down count input pulse occur at the same time, the PV
does not change.
5. When the PV is 0, if the down count pulse is input, the Present Value does not change, and
the output is On. When the Present Value is 65,535, if the up-counter pulse is input, the
Present Value is reset to 0.
6. When the counter Set Value is 0, if the reset input is On then the output is Off. If up or down
is input while the reset input is Off, the output changes to On.
7. The timer/counter channel can only be used once. It cannot be reused by other timer or
counter instructions (TIM, SST, UC, DC). The number of channels available is 256 (Ch 0
through Ch 255).
8. The SV can be set to a maximum value of 65,535.
Example
R000.0 UDC
U input (R0.0)
U CH = 64
R000.1 SV = 5
S
Down Input (R0.1)
TC15 R
Reset Input (TC15)

TC64 M1.0
(OUT) Present Value (PV64) 0 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 0
Output (TC64)
Comparison Instruction Details

Instruction
Mnemonic Comparing the Value Range

= A = B (A is equal to B) Bit
<> A <> B (A is not equal to B)
> A > B (A is greater than B) ■ Byte
>= A >= B (A is greater than or equal to B)
<= A <= B (A is less than or equal to B) ■ Word
< A < B (A is less than B)
Ladder
A or B: Constant value 0 to 65,535 or a word address (R, L, M, K,
A W, PV, SV, SR).
= B
D is displayed when words are input. When using GPC5 to
A program, change the mode to double (Ctrl+T) and then enter the
<= B
comparison command.
D X
<> Y
Description
1. The comparison functions as a contact, whose On/Off state is determined by the result of the
comparison of A and B. If the comparison is true, the state is On.
2. Each comparison instruction can be used with the STR, AND, and OR instructions (GPC will
automatically use the correct instruction).
3. Double mode comparison instructions can process up to 16 bits of data (0 to 65,535).
Example
R0.0
M0.4
M21
(OUT)
= = K12
R1.0
R000.0
M21 M0.5
<= K12 (OUT) M21 0 100 400
R001.0 M0.6 K12 100

(OUT)
M0.4
M21
<= 300
M0.5
M0.6
Substitution, Increment/Decrement Instruction Details

Instruction
Mnemonic Substitution Formula Range

LET Direct substitution of number Bit
DLET (direct output of number) ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
R
LET D: Destination
D=
S= S: Source
Example: S = M0, and M0 is 123
D = R17, and R17 is 45
Before execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 45
After execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 123
Description
Range: LET: 0 to 255
DLET: 0 to 65,535
1. Either a register (R, M, K, L, or W) address or a constant number can be assigned for S.
2. When S is a register address, copy the data of the register to D.
3. When S is a constant number, copy the value to D.
4. This operation occurs on every scan for which the input condition to the instruction is true.
Example

R000.2 LET R000.2
R D = M0000 R000.3
S = 123 0000 0123 0123
M000.0
0000 0100 0100
LET M000.1
D = M0001 0000 0000 0123
R000.3
S = 100
R000.3 LET
R D = R0003
S = M0000
Instruction
Mnemonic Increment Range

INC Increment (INC, DINC) Bit
DINC BCD increment (INCB, DINCB) ■ Byte
INCB ■ Word
DINCB
Ladder
INC
D=
R D = D + 1: Decimal number increment
INCB
R D=
D = D + 1: BCD increment
Description
1. INC and DINC increase D in decimal by 1 when the input is On.
2. INCB and DINCB increase D in BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) by 1.
3. INC and INCB are byte instructions for processing 8 bit data.
4. DINC and DINCB are word instructions for processing 16 bit data.
Example

R000.1 INC Input (R0.1) M0005 (decimal) M0008(BCD)
R D = M0005
INCB
D = M0008 0 ...... 0 0 0 0 0 ….. 0 0 0 0 0
1 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 ….. 0 0 0 0 1
2 ...... 0 0 0 1 0 ….. 0 0 0 1 0
9 ...... 0 1 0 0 1 ….. 0 1 0 0 1
10 ...... 0 1 0 1 0 ….. 1 0 0 0 0
11 ...... 0 1 0 1 1 ….. 1 0 0 0 1
Max $FFFF $9999

Instruction
Mnemonic Decrement Range

DEC Decrement (DEC, DDEC) Bit
DDEC BCD decrement (DECB, DDECB) ■ Byte
DECB ■ Word
DDECB
Ladder
DEC D = D - 1: Decimal decrement
R D=
DECB
R D= D = D - 1: BCD decrement
Description
1. DEC and DDEC decrease D by 1 down to 0 when the input is On.
2. DECB and DDECB decrease D by 1 in BCD to 0 when the input is On.
3. Byte instructions (DEC, DECB) process 8 bit data, word instructions(DDEC, DDECB)
process 16 bit data.
Example
R000.1 LET R0.1 R0.2 M10 (decimal) M12 (BCD)

R D = M10
S = $11
...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 ...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
LET
...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
D = M12
S = $11
...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
R000.2 DEC ...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
R D = M10
DECB ...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D = M12
Arithmetic Instruction Details

Instruction
Mnemonic Addition Range

ADD Decimal addition (ADD, DADD) Bit
DADD BCD addition (ADDB, DADDB) ■ Byte
ADDB ■ Word
DADDB
Ladder
ADD D = S1 + S2
R D =
S1 =
S2 =
Decimal: S1 = 21, and S2 = 22
Hexadecimal: S1 = $15 and S2 = $16
ADDB
R D = ADD Example:
S1 =
S2 = Decimal: 21 + 22 = 43
ADDB Example:
BCD: $15 + $16 = $31
Description
1. Add the data in the S1 and S2 addresses, then store the result in the D register.
2. When using ADD and ADDB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
3. When using DADD and DADDB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
4. If the result exceeds the range of calculation, a carry occurs. The carry flag (F1.8) is changed
to On.
5. This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.
Example
Program Expression Operation Results

R0 ADD Initial conditions:W0 = 00017 = $0011
R D = W10
S1 = W0
W1 = 00001 = $0001
S2 = W2 W2 = 00025 = $0019
DADD W3 = 00250 = $00FA
D = W11
S1 = W0 Operation results: W10 = 00042 = $002A
S2 = W3 W11 = 00267 = $010B
ADDB W12 = 00048 = $0030
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
Instruction
Mnemonic Subtraction Range

SUB Decimal subtraction (SUB, DSUB) Bit
DSUB BCD subtraction (SUBB, DSUBB) ■ Byte
SUBB ■ Word
DSUBB
Ladder
SUB D = S1 - S2
R D =
S1 =
S2 =
Decimal: S1 = 34 and S2 = 19
SUBB
R D = SUB Example:
S1 =
S2 = Decimal: 34 - 19 = 15
SUBB Example:
BCD: $22 - $13 = $09
Description
1. Subtract the data in S2 from S1, then store the result in the D register.
2. When using SUB and SUBB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
3. When using DSUB and DSUBB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
to On.
Example

R0 SUB Initial conditions:W0 = 00016 = $0010
R D = W10
S1 = W0
W1 = 00520 = $0208
S2 = W2 W2 = 00007 = $0007
DSUB W3 = 00384 = $0180
D = W11
S1 = W1 Operation results: W10 = 00009 = $0009
S2 = W3 W11 = 00136 = $0088
SUBB W12 = 00003 = $0003
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
Instruction
Mnemonic Multiplication Range

MUL Decimal multiplication (MUL, Bit
DMUL DMUL) ■ Byte
MULB BCD multiplication (MULB,
■ Word
DMULB)
DMULB
Ladder
MUL
D =
D = S1 × S2
R
S1 = Decimal: S1 = 3 and S2 = 7
S2 =
MULB
R D = MUL Example:
S1 =
S2 =
Decimal: 3 × 7 = 21
MULB Example:
BCD: $03 × $07 = $21
Description
1. Multiply the data in the S1 and S2 addresses, then store the result in the D register.
2. When using MUL and MULB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
3. When using DMUL and DMULB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
to On. The high word of the result that exceeds the range of D is automatically stored in
SR20.
Example

R0 MUL Initial conditions:W0 = 00002 = $0002
R D = W10
S1 = W0
W1 = 00030 = $001D
S2 = W2 W2 = 00006 = $0006
DMUL W3 = 00500 = $01E4
D = W11
S1 = W1 Operation results: W10 = 00012 = $000C
S2 = W3 W11 = 15000 = $3A98
MULB W12 = 00018 = $0012
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
Instruction
Mnemonic Division Range

DIV Decimal division (DIV, DDIV) Bit
DDIV BCD division (DIVB, DDIVB) ■ Byte
DIVB ■ Word
DDIVB
Ladder
DIV
D =
D = S1 ÷ S2
R
S1 =
S2 =
DIVB
R D = DIV Example:
S1 =
S2 = Decimal: 18 ÷ 3 = 6
DIVB Example:
BCD: $12 ÷ $03 = $04
Description
1. Divide the data in S1 by S2, then store the result in the D register.
2. When using DIV and DIVB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
3. When using DDIV and DDIVB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
4. The quotient is stored in the D register, and the remainder in special register SR22.
Example

R0 DIV Initial conditions:W0 = 00024 = $0018
R D = W10
S1 = W0
W1 = 01024 = $0400
S2 = W2 W2 = 00004 = $0004
DDIV W3 = 00128 = $0080
D = W11
S1 = W1 Operation results: W10 = 00006 = $0006
S2 = W3 W11 = 00008 = $0008
DIVB W12 = 00004 = $0004
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
Instruction
Command Addition with Carry Range

ADC Decimal addition with carry (ADC, Bit
DADC DADC) ■ Byte
ADCB BCD addition with carry (ADCB,
■ Word
DADCB)
DADCB
Ladder
ADC D = S1 + S2 + carry
R D =
S1 =
S2 =
Decimal: S1 = 21, and S2 = 22
ADCB
R D =
Carry Flag: F1.8 = On
S1 =
S2 = ADC Example:
Decimal: 21 + 22 + 1 = 44
ADCB Example:
BCD: $15 + $16 + $1 = $32
Description
1. Add the data in the S1 and S2 addresses. If the carry flag F1.8 is On, add 1, otherwise add 0.
Then store the result in the D register.
2. When using ADC and ADCB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
3. When using DADD and DADDB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
to On.
Example

R0.0 Initial conditions:W0 = 00017 = $0011
R SC W1 = 00025 = $0019
Operation results: W10 = 00017 + 00025 +1 = 00043
W11 = $0011 + $0019 + 0 = $0030
R0.0 ADC
R D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W1
R0.0
R RC
R0.0 ADCB
R D = W11
S1 = W0
S2 = W1
Instruction
Command Subtraction with Carry Range

SBC Decimal subtraction with carry Bit
DSBC (SBC, DSBC) ■ Byte
SBCB BCD subtraction with carry
■ Word
(SBCB, DSBCB)
DSBCB
Ladder
SBC D = S1 - S2 - carry
R D =
S1 =
S2 =
SBCB
R D =
Carry Flag: F1.8 = On
S1 =
S2 = SBC Example:
Decimal: 34 - 19 - 1 = 14
SBCB Example:
BCD: $22 - $13 - $01 = $08
Description
1. Subtract the data in S2 from S1. If the carry flag F1.8 is On, subtract 1. Then store the result
in the D register.
2. When using SBC and SBCB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
3. When using DSBC and DSBCB, the calculation ranges are as follows:
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
to On.
Example

R0.0 Initial conditions:W0 = 00016 = $0010
R SC W1 = 00002 = $0002
Operation results: W10 = 00016 - 00002 - 1 = 00013
R0.0 SBC
W11 = $0010 - $0002 - 0 = $0008
R D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W1
R0.0
R RC
R0.0 SBCB
R D = W11
S1 = W0
S2 = W1
Instruction
Mnemonic Absolute Value, NEG and NOT Range

ABS ABS: Absolute value Bit
DABS NEG: 2's complement ■ Byte
NEG NOT: 1's complement ■ Word
DNEG
NOT
DNOT
Ladder
ABS ABS: Take the absolute value of D, and store it in D.
R D=
NEG
NEG: Take the 2’s complement and store it in D.
R D= NOT: Take the 1’s complement and store it in D.
NOT
R D=
Description
1. For the ABS (absolute value) instruction, if the highest bit (MSB) is 1, take the 2’s
complement. If the highest bit is 0, leave it as it is.
For example, the absolute value of $9A52 (=1001 1010 0101 0010) is $65AE (=0110
0101 1010 1110). The absolute value of $7A52 (=0111 1010 0101 0010) is $7A52.
2. The NEG (2’s complement) instruction is expressed as the 1’s complement + 1.
For example, DNEG of $7A52 (=0111 1010 0101 0010) is $85AE (=1000 0101 1010
1110)
3. The NOT (1’s complement) instruction is performed by reversing each bit.
For example, DNOT of $7A52 (=0111 1010 0101 0010) is $85AD (=1000 0101 1010
1101)
Example

R0 0 DABS Initial conditions:W0 = $9A52
R D = W0 W1 = $7A52
DABS W2 = $7A52
D = W1
W3 = $7A52
DNEG
D = W2 Operation results: W0 = $65AE
DNOT
W1 = $7A52
D = W3 W2 = $85AE
W3 = $85AD
Logic Instruction Details
Instruction
Mnemonic Bit AND Operation Range

WAND Bit AND operation Bit
DAND ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
WAND Process each bit of S1 and S2 in bit AND operation and store the
R D =
S1 = result in D.
S2 =
S1 S2 D
DAND
R D = 0 0 0
S1 =
S2 = 0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
Description
1. Process the values of the S1 and S2 bits (byte/word) in bit AND operation and store the result
in D.
For example: S1 = $00FF (hex)
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $0033 (hex)
S1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AND
S2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Example
R0.0 DAND
Initial conditions: W0 = $00FF
R D = W2 W1 = $3333
S1 = W0
S2 = W1 W2 = $XXXX
Operation results: W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $0033
Instruction
Mnemonic Bit OR Operation Range

WOR Bit OR operation Bit
DOR ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
WOR Process S1 and S2 in bit OR operation and store the result in D.
R D =
S1 = S1 S2 D
S2 =
0 0 0
DOR
R D = 0 1 1
S1 =
S2 = 1 0 1
1 1 1
Description
1. Process S1 and S2 (byte/word) by bit OR operation and store the result in D.
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $33FF (hex)
S1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
OR
S2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Example
R0.0 DOR Initial conditions: W0 = $00FF

R D = W2
S1 = W0
W1 = $3333
S2 = W1 W2 = $XXXX
W1 = $3333
W2 = $33FF
Instruction
Mnemonic Bit Exclusive OR Operation Range

XOR Bit exclusive OR operation Bit
DXOR ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
XOR Process S1 and S2 in bit exclusive OR operation and store the
R D =
S1 = result in D.
S2 =
S1 S2 D
DXOR
R D = 0 0 0
S1 =
S2 = 0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
Description
1. Process S1 and S2 (byte/word) by bit exclusive OR operation and store the result
in D.
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $33CC (hex)
S1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
XOR (Exclusive OR)
S2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
D 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Example
R0.0 DXOR Initial conditions: W0 = $00FF

R D = W2
S1 = W0
W1 = $3333
S2 = W1 W2 = $XXXX
W1 = $3333
W2 = $33CC
Instruction
Mnemonic Bit Exclusive NOR Operation Range

XNR Bit exclusive OR NOT operation Bit
DXNR ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
XNR Process S1 and S2 in bit exclusive OR NOT operation and store
R D =
S1 = the result in D.
S2 =
S1 S2 D
DXNR
R D = 0 0 1
S1 =
S2 = 0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
Description
1. Process S1 and S2 (word/double word) by bit exclusive OR NOT operation and store the
result in D.
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $CC33 (hex)
S1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DXNR (Exclusive OR NOT)
S2 0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
D 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Example
R0.0 DXNR Initial conditions: W0 = $00FF

R D = W2
S1 = W0
W1 = $3333
S2 = W1 W2 = $XXXX
W1 = $3333
W2 = $CC33
Rotation Instruction Details
Instruction
Mnemonic Rotate to the Left Without Carry Range

RLC Rotate specified address to the Bit
DRLC left (low to high) ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
RLC D = Register address
R D=
N= N = Number of bits to rotate
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
carry C p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a
(F1.8)
p
Description
1. Order:
Shift by N bits to the left (from low-order bit to high-order bit).
Fill the carry bit (F1.8) with the MSB (most significant bit).
Shift the MSB to the LSB (least significant bit).
2. Shift the register specified as D to the left by N bits. Each bit will move one bit position
higher in the register.
3. The D register is either a byte or a word. For RLC (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DRLC (word), N =
0 to 15.
Example
R0.0 RLC Initial condition: M0000 = $0F0F

R D = M0000
N =1
M0001 = $0F0F
Operation results: M0000 = $0F1E
DRLC
D = M0001 M0001 = $3C3C
N =2
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
Instruction
Mnemonic Rotate to the Right Without Carry Range

RRC Rotate the specified address to the Bit
DRRC right (high to low) ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
RRC D = Register address
R D=
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a C carry
(F1.8)
a
Description
1. Order:
Shift N bits to the right (from high-order bit to low-order bit).
Fill the carry bit (F1.8) with the LSB (least significant bit).
Shift the LSB to the MSB (most significant bit).
2. Shift the register specified as D to the right by N bits. Each bit will move one bit position
lower in the register.
3. The D register is either a byte or a word. For RLC (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DRLC (word), N =
0 to 15.
Example
R0.0 RRC Initial condition: M0000 = $0F0F

R D = M0000
N=1
M0001 = $0F0F
Operation results: M0000 = $0F87
DRRC
D = M0001 M0001 = $C3C3
N=2
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
Instruction
Mnemonic Rotate to the Left Range

ROL Rotate the specified address to Bit
DROL the left with the carry flag ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
ROL D = Register address
R D=
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB
carry C p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a
(F1.8)
C
Description
1. Order:
Shift N bits to the left (from low-order bit to high-order bit) including the carry bit.
The MSB (most significant bit) moves to the carry bit (F1.8).
Input F1.8 (carry bit) in the LSB (least significant bit).
2. This instruction is different from the RLC instruction because it sends the MSB to the carry
bit and the carry bit moves to the LSB. The input to the LSB can be changed by setting or
clearing the carry bit.
3. The D register is either a byte or a word. For ROL (word), N = 0 to 7. For DROL (word), N =
0 to 15.
Example

R0.0
F1.8
R (OUT)
R0.0
R0.1 ROL R0.1

R D =MO
N=1
M0 $00 $01 $03 $06 $0D
(word)
…1 1 0 1 1 C
…0 1 1 0 0 C
… 0 0 1 1 1 C
…0 0 0 1 1 C
C 0 0 … 0 0 0 0
If N = 1, the bits shift by one, and the LSB is always

input from F1.8.
If N = 2, the bits shift by two. The bits are shifted one
position, and the first data input to the LSB is F1.8.
The original MSB is stored in F1.8. The bits are
again shifted one position, with the LSB being set by
the new F1.8, and F1.8 being changed to the state of
the last MSB.
Instruction
Mnemonic Rotate to the Right Range

ROR Rotate the specified address to Bit
DROR the right with the carry flag ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
ROR D = Register address
R D=
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a C carry
(F1.8)
C
Description
1. Order:
Shift N bits to the right (from high-order bit to low-order bit) including the carry bit.
Input the carry bit (F1.8) to the MSB (most significant bit).
The LSB (least significant bit) moves to the carry bit (F1.8).
2. This instruction is different from the RRC instruction because it sends the LSB to the carry
bit, and the carry bit shifts to the MSB. The input to the MSB can be changed by setting or
clearing the carry bit.
3. The D register is either a byte or a word. For ROR (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DROR (word), N =
0 to 15.
Example

R0.0 F1.8
(OUT)
R0.0
R0.1 ROR R0.1

R D = M0
$4000 $1400
N=2 $0000 $5000
MO
C 0 0 0 0 1 0 1…
C 1 0 1 0 1 …
C 1 0 1 0 0 … 0 0 C
0 0 0 0 …
MSB LSB
Instruction
Mnemonic Shift to Left Range

SHL Shift to left (high-order bit) by N ■ Bit
DSHL bits Byte
Lowest bit becomes 0
Word
Ladder
SHL D = Register address
R D=
MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LSB
carry C p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a 0
(F1.8)
Description
1. Order:
Shift N bits to the left (from low-order bit to high-order bit) including the carry bit.
The MSB (most significant bit) moves to the carry bit (F1.8).
The LSB (least significant bit) becomes 0.
2. Shift the register specified as D to the left by N bits. Each bit will move one position higher in
the register.
3. The D register is either a byte or a word. For SHL (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DSHL (word), N = 0
to 15.
Example
R0.0 DLET
D = MO R0.0
R
S = $FFFF
R0.1
R0.1 $FFF0
DSHL
$FFFF $FFFC
R D = M0
M0
N=2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Regardless of N, the MSB moves to the carry bit

(F1.8) and the LSB always becomes 0.
The R0.0 input is the initial condition, used to set the
initial value of M0 to $FFFF.
Instruction
Mnemonic Shift to Right Range

SHR Shift to right (low-order bit) by N Bit
DSHR bits ■ Byte
The highest bit becomes 0
■ Word
Ladder
SHR
R D=
D = Register address
N=
N = Number of bits to rotate
MSB LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 po n m l k j i h g f e d c b a C carry
(F1.8)
Description
1. Order:
Shift N bits to the right (from high-order bit to low-order bit).
MSB (most significant bit) becomes 0.
Fill the carry bit (F1.8) with the LSB (least significant bit).
2. Shift the register specified as D to the right by N bits. Each bit will move one bit position
lower in the register.
3. The D register is either a byte or a word. For SHR (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DSHR (word), N =
0 to 15.
Example
R0.0 DLET
R D = M0 R0.0
S = $FFFF
R0.1
R0.1 DSHR
R D = M0 $FFFF $7FFF $3FFF
N=1 M0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Regardless of N, the MSB moves to the carry (F1.8)

and the LSB always becomes 0.
The R0.0 input is the initial condition, used to set the
initial value of M0 to $FFFF.
Word Conversion Instruction Details

Instruction
Mnemonic BCD Conversion, Range

Binary Conversion
BCD BCD: Convert binary to BCD Bit
DBCD BIN: Convert BCD to binary ■ Byte
BIN ■ Word
DBIN
Ladder
BCD
R D =
BCD: Convert the S value from binary into BCD and store in D.
S =
BIN
R D = BIN: Convert the S value from BCD into binary and store in D.
S =
Description
1. BCD: Convert S, which is expressed in binary (byte /word), into BCD and store in D. The
range is as follows:
Byte conversion: S = 0 to $63 (hex) = 99 (decimal)
D = 0 to $99 (hex) = 153 (decimal)
Word conversion: S = 0 to $270F (hex) = 9999 (decimal)
D = 0 to $9999 (hex) = 39321 (decimal)
2. BIN: Convert S, which is expressed in BCD (byte /word), into binary (binary code) and store
in D. The range is as follows:
Byte conversion: S = 0 to $99 (hex) = 153 (decimal)
D = 0 to $63 (hex) = 99 (decimal)
Word conversion: S = 0 to $9999 (hex) = 39321 (decimal)
D = 0 to $270F = 9999 (decimal)
Example
Initial conditions: W0 = $07CC = 1996 (decimal)
R0.0 DBCD
R D = W2 W1 = $1996 = 6550 (decimal)
S = W0 W2 = $XXXX
DBIN W3 = $XXXX
D = W3
N = W1 Operation results: W0 = $07CC
W1 = $1996
W2 = $1996 = 6550 (decimal)
W3 = $07CC = 1996 (decimal)
Instruction
Mnemonic Data Exchange Range

XCHG Exchange registers of D1, D2 with Bit
DXCHG each other ■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
XCHG
R D1 =
Exchange registers D1 and D2 (byte /word) with each other.
D2 =
D1 => D2, D2 => D1
DXCHG D1 .. 0 1 0 1 D1 .. 0 0 1 1
R D1 =
D2 =
D2 ... 0 0 1 1 D2 .. 0 1 0 1
Description
1. Exchange registers D1 and D2 with each other (byte/word). For example:
Byte operation: D1 = $1234 (hex) D2 = $1278 (hex)
D1 = $5678 (hex) D2 = $5634 (hex)
Word operation: D1 = $1234 (hex) D2 = $5678 (hex)
D1 = $5678 (hex) D2 = $1234 (hex)
Example
R0.0 XCHG Initial conditions: W0 = $1234
R D1 = W0
D2 = W1
W1 = $5678
W10 = $5678
DXCHG
D1 = W10 W11 = $1234
D1 = W11 Operation results: W0 = $1278
W1 = $5634
W10 = $1234
W11 = $5678
Instruction
Mnemonic 7-Segment Decoder Range
SEG Convert the low-order 4 bits of S Bit
into 7-segment display format and ■ Byte
store in D
Word
Ladder
SEG Convert the value in the low-order 4 bits of address S (0 to 15) into
R D=
S= the proper format for display by a 7-segment display and store in
D. In the converted format, if a bit is 1, the segment is illuminated
(= active high output).
Description
1. Convert the value in the low-order 4 bits of address S into SEG display format, and store it in
D. The high-order 8 bits of D do not change. The 8th bit of the D register, used with many 7-
segment display cells as the decimal point, is not affected by this instruction.
For example: S = $XXX5 (hex)
D = $XX6D (hex)
=5
a
a
f b S ... 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 f b
g g
e c D ... 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 e c
d dp g f e d c b a d
Example
R0.0 SEG Initial conditions: W0 = $8765 (hex)
R D = W1
S = W0
W1 = $1234 (hex)
Operation results: W0 = $8765 (hex)
W1 = $126D (hex)
The 8th bit of W1 does not change.
Instruction
Mnemonic Decoder and Encoder with 8421 Range

ENCO ENCO: 8421 encoder Bit
DECO DECO: 8421 decoder ■ Byte
Word
Ladder
ENCO
R D=
ENCO: Inspect the S register. If there is a bit in the On state, encode
S= it (on bit n) and store it in the low-order 8 bits of D. If there are two
or more bits in the S register that are in the On state, only the highest
R
DECO
D =
bit will be processed. The higher 8 bits of D do not change.
S = DECO: Interpret the lower 4 bits of the S register and store in D.
Description
1. ENCO: Set D to the value of the bit number of highest bit in S that is On (0 to 16). If there are
two or more On bits in S, use the location of the highest bit. The high-order 8 bits of D do not
change.
2. DECO: Set the bit location (0 to 15) in D pointed to by the value in the low 4 bits of S. All
other bits in D are reset to 0.
ENCO DECO
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S ..... x x x x 0 1 0 1 =5
S 0..0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
D 0..0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
invar
D iable 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 6+1=7 15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ENCO $0000→$00 $0020→$06 $0800→$0C

$0001→$01 $0040→$07 $1000→$0D
$0002→$02 $0080→$08 $2000→$0E
$0004→$03 $0100→$09 $4000→$0F
$0008→$04 $0200→$0A $8000→$10
$0010→$05 $0400→$0B
DECO $0→$0001 $6→$0040 $C→$1000
$1→$0002 $7→$0080 $D→$2000
$2→$0004 $8→$0100 $E→$4000
$3→$0008 $9→$0200 $F→$8000
$4→$0010 $A→$0400
$5→$0020 $B→$0800
Example

R0.0 ENCO Initial conditions: W0 = $0070 (hex)
R D = W2
S = W0
W1 = $1235 (hex)
W2 = $5678 (hex)
DECO
D = W3 W3 = $9ABC (hex)
S = W1
Operation results: W0 = $0070 (hex)
W1 = $1235 (hex)
W2 = $5607 (hex)
W3 = $0020 (hex)
The high-order 8 bits of W2 do not change.
Instruction
Mnemonic Dissemble by 4 bit units/ Range

Unify by 4 bit units
DIS DIS: Dissemble by 4 bit units Bit
UNI UNI: Unify by 4 bit units ■ Byte
Word
Ladder
DIS DIS: Separate Sr into Nd+1 units of 4 bits each, and store in the
R D =
Nd = low 4 bits of words starting at D.
Sr =
UNI: Combine the low 4 bits of Nd+1 words starting at Sr, and
UNI
R D =
store in D.
Sr =
Nd =
Description
1. DIS: Separate the word value in register Sr into Nd+1 units of 4 bits each, and store these 4
bit units in sequence into registers starting at D. The 12 remaining high-order bits in each
register become 0.
2. UNI: Combine the low-order 4 bit units from Nd+1 registers starting at Sr, and store in D.
DIS
UNI
Sr $ 7 4 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
Sr $ 0 1 0 1
Nd+1
D $0000 0 1 0 1 If Nd=3 Sr+1 $ 1 1 1 1
Nd+1 Sr+2 $ 1 0 1 0
If Nd=3 D+1 $0000 1 1 1 0
D+2 $0000 0 1 0 0 4 Sr+3 $ 0 1 0 0
D+3 $0000 0 1 1 1 7
D $ 4 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1
3. Nd + 1 represents the number of 4-bit segments to dissemble or unify. The range for Nd is
Nd = 0 to 3.
Example

R0.0 DIS Initial conditions: M0 = $74E5 (hex) W0 = $1111 (hex)
R D = W0
Nd = 3
W1 = $2222 (hex)
Sr = M0 W2 = $3333 (hex)
UNI W3 = $4444 (hex)
D = M10
Sr = W10
W10 = $0123 (hex) M10 = $ABCD (hex)
Nd = 3 W11 = $456F (hex)
W12 = $789A (hex)
W13 = $7654 (hex)
Operation results: M0 = $74E5 (hex) W0 = $0005 (hex)
W1 = $000E (hex)
W2 = $0004 (hex)
W3 = $0007 (hex)
W10 = $0123 (hex) M10 = $4AF3 (hex)
W11 = $456F (hex)
W12 = $789A (hex)
W13 = $7654 (hex)
Bit Conversion Instruction Details

Instruction
Instruction Bit Set, Reset, Reverse, Test Range

BSET BSET: Nth bit set Bit
BRST BRST: Nth bit reset Byte
BNOT BNOT: Nth bit reverse ■ Word
BTST BTST: Nth bit test
Ladder
BNOT
BSET
D= D=
BSET: Set the Nth bit in the D register
R R
N= N= (X→1).
BNOT: Reverse the Nth bit in the D
register (0→1, 1→0).
BRST
D=
BTST
D=
BRST: Reset the Nth bit in the D
R R
N= N= register (X→0).
BTST: Copy the Nth bit to the carry bit
in the D register (X→F1.8).
Description
1. BSET: Set the Nth bit of register D to 1.
2. BRST: Reset the Nth bit of register D to 0.
3. BNOT: Reverse the state of the Nth bit of register D.
4. BTST: Set the carry bit F1.8 to the state of the Nth bit of register D.
5. These instructions are useful when it is necessary to perform bit-level operations on word-
only memory addresses, such as W, PV, SV, and SR.
BSET D ...... 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 BNOT D ...... 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
if N=5 1 if N=4
D ...... 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
BRST D ...... 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 BTST D ...... 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
if N=3 0
if N=6 F1.8
Example

R0.0 BSET Initial conditions:M0 = 0001 0010 0001 1100 (binary)
R D = M0
N=5
M1 = 0011 0100 0101 1100 (binary)
M2 = 0101 0110 0111 0100 (binary)
BRST
D = M1 M3 = 0111 1000 0111 0100 (binary)
N=3 F1.8 = 0 (Off)
BNOT
D = M2
Operation results: M0 = 0001 0010 0011 1100 (binary)
N=4 M1 = 0011 0100 0101 0100 (binary)
BTST M2 = 0101 0110 0110 0100 (binary)
D = M3
N=6
M3 = 0111 1000 0111 0100 (binary)
F1.8 = 1 (On)
Instruction
Mnemonic Count Number of On (= 1) Bits Range

SUM Count On (= 1) bits in the S Bit
register ■ Byte
Word
Ladder
SUM
D=
SUM: Count the number of On (= 1) bits in the S register and store
R
S= the result in the D register.
Description
1. Count the number of On (= 1) bits in the S register and store the result in the D register.
S 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Number of On(=1) is 11
D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 D=$000B=11 (Decimal)
Example
R0.0 SUM Initial conditions:M0 = 1110 0111 1011 0011 (binary)
R D = W0
S = M0
W0 = $XXXX (hex)
Operation results: M0 = 1110 0111 1011 0011 (binary)
W0 = $000B (hex) = 11 (decimal)
Instruction
Mnemonic Carry Bit (F1.8) Set, Reset, Range

Reverse
SC SC: Set carry bit Bit
RC RC: Reset carry bit Byte
CC CC: Reverse carry bit Word
Ladder
SC
SC: Carry bit set (F1.8: X→1).
R
RC
R RC: Carry bit reset (F1.8: X→0).
CC
R
CC: Carry bit reverse (F1.8: 0→1, 1→ 0).
Description
1. The carry bit (F1.8) is a special internal flag that holds the result of various types of
mathematical and bit shift operations. When rotating, shifting, adding, or subtracting with a
carry, the operation depends on the state of the carry flag, as well as changes the state of the
carry flag. The above instructions are useful for setting the state of the carry flag as needed for
these types of operations.
Example

R0.0 SC
R R0.0
R0.1 RC
R R0.1
R0.2 CC
R R0.2
F1.8
Transfer Instruction Details
Instruction
Mnemonic Load Absolute Address Range

LDR Store value at absolute address Bit
DLDR Sr in D, D←(Sr)
■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
LDR
R D = Store the value located at the absolute address pointed to by Sr into
Sr = register D.
R0 word absolute address: 0
DLDR
R D = M0 word absolute address: 192
Sr =
W0 word absolute address: 512
Description
1. This instruction is useful in transferring data patterns stored sequentially in memory, to a
single output register location. For example, if the register addresses W100 through W199
contained a set of 100 control patterns (P0 to P99) that needed to be transferred to theoutputs
of a module (address R015), the LDR instruction can be used to load the data from the
absolute addresses of W100 to W199 (absolute addresses 612 to 711) into the destination
register R015.
2. In the example below, register W0 is used as the Sr (source) register, which contains the
absolute address of the data patterns to be loaded. Initially, W0 contains 612, which is the
absolute memory address of register W100. As W0 is incremented, it successively points to
the next higher W register to load data from.
3. See Chapter 5, Absolute Address Designation, for a complete table of absolute addresses.
Control Register Register
Pattern (Absolute Value
Address)
Transfer the data of
P0 W100 (612) $22 W100-W199 ($22, $10,
P1 W101 (613) $10 $33,..., $05, $85)
P2 W102 (614) $33 registers in sequence
into R015. See the
: : : following example.
: : :
P98 W198 (710) $05
P99 W199 (711) $85
Example

R0.0 INC Initial conditions: W0 = 611
R D = W0
LDR R0.0 (bit)

D = R15
Sr = W0 data of data of data of data of data of
W100 W101 W102 W198 W199
WO
611 612 613 614 710 711
R2 (word) $22 $10 $33 $05 $85

process output
Instruction
Mnemonic Store Absolute Address Range

STO Store Sr in register at absolute Bit
DSTO address D, (D)←Sr
■ Byte
■ Word
Ladder
STO Store the data contained in the Sr register into the register pointed
R Sr =
D = to by the absolute address contained in register D.
R0 word absolute address: 0 (decimal)
R
DSTO
Sr =
M0 word absolute address: 192 (decimal)
D = W0 word absolute address: 512 (decimal)
Description
1. This instruction is useful in storing data patterns from a single input register to a sequential
table of registers in memory. For example, if the process measurements (D0 to D99) from an
input module located at address R001 needed to be stored in register addresses W100 through
W199. The STO instruction can be used to load the data from the source register R001 to the
absolute addresses of W100 to W199 (absolute addresses 612 to 711).
2. In the example below, register W0 is used as the D (destination) register, which contains the
absolute address of the locations to store the process measurements. Initially, W0 contains
612, which is the absolute memory address of register W100. As W0 is incremented, it
successively points to the next higher W register to store data.
3. See Chapter 5, Absolute Address Designation, for a complete table of absolute addresses.
Process Register Register
Measurement (Absolute Value
Address)
Store the process
D0 W100 (612) $34 measurement data ($34,
D1 W101 (613) $25 $25, $88,...,$17, $09)
D2 W102 (614) $88 you get from inputs at
001 in sequence into
: : : W100-W199. See the
: : : following example.
D98 W198 (710) $17
D99 W199 (711) $09
Example

R0.0 INC Initial conditions: W0 = 611
R D = W0
STO
R0.0 (bit)
Sr = R1
D = W0
R1 $34 $25 $88 $17 $09

(word process
measurement)
W0 611 612 613 614 710 711
Store in Store in Store in Store in Store in

W100 W101 W102 W198 W199
Instruction
Mnemonic Duplicate Word, Duplicate the Range

Same Word
MOV MOV: Copy a block of words Bit
FMOV FMOV: Fill a block of words with Byte
the same value
■ Word
Ladder
MOV
R D =
MOV: Copy Ns words from Sr to D.
Sr =
Ns =
FMOV
R D = FMOV: Repeatedly copy the value V, Ns times to words starting at
Ns =
V =
register address D.
Description
1. MOV: Copy a total of Ns registers from registers starting at Sr word into registers starting at
D. This instruction is used for mass duplication of blocks of registers.
2. FMOV: Copy the constant number V, Ns times into registers starting at D. This instruction is
useful for initializing the internal and external memory of certain areas when initializing a
program.
Sr ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 V value ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Sr+1 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Ns=4
Sr+2 ...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 D ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
MOV Ns=3 FMOV D+1 ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D+2 ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D+1 ...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D+3 ...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
D+2 ...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Example

R0.0 MOV Initial conditions:M0 = $12AA (hex) W0 = $XXXX (hex)
R D = W0
Sr = M0
M1 = $340F (hex) W1 = $XXXX (hex)
Ns = 3 M2 = $56F0 (hex) W2 = $XXXX (hex)
FMOV K0 = $XXXX (hex) K2 = $XXXX (hex)
D = K0
Ns = 4
K1 = $XXXX (hex) K3 = $XXXX (hex)
V = $55AA
Operation results: M0 = $12AA (hex) W0 = $12AA (hex)
M1 = $340F (hex) W1 = $340F (hex)
M2 = $56F0 (hex) W2 = $56F0 (hex)
K0 = $55AA (hex) K2 = $55AA (hex)
K1 = $55AA (hex) K3 = $55AA (hex)
Instruction
Mnemonic Copy Bit, Copy the Same Bit Range

BMOV BMOV: Copy a block of bits ■ Bit
BFMV BFMV: Fill a block of bits with the Byte
same bit value
Word
Ladder
BMOV
R Db =
BMOV: Copy Ns bits from bit address Sb into bit address D.
Sb =
Ns =
BFMV
R Db = BFMV: Copy the V bit (0 or 1) into bit address D, Ns times.
Ns =
V =
Description
1. BMOV: Copy a block of Ns bits starting at bit address Sb to bit address D. This instruction is
useful for moving large blocks of bits at one time, or for copying sections of bits within a
word without copying the entire word.
2. BFMV: Fill a block of Ns bits starting at bit address D with the value of V (0 or 1). This
instruction is useful for initializing a set of bits to 0 or 1 at the start of a program or process.
Sb ...... 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 If V=1
If Ns=5
BMOV If Ns=4 BFMV Db ...... 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
Db ...... 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
Example
R0.0 BMOV R2 before 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
R Db = R2.3 operation
Sr = R2.1
Ns = 4
R2 after 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
BFMV operation
Db = R3.2
Ns = 5
V =1 R3 before
operation 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
R3 after
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
operation
Block Processing Instruction Details

Instruction
Mnemonic FOR-NEXT Loop Range

FOR FOR (DFOR): Start loop Bit
DFOR NEXT: End loop ■ Byte
NEXT ■ Word
Ladder
R
FOR FOR: Begin execution of instructions between (D)FOR and
D =
corresponding NEXT. Repeat execution D times.
………
………
………
NEXT: Decrease D of FOR instruction by 1. If not zero, repeat from FOR
NEXT instruction.
Description
1. The FOR/NEXT instructions are used to perform a block of instructions inside a ladder
program repeatedly. The parameter D of the FOR instruction is a value indicating how many
times the block of instructions is to be performed.
2. Branch instructions such as JMP and CALL can be made inside the FOR/NEXT loop.
3. The number of loops to execute (D value) can be changed inside of the FOR/NEXT loop. This
can be used to dynamically increase or decrease the number of loops performed while
processing the loops.
4. If the D register is 0 before the FOR instruction, the instructions between the FOR and NEXT
instructions will NOT be executed. Instead, the program will jump directly to the instruction
following the NEXT.
5. As the FOR/NEXT loop occurs within a single program scan, a large value of D will lengthen
the scan time of the program considerably.
Example

R0.0 Initial condition: W0 = 10
FOR
R D = W0 M0 = 0
INC Operation results: W0 = 0
D = M0
M0 = 10
NEXT
When the R0.0 contact changes from OffOn, execution
of the FOR/NEXT loop occurs. At the FOR instruction,
the value of W0 is evaluated. If W0 is not 0, then the
instructions between the FOR and NEXT (INC D = M0)
is performed. At the NEXT instruction, 1 is subtracted
from the value of W0, and execution returns to the FOR
instruction. This is repeated 10 times, until the value of
W0 is 0. When this occurs, execution goes directly the
instruction following the NEXT instruction.
Instruction
Mnemonic Jump by Pointer Range

JMP JMP: Jump by pointer Bit
LBL LBL: Specify the pointer Byte
Word
Ladder
R
JMP
L =
JMP: Jump to the LBL instruction L (L = 0 to 31).
LBL
L = LBL: Position jumped to by the JMP instruction.
(OUT)
Description
1. This instruction is used to conditionally perform a set of instructions in the program. When
the input condition to the JMP instruction is true, execution will jump over the following
instructions, directly to the corresponding LBL label. When the input condition is false, the
instructions following the JMP will be executed normally, and no jump occurs.
2. The range of L is 0 to 31, allowing 32 jumps to be used.
3. The given L label may only be used once in a program. It may not be duplicated.
4. For a given JMP with parameter L, there MUST be a corresponding LBL with the same L
value. Also, the LBL instruction must come after the JMP instruction in the program. If either
of these two conditions is not satisfied, an error will occur preventing execution of the
program.
Example

R0.0
JMP
When contact R0.0 turns On, JMP 1 occurs, and
R L =1 execution jumps directly to LBL 1—the instructions
between the JMP and LBL are not executed.
R0.1
JMP When contact R0.1 turns On, execution of the
R L =3
program jumps directly from JMP 3 to LBL 3.
LBL
L =3
LBL
L =1
Instruction
Mnemonic Jump Range

JMPS JMPS: Start jump Bit
JMPE JMPE: End jump Byte
Word
Ladder
R
JMPS JMPS: Jump directly to the corresponding JMPE instruction.
JMPE
JMPE: Position jumped to by JMPS instruction.
(OUT)
Description
1. The JMPS and JMPE instruction function identically to the JMP and LBL instructions, but do
not require the use of a label. Additionally, the JMPS/JMPE pair may be used more than once
in a program.
2. This instruction is used to conditionally perform a set of instructions in the program. When
the input condition to the JMPS instruction is true, execution will jump over the following
instructions, directly to the corresponding JMPE. When the input condition is false, the
instructions following the JMPS will be executed normally, and no jump occurs.
3. For the JMPS instruction, there MUST be a corresponding JMPE. Also, the JMPE instruction
must come after the JMPS instruction in the program. If either of these two conditions is not
satisfied, an error will occur preventing execution of the program.
4. The JMPS/JMPE instructions may NOT be nested—after each JMPS instruction, there must
be a JMPE instruction before the next JMPS instruction may be programmed.
Example

R0.0
JMPS
By executing a JMPS:
R
When contact R0.0 or R0.1 turns On, execution of
the program jumps directly from the associated JMPS
JMPE to its corresponding JMPE.
R0.1
JMPS
R
JMPE
Instruction
Mnemonic Call Subroutine Range

CALL CALL: Call subroutine Bit
SBR SBR: Start subroutine Byte
RET RET: End subroutine Word
Ladder
CALL
R Sb =
CALL: Call subroutine Sb (Sb = 0 to 31)
SBR
Sb = SBR: Start Subroutine
RET: Return from Subroutine

RET
Description
1. The subroutine instructions are used when a block of instructions needs to be called more than
once, or called with different values, from the main program.
2. The subroutine to be called is specified by the Sb parameter in the CALL and SBR
instructions. The CALL instruction causes execution to jump to the specified SBR instruction.
After executing the instructions between SBR and RET, program execution is returned to the
instruction following the CALL instruction that called the subroutine.
3. The subroutine defined by the SBR and RET instructions must come after the associated
CALL instruction. All subroutines must be defined and programmed at the end of the control
program. A total of 64 subroutines are available (Sb = 0 to 31).
4. The same subroutine (SBR Sb) can be called by multiple CALL instructions. However, each
subroutine number may only be used once by an SBR instruction.
Example

R0.0 CALL
When contact R0.0 and/or R0.1 turns On, the CALL Sb =
R Sb = 3 3 instruction is executed and the instructions between
SBR Sb = 3 and RET are executed. After executing this
R0.1
CALL
subroutine, the program returns to the next instruction
R Sb = 3 after the CALL.
SBR
Sb = 3
RET
Instruction
Mnemonic Clear Watchdog Time Range

WAT WAT: Clear watchdog time Bit
Byte
Word
Ladder
R
WAT WAT: Clears the watchdog timer while executing the program.
Description
1. This instruction clears the watchdog timer within the CPU module to prevent the program
from stopping even if the scan time exceeds the maximum watchdog time. The default
watchdog time is 3 seconds.
2. Under normal operation, the PLC executes the following process:
Read external inputs.
Process the control program.
Update the external outputs.
One execution of this process is termed a scan. When the time it takes to process a single scan
(the scan time) is excessively long, abnormal results may occur caused by the delay in reading
inputs and updating outputs. For this reason, a watchdog time is set by the PLC which, when
exceeded, indicates that an error has occurred. When this happens, the PLC stops the program
to prevent abnormal operation.
3. Under certain circumstances, extremely lengthy scan times may be allowable. The WAT
instruction allows the user to reset the watchdog timer to prevent the PLC from automatically
going into the error condition and stop mode when the watchdog time is exceeded.
Example

M0.0 WAT In certain applications, the user program may contain
loops which cause lengthy scan times. In the example,
turning on M0.0 prevents the PLC from stopping when
the watchdog time (maximum of 3 sec) is exceeded. For
normal PLC control applications, this instruction should
not be used.
Instruction
Mnemonic End Control Program Range

END END: End control program Bit
(Inserted automatically) Byte
Word
Ladder
END
Description
1. This instruction indicates the end of the control program.
2. This instruction is automatically added by GPC. It is not programmed by the user.
Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting 127
Testing and Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information on testing and troubleshooting the D50 PLC.
• Testing procedures for the D50 PLC

• How to troubleshoot the D50 PLC
Test Precautions
When checking the system:
CAUTION: Always turn off the power whenever you install or remove a module.
1. Check the module more than one time before exchanging the part.
2. Include a complete description of the symptoms when you return a defective module for
repair.
3. When you suspect that a contact may be defective, it might only need cleaning. Clean the
contact using a clean cotton cloth and alcohol. Then retest the module.
4. Do not use thinner to clean any of the parts.
System Checks
Before installing the I/O wiring of the PLC and supplying power, check the following items.
Check the connection

of the power cable
Check the connection

of the I/O expansion
module cables
Check the grounding
Verify proper wiring of

the emergency stop
circuit
Check the power

source
Item What to Check

The connection of the power • Check that the wiring is secure and intact.
cable and the I/O expansion
• Check that the terminal screws are tightly fastened.
cables.
• Check that I/O module is firmly fixed.
• Check that the power cable connection is secure.
• Check that the cable size is correct.
Grounding • Check that the grounding is triple grounded and
separate from other device grounds.
Emergency stop circuit • Check that the emergency stop circuit for problems
external to the PLC is wired accurately, and will
IMMEDIATELY disconnect power on demand.
Power source • Check that the power and voltage sources are within
specifications.
For 110/220 VAC (85 to 264 VAC)
For 24 VDC (20 to 28 VAC)
• Check that the voltage to AC-type I/O is within
specifications.
Testing Procedures
When the PLC has been installed and wired, begin testing in the following order.
Supply Power
Initialize Memory
Check I/O Wiring
Programming
Testing
Correct Program
Store Program
End
Item What to Check/Do

Power source • Check that the input voltage to the power supply is within specification.
• Check that the control voltage to the I/O is within specification.
• Turn on the power source.
• Check the LED display on the controller.
Initialize memory • Initialize the PLC module using GPC. (This clears the program in the PLC.)
Check I/O wiring • Check the LEDs of the input modules and use the monitor function of GPC after
testing the input device.
• Check the wiring of the output by turning the output On/Off using the monitor mode of
GPC (set PLC to Run mode).
Programming • Check the program.
• Download the program into the CPU module.
Testing • Check the Run LED for illumination by setting the mode switch of the controller to
Run.
• Check for the proper operation of the program.
Correct • Correct any program errors.
programming
• Program is stored.
Store program • Store the program onto a floppy disk or similar storage device and place in a secure
place.
• Record the PLC type, program capacity, name of installation, and date for the
recorded program.
• Print the program (ladder, mnemonic) and store it in a secure place.
Correcting Errors
System Check
Refer to the system check flow chart when you encounter problems during startup and testing.
System Check Flowchart
Is RUN LED No Go to the Power Supply

ON or Flashing? Check flowchart
Yes
Is PLC in Run No Go to the RUN

(RUN LED On)? Check flowchart
Yes
Is ERR LED Yes Go to the Error

illuminated? Check flowchart
No
Are I/O modules No

Go to the I/O
operating normally? Check flowchart
Yes
Replace the faulty module/

Correct the program
Power Supply Check
Power Supply
Check Flowchart
Is power being No
applied to the Supply power
terminals?
Yes
No Is RUN LED Yes

On or Flashing?
Is the voltage No Adjust voltage within

within the specified the specified range
range?
Yes
No Is RUN LED Yes

On or Flashing?
Are the terminal No Tighten the

screws loose? terminal screws
Yes
No Is RUN LED Yes

On or Flashing?
Replace the controller END

Run Check
RUN Check Flowchart
Is the controller No
mode switch set Set mode switch to RUN
to RUN?
Yes
No
Is RUN LED On?
Yes
Place in Run
Yes
using GPC - Is RUN END
LED On?
No
Is the ERR Yes Go to the Error

LED illuminated? Check flowchart
No
Set the controller mode

switch to STOP
Clear the PLC program

using GPC*
Set the controller mode

switch to RUN
Is the RUN LED No Is the ERR LED No

Replace the controller
illuminated? illuminated?
Yes Yes
Check the PLC program, Go to the Error

and reload Check flowchart
*Be certain to save the program before clearing the PLC program so it is not lost.
Error Check
Error Check Flowchart
Are any
of the bits from Yes F0.0 = 1 System Error -
F0.0 to F0.7 in the Resupply Power
ON state?
No F0.1 = 1 System ROM Error -

Resupply Power
F0.2 = 1 System RAM Error -

Resupply Power
F0.3 = 1 User program Error -

Download the program
again
F0.4 = 1 Program Syntax Error -

Correct the program, and
download again
F0.6 = 1 Module Change Error -

Resupply Power
F0.7 = 1 Module Error -

Resupply Power
Are any
No of the bits from
F0.0 to F0.7 in the
ON state?
Yes K Register Error -

Is bit F1.7 Clear K registers, or
in the ON state? Resupply Power
No
No Is bit F1.7
in the ON state?
Yes Yes
Is the ERR LED
illuminated?
No
Go to the System Replace the controller

Check flowchart
I/O Check
This page presents an example of a troubleshooting procedure to follow when errors are encountered
with the external I/O. In this example, two of the inputs on the controller are used to control an output
on the controller. This flow chart is based on the following circuit, and assumes that the error
encountered is that the output connected to R15.0 is not turned On when it should be.
R0.2 R0.3 R15.0

(OUT)
Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection Tables

The following tables list some common problems and troubleshooting procedures for the PLC system
in the event of faulty operation. Additionally, a table is provided which covers the routine maintenance
procedures to be followed to ensure long life of the PLC system with minimum downtime and
maintenance cost.
System Operation
Symptom Expected Cause Troubleshooting

Run LED will not illuminate. Program errors Correct the program.
Power line defect Replace the CPU module.
Output will not turn to On state during Run. Short or open circuit Replace the CPU module.
I/O Modules above a certain address will not operate. I/O bus error Check I/O expander cable.
Not all points on an I/O module operate properly. I/O bus error Check I/O expander cable.
Digital Inputs

No inputs on the module will No external input power Supply power.
turn On (LEDs are not Low external input voltage Make sure full voltage is being
illuminated).
supplied.
Terminal screw is loose/ Tighten screw/
Defective contact Reconnect the module
Inputs will not turn to On state Defective input circuit Replace the module.
(LEDs are illuminated).
One or more inputs on an I/O Device connected to input module is Replace the input device.
module will not turn On. defective.
Loose input wiring Reconnect the input wiring.
External input time is too short. Adjust the input device.
Defective contact Reconnect module
One or more inputs on an I/O Defective input circuit Replace the module.
module will not turn Off.
Input changes On/Off state Low external input voltage Make sure full supply voltage is being
erratically. input.
Noise error Troubleshoot for noise.
Input display LED will not LED error Replace the module.
illuminate (input is On in PLC).
Digital Outputs

No outputs on the module will No external input power Supply power.
turn On. Low external input voltage Make sure full voltage is being
supplied.
I/O contact connection Replace the module.
Defective output circuit Reconnect the module.
One or more outputs on an I/O Output circuit error Replace the module.
module will not change to On
or Off state.
Output on an I/O module will Output time too short Correct the program.
not turn Off (LED is not Defective output circuit Replace the module.
illuminated).
Output on an I/O module will Incorrect output load Replace the output load.
not turn Off (LED is Loose output wiring Reconnect the output wiring.
illuminated).
Output contact error Replace the module of the relay.
Defective output circuit Replace the module.
Output on an I/O module will Output contact error Replace the module of the relay.
not turn On (LED is Leakage current to low-current load Apply leakage current protection
illuminated).
Output on an I/O module will Defective output circuit Replace the module.
not turn On (LED is not
illuminated).
Output changes On/Off state Low external input voltage Make sure full supply voltage is being
erratically. input.
Noise error Troubleshoot for noise.
Terminal screw loose/ Tighten screw/
All outputs on a module with Common terminal screw loose Tighten the screw.
the same common operate Defective contact/ Reconnect the module.
incorrectly or identically. Terminal connector
CPU module error Replace the CPU module.
Output display LED is not on LED error Replace the module.
(output is On to field device).
Periodic Inspection and Preventive Maintenance

The D50 PLC Series requires regular inspection and maintenance for proper operation. The following
items should be checked every six months.
Item What to Check Criteria Test

Equipment
Supplied Does the voltage measured within the Voltage must fall within the power Voltmeter
Power power terminal fall within the module input voltage specifications.
specified range?
Environment Does the temperature fall within the 0 to 55°C (32 to 131°F) Thermometer
specified range?
Does the humidity fall within the Humidity levels below 20% RH. Hygrometer
specified range?
Is there any dust present? No dust. Visual
I/O Power Does the control voltage supplied to Control voltage must fall within the Voltmeter
the I/O modules fall within the input and output modules
specified limit? specifications.
Module Are all of the modules secure? All should be firmly secured. Screwdriver
Mounting and Is the connection cable secure?
Wiring
Is the external wiring screw loose?
Troubleshooting Noise Problems
This chapter outlines the various causes of noise that affect the D50 PLC system. Installation tips and
troubleshooting methods for identifying noise problems are also provided.
• The causes of noise

• Installation tips for avoiding noise
• Methods to identify and resolve noise problems
Noise Occurrence
Types of Noise
• Radiation noise is transmitted in the form of a magnetic wave. The amplitude of the magnetic
wave is measured in Gauss.
• Conduction noise is transmitted through a direct path such as signal wiring or ground
connections as a strong, high-voltage surge. This type of noise is measured as voltage,
current, or power.
• Normal mode (single ended developed) noise can come through the power and/or the signal
cables. This type of noise is not equally distributed across the PLC input terminals.
• Common mode noise can come through the power and/or the signal cables. In this case the
noise is close to the same amplitude thus the term common on both leads of the cable.
• Impulse noise is electrical or magnetic energy that has less than a 200 msec pulse duration.
• Surge noise is electrical energy that has a pulse duration of 200 msec to 2 sec.
• Transient noise is electrical energy that has an extremely short duration usually lasting only a
few nanoseconds (1 x 10-9).
Electrical Noise Fundamental Definitions
• Isolation means to physically separate the connection between areas. Isolation is effective for
common mode noise.
• Filters are effective against conduction noise such as impulses. Filtering is used to remove
normal mode noise and common mode noise that has been imprinted onto the signal or power
cables. A low-pass filter passes only low frequency signals. Low-pass filters are classified as
either LC (L = inductor and C = capacitor) filters or RC (R = resistor and C = capacitor)
filters, according to the electrical parts that form the filter.
• Surge absorbers are devices that protect electronic equipment by clamping down extremely
high voltage spikes (lightning strikes) in power cables to a safe level.
• Charge is an excess or deficiency of electrons in an object. When an object becomes charged,
a magnetic field forms around the object and can radiate noise as the amplitude of the charge
is varied.
• An inductive load is a device which creates a large magnetic field that opposes any change in
the voltage applied across the device. Devices that act as inductive loads are relay coils, motor
coils, starter coils and actuator coils.
• Stray capacitance and inductance is created during the installation of an electrical system.
When excess cabling is left wound up this creates stray inductance in the form of a coil. All
cabling inherently has a capacitive rating (so many picofarads per meter). Excessively long
cable runs or untrimmed cable lengths or poorly specified cable types can add large levels of
stray capacitance.
Sources of Noise
There are three main sources of noise. Some of these sources generate large noise amplitudes. The
occurrence time can be very short (impulse type) or continuous (power line induced). Some noise
levels can damage the D50 PLC components and peripheral devices.
1. Noise Generated by Electronic Equipment

All electronic devices radiate noise in the form of a magnetic field. The magnetic field is
created around the printed circuit board or the wiring of electronic devices due to the flow of
electrical current. The amplitude of the magnetic field changes over time due to changes in
the flow of the electrical current. The magnetic field strength increases as the amount of the
electrical current flow increases.
As a device crosses the magnetic field, electrical currents will be induced. The induced
current could be summed vectorially with the normal electrical currents. In some cases this
could cause cancellation of electrical current flow (essentially shutting down the circuit). In
other cases this could create large surge currents that cause severe damage to the circuit. In
most cases the summation of the currents cause errors in readout and control values. Some
sources of this kind of noise are relays, magnetic contactors, inverters, computer monitors,
and motors.
2. Noise from Power Cables
When various loads are connected to a single power source the current draw conditions and
impedance imbalance can cause unwanted noise. The noise created by these sources can
affect other devices connected to the power source, via spikes, sags, reflected high speed
switching noise, and ground pulse. This is the most frequent cause of noise in a PLC’s
environment.
3. Noise from Natural Causes and Work Practices
Lightning, welding, shared cable trays, “grandfather’d plant wiring,” and static electricity can
also be sources of noise.
In the first case, the noise is caused within the equipment and is called internal noise. In the second
case, the noise is caused by external factors and referred to as external noise. These two types of noise
may also be referred to as artificial system noise.
The noise caused by natural occurrences can not be prevented, but can be controlled. Precautions such
as good grounding techniques, surge suppressors, and burying cables underground can help minimize
the affect. This type of noise may be referred to as natural noise.
Advised Installation Practices
Shield the PLC

The most common method of shielding, is to install the PLC inside a grounded steel enclosure.
Proper Cable Selection

Use twisted, shielded-pair cable for the power cable and field wiring. Properly terminate the shields of
all cables to a single-point high-quality ground. (See section on shielding.)
Ground the PLC

The purpose of grounding the PLC is to protect the electronic equipment from electric shock and
harmful noise.
To ground the PLC, connect a 12 to 16 gauge wire from the frame ground terminal strip screw of the
controller to a high quality earth ground (less then 2 Ω). Since electrical currents always take the path
of least resistance, the noise currents induced by a magnetic field will flow through the PLC frame
ground terminal screw to earth ground. This essentially draws the noise away from the PLC modules.
The most effective method of grounding the PLC frame is to ground the PLC independent of other
equipment. Avoid grounding the PLC through a daisy chain of wire connections with other equipment.
See figures below for good and bad examples:
PLC Others PLC Others PLC Others
The length of the ground cable should not exceed 65 feet (20 m). For best results, the resistance of the
ground cable should be less than 2 Ω.
Isolation and Filtering Techniques
Isolation
There are several methods of isolation:
• Attach an isolation transformer between the PLC power supply and the VAC source to help
remove noise that flows in the power cable. Try to attach the isolation transformer as near to
the PLC power supply input terminal strip as possible.
• Some isolation transformers come with a shield that can be grounded. This shield, when
properly grounded, enhances the transformers ability to remove unwanted spikes.
• Be certain to size the isolation transformer to handle the necessary power rating required by
the system. A good practical rule in specifying an isolation transformer is to multiply the
required load capability by 1.35 (35% additional deliverable power). This allows expansion of
the PLC system at a later date without the immediate need to upgrade the isolation
transformer.
Isolation
I Transformer PLC
AC power AC input
Ground
terminal
Triple ground (Less than 2 Ω of

ground resistance)
• When heavy noise is expected, also use an isolation transformer on the AC control power to
the I/O modules and devices. A cost-effective way of specifying the isolation transformer for
this requirement would be to specify a transformer with multiple primary and secondary
windings and wiring the PLC as shown below. Again, be certain to size the isolation
transformer to handle the necessary power required plus a 35% surplus and additional
windings to allow for future expansion of the system.
Breaker Breaker Isolation Transformer

PLC power
AC power
Load
PLC input
Filters
Filters should be used to suppress high frequency noise.
When using a low-pass filter specify one that is designed for power line applications. Many different
types are available from simple modules to complex units.
A single device is not necessarily the most cost-effective device for all applications. In specifying the
proper filter one must take into account the amplitude/power level of the noise and how often the noise
is present.
When the proper device is selected it is best to place the device as close to the PLC power supply
connections as possible. Below is an example of how to install a filter. The chart lists a typical
midrange power line filter for reference.
Filter PLC
AC power AC input
Ground
terminal
Triple ground (Less than 100 Ω

of ground resistance)
For installation and application details, refer to the manufacturers manuals.
Model Name Manufacturer Remarks

PQI-3120N12 Superior Electric, DANA/ Used for 120 V power
Warner Electric Division
PQI-3220N12 Superior Electric, DANA/ Used for 240 V power
Warner Electric Division
The PQI-3120N12 and PQI-3220N12 come in a NEMA 12 rated enclosure.
Methods of Handling Large Voltage Spikes Such as Lightning
Surge Absorber
• A surge absorber reduces the electrical shock to the PLC by taking high-voltage spikes to
ground. Attach a surge absorber in the power line in front of the PLC to prevent damage from
lightning. The surge absorber will clamp the unwanted high voltage and prevent it from
flowing to the PLC power supply. When specifying a surge absorber, the present wiring
system must be carefully reviewed. Some surge absorbers are designed to be placed into the
main power distribution panel while others are designed to be installed in the field close to the
PLC. It is always best to place the surge absorber as close to the PLC as possible.
• Surge absorbers can consist of either series resistors with capacitors that will couple the spike
to ground, or Zener diodes that safely clamp the high voltage spikes or MOVs (Metal Oxide
Varistors). Some surge absorbers will need replacement after they have suppressed a spike
(similar to a fuse). Others can be reset. In specifying a surge absorber consider how often the
surges are occurring and the maximum amplitude in volts or joules.
Main breaker PLC

Breaker Transformer
U
AC power AC input
V
Surge Absorber Ground

terminal
Special ground (Less than 2Ω Triple ground (Less than 2Ω

of ground resistance) of ground resistance)
It is needed to prevent high voltage
noise such as lightning
Some typical surge absorbers are listed in the following table. For actual installation and
application details, refer to manufacturers manuals.
Model Name Specifications Manufacturer Remarks

CHSA 470 V Cutler-Hammer 120/240 V power
CHSA01 490 V Cutler-Hammer 120/240 V power
Burying Wire
• Cabling that is strung from pole to pole in free space is an antenna for lightning. When
possible bury the cable underground. The earth acts like a shield and absorbs most if not all of
the lightning induced noise signals before they are able to reach the cable.
Shielding Cabling
• When the wiring for the I/O module is more than 165 ft (50 m), shield the wire by installing it
in ferrous (steel) conduit and use shielded wire. Attach the conduit/shield to the ground at the
PLC ground terminal as shown below.
PLC
In
COM
Ground
terminal
Use shield wires,
or shield the wire Ground (ground resistance
less than 2 Ω)
• Separate the input and output module wiring, and power circuit cables. Make sure to properly
ground the shields of each cable directly to ground. Do not create a daisy chain of ground
jumpers over several feet and then pigtail one end lead to ground. This method allows
multiple ground current paths to exist and can induce noise.
Methods to Handle I/O Inductive Loads

Several methods exist for handling I/O inductive loads.
DC Input Module
Attach a diode in a reverse biased direction parallel to the inductive load, as close as possible to the
load.
DC input module
IN
Inductive Flywheel
load diode
DC power COM
AC Input Module
Attach an RC network parallel to the inductive load.
AC input module
IN
Inductive
R
load
C
COM
Handling Long Cable Runs

When a long cable run is needed to attach the AC input module to an external input device attach a
surge suppressor parallel to the input module. When possible, convert the application so a DC input
module can be used instead of the AC input module. The input circuitry of DC input modules
inherently have filters that suppress noise and therefore are less affected by the noise from inductive
loads and stray wiring capacitance.
AC input module
IN
wiring is long
R
C RIN
COM
In case of AC power
Protecting Against Arcing

When a relay output module switches an inductive load, a surge voltage measured in thousands of
volts is generated across the relay contacts. This causes arcing (an electrical discharge between two
contact points that can vaporize the contact material) and shortens the contact life of the relay.
Eventually this arcing can destroy the relay contacts. Below is a chart of some methods to protect the
relay contacts.
Countermeasures Application Characteristics Selection of Parts

AC DC
Load Load
Attach a surge If the load is a relay or a solenoid, For a contact voltage of 1 V and a
suppressor: the load is slow to return to the contact current of 1 A, use the
Relay output normal status. When using a DC following C and R values:
Inductive load module
OUT power source, place the surge C: 0.5-1.0 µF
suppressor across the inductive
load. R: 0.5-1.0 Ω
When using an AC power source, Another example; for a contact
COM
place the surge suppressor across current of 0.5 A and a contact
the switching relay contacts. voltage of 200 VAC use the
following C and R values:
C: 0.25-0.5 µF
The example shows how to connect
the surge suppressor for a DC R: 100-200 Ω
power source For DC circuits use a minimum of a
250 V rated capacitor. For AC
circuits use a minimum of a 1000 V
rated capacitor.
Attach a flyback × The diode connected in parallel Use diodes with low reverse
diode: allows the energy accumulated in leakage current and with a reverse
Relay output
the inductive load to flow back into voltage value that is at least three
Inductive load module the inductive load in the form of an times greater than the nominal
OUT
electrical current. The energy is applied voltage. Verify the diode
then dissipated as heat based on has the proper power rating.
the resistance of the inductive load. The steady state current that flows
COM
The time required to return to the when the inductive load is turned on
normal status is longer than the should be greater than the current
surge suppressor method. produced when the inductive load is
turned off.
Attach a varistor: A varistor functions as a voltage To specify the varistor do the
Relay output clamping device. When the applied following:
Inductive load module
OUT
voltage exceeds the rated voltage Chose a maximum continuous
value of the varistor, the varistor voltage rating just above the
turns on, creating a short circuit expected applied voltage.
connection across the inductive
COM load. Chose a varistor that can handle
the energy level that will be
This method has a slow recovery generated by the inductive load
time. BUT avoid overspecifying. As the
When using a DC power source, varistors energy level capability
place the varistor across the goes up so does the capacitance
inductive load. which will slow down the response
When using an AC power source, time of the system.
place the varistor across the
switching relay contacts.
Warning
The following two protection methods should be avoided. Each of these methods can be effective in
removing the sparks when power to the inductive load is turned off. However when power is turned on
to the inductive load there will be a high inrush current applied across the relay contacts as they are
mating. Since all relay contacts have some bounce while mating, arcing will occur and potentially melt
the relay contact points. This is the reason for having the resistor in the RC network described earlier.
Inductive load
Inductive load
OUT OUT
C C
Power
Power
COM
COM
• Transistor Output Module—it is best to attach a flyback diode parallel to the inductive load,
as close as possible to the load. In this configuration output switching frequency should be
held to less than 20 times per minute.
Transistor output module

Inductive load
OUT
COM
• SSR Output Module—attach a surge suppressor parallel to the inductive load, as close as
possible to the load. In this configuration output switching frequency should be held to less
than 20 times per minute.
SSR output module

Inductive load
OUT
R C
COM
Troubleshooting
• Noise from magnetic fields induced by other electrical/electronic equipment onto the PLC can
be avoided by relocating the PLC during the design process, installing the PLC in a grounded
steel enclosure, or attaching a filtering or suppression shield/circuit to the device which is
generating the magnetic field.
• Noise from power cables can be corrected by using a different ground for the PLC, an
isolation transformer, attaching a line/ground filter, or changing the power wire connection of
the PLC so that it is closer to the source of the power, therefore lowering the power source
impedance.
• Noise from lightning should be suppressed by use of surge suppressors that are specifically
designed to protect electronic equipment from lightning.
• Whenever welding near an electronic device, care must be used to avoid connecting the
ground cable of the welder to a ground of the electronic device. One method of protecting the
PLC is to disconnect the PLC from power and lifting all power and ground connection. An
alternate method is to establish two separate grounds, one for electronic equipment and one
for welding. Test the ground separation carefully before having electronic equipment up and
running while welding.
• The quickest way to avoid noise from shared cable trays is to have two cable tray runs. One
for power and power control cabling and the other for electronic equipment and low level
control wiring. Proper cable selection with good shielding properties in some instances will
allow both types of cabling/wiring to co-exist in the same tray system.
• “Grandfather’d” plant wiring has to be analyzed on a case by case basis. The best approach is
to always install new cabling, conduit, and cable tray runs. Though this may not always be
practical, it removes the surprise of high noise and system problems during system startup.
• Static electricity suppression requires good grounding practices throughout the plant. Static
electricity is a potential difference developed on a material surface due to the loss of protons
or electrons. Since rubbing action can cause the build up of static electricity, the best
protection is to have the electronic equipment enclosed in a grounded housing that requires
the user to first make contact with a safe discharge path. In high static environments like
styrofoam manufacturing or glass manufacturing, electronic equipment should always be
protected from static electricity.
Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication

Protocol
The D50 PLC communication protocol provides a simple, yet complete method of communications
between the Cutler-Hammer program loader software (GPC) and the PLC. Using the open protocol
outlined in this appendix, the user can quickly and easily expand the capabilities of the overall PLC
system by communicating to the PLC using a variety of peripheral communications equipment such as
operator interfaces and computers. Additionally, the communications protocol allows for multiple
Cutler-Hammer D50, D300, and D320 PLC’s to communicate to a central computer on a single
network using RS-485, at distances of up to 4000 ft (1.2 km).
Communication Rules
Communication Environment
The D50 PLC communications protocol uses the following settings:
• Half Duplex Asynchronous

• No Parity
• 1 Stop bit
• Communication method: RS485
• Communication speed: 9600 bps
• Number of PLCs on a single network: Maximum of 32 (communicating 1:N using RS485)
• Maximum communication delay time: 3 sec
Communication Protocol
Query (Q)
Step 1
Set the network ID number for the PLC to communicate with and send a Q signal from the peripheral
device to the PLC.
Query Acknowledge (QA)

Step 2
A QA signal is sent from the PLC to the peripheral device, indicating that the Q signal from the
peripheral device was received.
Response Request (RR)

Step 3
An RR signal goes from the peripheral device to the PLC, indicating that the QA signal from the PLC
was received, and requesting the final data response. This signal is sent when Q→QA is normal.
Response (R)
Step 4
When the PLC receives the RR from the peripheral device, it sends an R signal which gives the results
of the original Q signal sent by the peripheral device. The communication cycle for one function code
ends when the PLC sends the R.
Repeated Response
Step 5
Once the original Q has been sent to the D50 PLC, the R message containing the requested data for
that query can be repeatedly received by sending only the RR message again.
Communications Delay
The D50 PLC will return a signal after receiving a Q or an RR within a specific time. However, due to
errors in the communications network, CRC values, and communication speed flux, there are
occasions when the PLC will not receive the signal from the peripheral device. The peripheral device
should allow up to three seconds for a response from the PLC. If there are no responses to the Q or the
RR message, the communication is considered to have failed, and the Q or RR should be sent again.
Example
1. No communication error.
For the internal processing of the PLC CPU
send RR at least 5 msec after receiving QA.
Peripheral device
Q QA RR R
PLC
2. When QA is not received.
3 sec
Peripheral device
Q Q QA RR R
PLC
3. When R is not received.

3 sec
Peripheral device
Q QA RR RR R
PLC
4. Repeated Response communications.
Peripheral device
Q QA RR R RR R
PLC
CPU ID
All devices connected to the network need a network ID number for communication. There is an
available range of 0 to 191 network ID numbers. Redundancy is not permitted. When a single PLC and
a peripheral device are connected, usually 0, 1, or 255 is assigned as the network ID number to the
PLC. When the peripheral device wishes to communicate to a connected PLC regardless of its
programmed network ID number, it can use global network ID number 255, to which any PLC will
respond. When several CPU modules are connected to one communication network, they must use
individual ID numbers from 0 to 191. The PLC’s network ID number is configured using the GPC
program loader software.
Function Codes Included in the Query
• Each function code is 1 byte. When the PLC receives a query (Q), the function code of the
final response (R) is formed by adding $80 (hex) to the function code sent by the query.
• The function code of the R message can be used by the peripheral device to verify that the
correct Q message has been received by the PLC.
Communication function
* $ notes hexadecimal notations
Communication Function Query Function Code Response Function Code

Read Bits $01 $81
Write Bits $02 $82
Read Words $03 $83
Write Words $04 $84
Read Bits and Words $05 $85
Write Bits and Words $06 $86
Read Program $07 $87
Write Program $08 $88
Read Instruction $09 $89
Change Instruction $0A $8A
Change Parameter $0B $8B
Insert Instruction $0C $8C
Delete Instruction $0D $8D
Find Instruction $0E $8E
Find Parameter $0F $8F
Delete Section $10 $90
No Service $00 $00
Note: Function codes $07 to $10 are used for programming and system control functions, and are
beyond the scope of this manual. Please contact Cutler-Hammer technical support for more
information.
Note: The bit/word address assignment uses the absolute address method for reading memory
locations. (See Chapter 5 for memory map.)
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)
• The CRC is a 2-byte checksum that is calculated from the data of every message and then
attached to the end of the message by the sender. It is used as an error-checking device to
prevent loss or corruption of data during transmission of the message.
• The sender of the message calculates and attaches the CRC when it generates and sends the
message. The receiver should also calculate the CRC from the data of the message and
compare the calculated value to the CRC that was sent. If the calculated CRC does not match
the CRC received, an error has occurred in the message during transmission.
CRC Calculation Range
DA SA Function Length Information CRC L CRC H
CRC Calculation Range 2 Bytes
The following subroutines illustrate the program code required to calculate the CRC for a message.
The initial value of the CRC (CRC_Sum) is set to 65535 ($FFFF). Then one of these subroutines
would be called once for each byte (data) of the CRC calculation range shown above.
CRC-16 Calculation Subroutine (BASIC)

CRC_Sum: CRC-16 reserve code after the calculation (CRC content to be sent at end of message)
Data: CRC-16 Data input to be calculated (Byte Data from message)
1000 CRC_Sum = CRC_Sum XOR Data
1010 FOR I=1 to 8
1020 CARRY=CRC_Sum AND 1
1030 CRC_Sum=CRC_Sum SHR 1
1040 IF CARRY=1 THEN CRC_Sum XOR 0A001H
1050 NEXT I
1060 RETURN
CRC-16 Calculation Subroutine (PASCAL)

Procedure CRC16(Data : Byte)
Var i : Byte;
Begin
CRC_Sum := CRC_Sum x or Data;
for i : 1 to 8 do
begin
if((CRC_Sum and 1)=1) then CRC_Sum := (CRC_Sum shr 1) xor $A001;
else CRC_Sum := CRC_Sum shr 1;
end;
End;
CRC-16 Calculation Subroutine (C)

void Crc16(unsigned int Data) {
unsigned int i;
Crc=Crc^(Data & 0x00FF);
for(i=0;i<=7;I++) {
if((Crc & 0x0001) == 0x0001) Crc=(Crc>>1)^0xA001;
else Crc=Crc>>1;
}
}
The Structure of the Communications Frame
Query and Response Frame
DA SA FC Length Information CRC L CRC H
Length of the
information field (byte) CRC-16 code
1-255:1-255 byte (2 byte)
0:256 byte
Function Code
Sender ID Number
Receiver ID Number
The frame is sent from the source address (SA) by the sender to the destination address (DA), the
receiving device. For the query (Q) and the response request (RR), the SA is the address of the
peripheral device, and the DA is the address of the PLC to which the message is being sent. For the
query answer (QA) and the response (R), the PLC becomes the sender of the message, and so the PLC
address is the SA and the peripheral device’s address is the DA.
Query Acknowledge Frame
DA SA $80 01 00 CRC L CRC H
Constant
Response Request Frame
DA SA $00 01 00 CRC L CRC H
Constant
Response Frame for an Error
DA SA $8X 01 Error CRC L CRC H
Error #1 Wrong communication

function code
Error #2 Out of range
Error #3 Wrong frame structure
Error #4 CPU did not perform
Error #5 Frame too long
Read Bits
The following can be read:
• Bits stored in the absolute address (R, L, M, K, or F).

• N consecutive bit contents (On/Off).
Query (Q) frame
Base CRC
DA SA $01 $03 L H N L H
Length of Number of bits to be read

information (bit)
Absolute bit address
Function Code (address of first bit to read)
For example:
K12.12 (address K12’s 12th bit)
Peripheral Device Absolute bit address = $14CC
ID (PC ID)
PLC ID (CPU ID)
Response (R) Frame
Base+0 Base+1 Base+N-1 CRC

DA SA $81 N Bit value Bit value … Bit value L C
Bits that are On are represented by the

one byte value $FF. Bits that are Off have
a value of $00.
Length of information (number of bytes)

from the length to the next CRC.
Response code ($80 added to the

original function code).
PLC ID (CPU ID) For the response, the PLC is the sender
and the PC the receiver, so the DA and SA
Peripheral Device ID (PC ID) are reversed from the Q message.
Write Bits
Writing bits allows you to:
• Modify the contents of the bits stored in the absolute address (R, L, M, K, or F).
• Change the bit state between On/Off.
• Change multiple consecutive bytes.
Query (Q) Frame
Base
BASE Base+0
BASE Base+1
+0 BASE +1 Base+N-3
BASE+N-3 CRC
CRC
DA SA $02 N L H Bit value Bit value .… Bit value L H
To turn On the desired bit value from the base,

enter $FF. To change to Off, enter $00.
Absolute bit address (starting address)
Response (R) Frame
CRC
DA SA $82 $01 $00 L H
Fixed Completion Code

Read Words
• Read the content of the words (R, L, M, K, F, or W) assigned to the absolute address.
• Read n consecutive words.
Query (Q) Frame
Base CRC
DA SA $03 $03 L H N L H
Number of words
to be read.
Word absolute address

(starting address)
For example: K27
Word absolute address = $014C
Base L = $4C, H = $01
Response (R) Frame
Base + 0 Base + word value Base + N word values CRC

DA SA $83 L L H L H … L H L H
N word values from the base

words requested by the Q.
Length L = N×2
Write Words
• Changes the content of the words assigned to the absolute address (R, L, M, K, F, or W).
• Can change n consecutive word contents.
Query (Q) Frame
Base Base+0 word values Base+N word values CRC

N word values from the base

words requested by the Q
Length L = N×2+2
Response (R) Frame
CRC
DA SA $84 $01 $00 L H
Fixed
Read Bits and Words
• Reads the bits and/or word contents of the specified absolute addresses.
• Can read bits and words regardless of their order and location in memory.
Query (Q) Frame
AO A1 AN CRC
Methods of assigning bit/word abs. address Assigning absolute address for bits
15 14 13 0 Abs. address for the K12 12th bit = $14CC
Ax = 0001 0100 1100 1100
Absolute Address Ax L = $CC, H = $14
Assigning absolute address for word
0 0 Bit Address Abs. address for the K12 word = $014C
0 1 Word Address Ax = 0100 0001 0100 1100
1 x Not Used Ax L = $4C, H = $41
Ax = A0, A1,…, An Dx = D0, D1,…, Dn
Response (R) Frame
D1 Dn CRC
DA SA $85 Lx DO L H … L H L H
For the A0, A1,…, An requested by the Q, the content D0, D1,…, Dn of
the word/bit is returned.
If Ax denotes a bit address, the Dx data is 1 byte (On = $FF, Off = $00),
The size and location of the and if Ax denotes a word address, the Dx data is 1 word (2 bytes).
returned data depends on the
combination of bit/word
addresses requested. The Lx
parameter should be checked to
verify data size.
Write Bits and Words
• Changes the content of the bits or words at the specified absolute addresses.
• Words and bits may be modified regardless of their order and location in memory.
Query (Q) Frame
A0 A1 CRC
DA SA $06 L L H D0 L H D0 … L H
Methods of assigning bit/word absolute address

Assigning abs. address for bits
15 14 13 0 Ax = 0001 0100 1100 1100
Absolute Address Ax L = $CC, H = $14
When structuring the Assigning abs. address for word
outgoing frame, be aware 0 0 Bit Address Abs. address for the K12 word = $014C
that the Dx of the Q 0 1 Word Address Ax = 0100 0001 0100 1100
changes according to the 1 x Not Used Ax L = $4C, H = $41
bit/word Ax type, and the L
(information length)
changes as well. The Dx If Ax denotes a bit address, the Dx data is 1 byte (On = $FF, Off = $00),
will be either 1 or 2 bytes. and if Ax denotes a word address, the Dx data is 1 word (2 bytes).
Response (R) Frame
CRC
DA SA $86 $01 $00 L H
Fixed
Communication Program Example

The following program is an example program written in C code to demonstrate the D50 PLC open
communications protocol. This program consists of a header, the main program, and various
subroutines. The buffers and a few variables needed to store the communication data are set as global
variables, so that the main function and the various functions may have access. Notes are provided
alongside the main program to help explain the exact purpose and function of the individual parts of
the program. This particular program was written for the Cutler-Hammer D320 PLC, and so uses
register addresses beyond the D50 limits. For use with a D50, adjust the register addresses used in this
program (M000 to M127 and K000 to K127) to within the D50 range.
Note: This program is provided for illustrative purposes only. It is left to the responsibility of the
user/programmer to ensure that any programs written based on, and using the information
contained in this program, satisfy the requirements of their particular application.
Program Notes
#include <stdio.h> This program was written in Borland
#include <stdlib.h> C++. It uses the peripheral device
#include <dos.h> (PC) to read the M000 to M127
#include <conio.h> words, and stores them in the K000 to
K127, and then compares the two
registry values and indicates the
#define PC_ID 0xE2 results on the screen using the OK or
#define Time_limit 28 the FAIL notation. The user may read
#define retrial_limit 2 or manipulate the various
#define TRUE 1 communication function codes and
#define FALSE 0 the information sent to control the
#define lower_byte(x) (unsigned int) ((x)& 0x00FF) PLC in various ways.
#define upper_byte(x) (unsigned int) (((x)& 0xFF00)>>8)
This program consists of a header, the
main program and various functions.
typedef int BOOL; The buffers and variables needed to
unsigned int PORTADD,DIVISOR,sending_delay, receiving_delay; store the communication data are set
unsigned int sending_frame[262],receiving_frame[262]; as global variables, so that the main
unsigned int Crc; and various other functions may
unsigned int card,i,ix,iy,smode; reference them.
unsigned int port_number;
unsigned int PlcID,OldID; By using the COM1 and COM2 ports
BOOL Success; of the computer, serial
unsigned int data,JobID,retrialC; communication is possible. By using
unsigned int Old,New,receiving_Index_max,sending_Index_max,index,watchdog; the GPU-300 card, parallel
unsigned int M[128],K[128]; /* Example Register */ communication is also enabled
(NOTE: The GPU-300 card is not
currently offered by Cutler-Hammer).
void RR_occurring(void); The Qs, QAs, RRs, Rs are handled in

void Trsport(unsigned int); the job functions. If there are
unsigned int Recport(void); communication errors or a frame
BOOL sending_occurring(void); breakdown, retry 3 times, then issue a
BOOL receiving_occurring(void); communication error.
void Crc16(unsigned int);
void Job(void); The procedure of the communication,
unsigned int communication(void); according to the JobID is:
void Mword_reading(void); 1. Q sending
void Kword_writing(void); 2. QA receiving
3. RR sending
4. R receiving
When an error occurs in a frame, a
retransmission should be made.
Major operations of the program

1. Adjusts the initial communication

port and the board rate for
communication. Then initializes the
variables.
2. Using the communication function
codes, reads the data of the M field,
reads the word values of the M0 to
M127 area and stores them in the K0
to K127 word area. The K registers
are the retentive registers.
3. Uses the communication code to
read the data of the K area.
4. Compares the values of the M area
and the values of the K area, and
indicates OK when the values are the
same.
void main(void)
{
unsigned int i;
/* Selection of communication port */
clrscr();
printf("PORT : COM1[1]/ COM[2]/ GPC-232[3]/GPC-485[4]/ GPC-Parallel[5] = "); Beginning of the main program
scanf("%d",&port_number); Select the port of the peripheral
if ((port_number < 1) || (port_number > 5)) port_number=5; device for the communication:
/* Selection of Baudrate for Serial communication */ Serial 9 PIN, 25PIN
sending_delay=10; Parallel GPU-300 parallel
if (port_number != 5) port
{
printf("GPC «å BAUD-RATE : 9600[1]/ 4800[2]/ 2400[3] = "); Select board rate:
scanf("%d",&i); 9600 bps (max)
if ((i < 1) || (i > 3)) i=1; 4800 bps
if (i == 3) i=4; 2400 bps
if ((port_number == 1) || (port_number == 2)) DIVISOR=12 * i; Set the communication environment
else DIVISOR=40 * i; (delay time) for the selected ports.
receiving_delay=3 * i + 1;
}
/* Initialization of GPC card */ GPC-300 card Setting (8255chip

if(port_number == 1) PORTADD=0x3F0; setting):
if(port_number == 2) PORTADD=0x2F0; Uses the communication card that is
if ((port_number >= 3) && (port_number <=5)) connected, and sets the environment
{ according to the PLC communication
PORTADD=0x300; spec., so that communication is
outportb(0x303,0xC0);/* Mode=2 of 8255 */ possible. Not currently offered by
outportb(0x303,0x05);/* PC2=1 of 8255 :Disable IRQ2 */ Cutler Hammer.
outportb(0x301,0xFF);/* PB0=1 of 8255 :sending Enable RS-485*/
outportb(0x303,0x01);/* PC0=1 of 8255 :Serial Input Enable*/
if(port_number == 3) outportb(0x303,0x02);/* PC1=0 of 8255 :Select RS-232 */
if(port_number == 4) outportb(0x303,0x03);/* PC1=1 of 8255 :Select RS-485 */
if(port_number == 5) outportb(0x303,0x00);/* PC0=0 of 8255 :Disable SerialInput*/
}
else outportb(PORTADD+0x09,(inportb(PORTADD+0x09)&0xF0));/*Disable
Interrupt*/
/* Initialization of USART-Chip : 8250 */
if (port_number != 5)
{
outportb(PORTADD+0x0B,0x80);/* Set of DLAB=1 */
outportb(PORTADD+0x09,0x00);/* Set of High Byte DIVISOR */
outportb(PORTADD+0x08,DIVISOR);/* Set of Low Byte DIVISOR */
outportb(PORTADD+0x0B,0x03); /* parity=None/Stop=1/ Length=8 */
}
/* Processing communication of Read & Write */
for( ; ; )
{
printf("----------------\nPLC-ID (CPU ID) :"); CPU-ID: Input PLC ID (0 to 255)

scanf("%d",&PlcID);
if(PlcID<256)
{
Mword_reading(); Read the register value for the M area
Kword_writing(); (M0 to M127)
} Store the value for the M area in the
else K area (K0 to K127)
exit(0);
}
}
void RR_occurring(void) RR (Request Response) request
{ function.
receiving_frame[2]=0;
}
void Trsport(unsigned int data) Sends data to the communication
{ port.
if (port_number == 5) outportb(PORTADD,data);
else outportb(PORTADD+0x08,data);
}
unsigned int Recport(void) Reads the received data from the
{ communication port.
unsigned int dt;
if (port_number == 5) dt=inportb(PORTADD);
else dt=inportb(PORTADD+0x08);
return(dt);
}
BOOL sending_occurring(void) Outputs the data when a send event
{ occurs.
BOOL tf;
if (port_number == 5) tf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x02) & 0x80)==0x80);
else tf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x0D) & 0x20)==0x20);
return(tf);
}
BOOL receiving_occurring(void) Inputs the data when a Receive event
{ occurs.
BOOL rf;
if (port_number == 5) rf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x02) & 0x20)==0x20);
else rf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x0D) & 0x01)==0x01);
return(rf);
}
void Crc16(unsigned int data) CRC Calculation:
{ Encodes the communication data in
unsigned int i; the byte stream. When one
Crc=Crc^(data & 0x00FF); communication function is complete,
for(i=0;i<=7;i++) it is attached to the most recent frame,
{ or is compared with the attached CRC
if((Crc & 0x0001) == 0x0001) Crc=(Crc>>1)^0xA001; /* 0x0001 : mult-nominal to check for data errors.
expression */
else Crc=Crc>>1;
}
}
void Job(void) Communication sequence

functions:
{
/* JobID=0 : Change to sending-Mode for Serial port */
Job ID=0~4 Q,QA Frame handling
/* JobID=1 : Transmit sending-Frame */
Job ID=5~9 RA,R Frame handling
/* JobID=2 : Change to receiving-Mode for Serial port */
/* JobID=3 : Address Polling of ACK from CPU */
/* JobID=4 : Receive ACK from CPU */
/* JobID=5 : Change to sending-Mode for Serial port */
/* JobID=6 : Transmit RR-Frame */
/* JobID=7 : Change to receiving-Mode for Serial port */

/* JobID=8 : Address Polling of RES from CPU */
/* JobID=9 : Receive RES from CPU */
/* JobID=10 : Success communication Processing */
switch(JobID)
{
case 0: case 5:if (port_number != 5) JobID 0,5:
{ A frame sends the data from the
if (port_number == 4) outportb(0x301,0xFF); peripheral device to the PLC. It resets
else outportb(PORTADD+0x0C,(inportb(PORTADD+0x0C) | 0x02)); the watchdog and the CRC.
delay(sending_delay); Use a delay after the send to avoid
} errors due to communications delays.
if (JobID == 5) RR_occurring();
watchdog=0; index=0; sending_Index_max=5; Crc=0xFFFF; JobID++;
break;
case 1: case 6:if (receiving_occurring()) data=Recport(); JobID 1,6:
if (sending_occurring()) Sends the Q and RR data.
{ When there are no errors, it resets the
if (index<sending_Index_max-1) watchdog and proceeds on to the next
{ sequence.
Trsport(receiving_frame[index]);
Crc16(receiving_frame[index]);
if (index==3)
{
if (receiving_frame[3]==0) sending_Index_max=256+5;
else sending_Index_max=receiving_frame[3]+5;
}
}
else if (index==sending_Index_max-1)
{
receiving_frame[index]=lower_byte(Crc);
Trsport(receiving_frame[index]);
}
else if (index==sending_Index_max)
{
receiving_frame[index]=upper_byte(Crc);
Trsport(receiving_frame[index]); watchdog=0; JobID++;
}; index++;
}
break;
case 2: case 7:if (port_number != 5)
JobID=2,7:
{
A sequence that senses the sending of
delay(receiving_delay);
the QA and R data to the peripheral
if (port_number ==4) outportb(0x301,0x00);
device after the completion of the
else outportb(PORTADD+0x0C,(inportb(PORTADD+0x0C) & 0xFD));
functions that are received by the
}
PLC from the previous frame.
JobID++;
break;
case 3:
JobID=3,8:
case 8:if (receiving_occurring())
Handles the received data, and
{
calculates the CRC of the received
data=Recport();
data.
if(data==PC_ID)
{
Crc=0xFFFF; index=1; receiving_Index_max=5;
receiving_frame[0]=data; Crc16(data); JobID++;
}
}
break;
JobID=4,9:
case 4:
Stores the received data in the
case 9:if(receiving_occurring())
internal receivable buffer and
{
compares the CRC value sent by the
if(index<receiving_Index_max-1)
PLC to the calculated CRC value. It
{
notifies the system that a successful
receiving_frame[index]=Recport();
communication is made when the two
Crc16(receiving_frame[index]);
if(index==3) values match, and proceeds on to the

{ next sequence.
if(receiving_frame[3]==0) receiving_Index_max=256+5;
else receiving_Index_max=receiving_frame[3]+5;
}
}
else if(index==receiving_Index_max-1)
{
if(receiving_frame[index]!=lower_byte(Crc)) JobID=(JobID & 0x05);
}
else if(index==receiving_Index_max)
{
if(receiving_frame[index]==upper_byte(Crc)) JobID++;
else JobID=(JobID & 0x05);
}; index++;
}
break;
case 10:Success=TRUE; JobID=10:
} Receiving
}
unsigned int communication(void) If the frames that were sent have no

{ response within 3 seconds, assumes it
struct time t; failed communication, and retransfers
unsigned far *tm; the data.
int ret; The time from the sending and
Success=FALSE; receiving is counted using the
receiving_frame[0]=PlcID;receiving_frame[1]=PC_ID; retrialC=retrial_limit; watchdog timer. Reset the watchdog
watchdog=0; JobID=0; index=0; sending_Index_max=5; Crc=0xFFFF; timer when a retransfer is being
do made. No response after 3
{ retransmissions indicates a
tm=(unsigned far *) 0x046C; communication error. (Normal return
New=*tm; value = 0, Abnormal return value = 1)
Job();
if(watchdog>Time_limit)
{
watchdog=0; retrialC--;
JobID=(JobID & 0x05);
}
if(!(((Old^New) & 0x02)==0))
{
watchdog=watchdog+1;
Old=New;
}
}while((retrialC!=0) && (Success==FALSE));
if(retrialC==0) ret=1;
else ret=0;
return(ret);
}
void Mword_reading(void) Reading Function of the register M.
{ Uses the communication function
/* Example of Read-Register */ code number 3 (reading N
int i; consecutive words) to read the M
receiving_frame[2]=3;/* EXAMPLE READ WORD(M000-M0127) */ area.
receiving_frame[3]=3;/* Number Of Byte For Information = 3 */ Note:
receiving_frame[4]=0xC0;/* BASE(M000=$00c0) */ Sending frame[4] = The lower byte of
receiving_frame[5]=0;/* BASE HIGH */ the abs. address of the words to be
receiving_frame[6]=128;/* Number Of Byte M000-M127 */ read.
if(communication() == 0) Sending frame[5] = The upper byte of
{ the abs. address of the word to be
printf("READ M0000-M0127 OK - "); read.
for(i=0;i<=127;i++) M[i]=receiving_frame[i*2+4] +receiving_frame[i*2 +5]*256;
} Abs. address of the M0 = 0x0C0
else printf("communication error\n"); Note:

} Sending frame[6] = The number of
words to be read.
Sends a function code requesting to
read the M area, and stores the
received data in the buffer.
void Kword_writing(void) Writing Function of the K Register.

{ Uses the communication function
/* Example of Write-Register */ code 4 (writing N consecutive words)
int i; to store the specified value in the
receiving_frame[2]=4; /* EXAMPLE write WORD(K000-K063) */ K000 to K063 word.
receiving_frame[3]=130; /* Number Of Byte For Information */ Note:
receiving_frame[4]=0x40; /* BASE(K000=$0140) LOW */ Abs. address of K0 = 0x0140
receiving_frame[5]=1; /* BASE HIGH */
for(i=0;i<=63;i++)
{
receiving_frame[i*2 +6]= lower_byte(K[i]);
receiving_frame[i*2 +7]= upper_byte(K[i]);
}
if(communication() == 0) printf("WRITE K0000-K0063 OK\n");
else printf("communication error\n"); Writing Function of the K Register.
receiving_frame[2]=4; /* EXAMPLE write WORD(K064-K0127) */ Uses the communication function
receiving_frame[3]=130; /* Number Of Byte For Information */ code 4 (writing N consecutive words)
receiving_frame[4]=0x80; /* BASE(K000=$0180) LOW */ to store the specified value in the
receiving_frame[5]=1; /* BASE HIGH */ K064 to K127 word.
for(i=0;i<=63;i++) Note:
{ Abs. address of K64 = 0x0180
receiving_frame[i*2 +6]= lower_byte(K[i+64]);
receiving_frame[i*2 +7]= upper_byte(K[i+64]);
}
if(communication() == 0) printf("WRITE K0064-K0127 OK\n");
else printf("communication error\n");
}
Appendix B: Special I/O Functions
The D50 PLC provides several special functions through the I/O built into the D50 controller. This
appendix details the configuration and operation of the integrated special I/O functions, including the
high-speed counters, pulse output, pulse catch input, and selectable input response delay.
Overview
The D50 PLC provides several additional functions through the integrated I/O on the base unit. These
special I/O functions expand the capabilities of the D50 PLC to allow for use in a variety of specialized
applications. This appendix details those capabilities, and provides instructions on configuration,
application, programming, and operation of the special I/O. Four types of advanced operation are
available, as listed below.
Note: These special functions are only available on the controller units. They are not available
through any of the digital expansion modules, only on the base module.
High Speed Counter

The D50 PLC provides two separate high-speed counter inputs. Each counter accepts 2 phase inputs to
allow for up, down, up/down, quadrature, and ring count modes. The counters provide a 24-bit count
for signals up to 10kHz (5kHz in 2-phase mode).
Configurable Input Response Delay

The eight inputs on the base unit can be configured to delay their response to an input signal. By
programming a delay time on a digital input, input signals can be “de-bounced” to prevent false or
multiple input signals where not desired.
Pulse Catch Input

In certain applications it is necessary to be able to detect a very high-speed, short duration pulse input.
The Pulse Catch input will latch On for at least one scan any input signal of 150µsec or more.
Pulse Output
The D50 also provides one configurable output supporting two modes of pulse operation. The first
mode allows the user to send out a configurable number of pulses, at a desired frequency (Pulse
Mode). The second mode allows the user to set the output to continuous pulses at a given frequency,
with a configurable duty cycle (PWM Mode).
Special I/O Function Registers

To handle the requirements of configuration and operation of the special function I/O, the D50
provides 21 special I/O function registers. These registers are assigned to the various functions, and
are programmed and edited by the user in the D50 PLC ladder program. The purpose of each
individual register is outlined below.
Special I/O Function Registers
Register Register Special I/O Function Description

Address Name
R004 H0MODE Configuration register
R005 H0STRL Low word of the 24-bit start value
R006 H0STRH High word of the 24-bit start value
High-speed Counter
R007 H0ENDL Low word of the 24-bit end value
Channel 0
R008 H0ENDH High word of the 24-bit end value
R009 H0PVL Low word of the 24-bit present value
R010 H0PVH High word of the 24-bit present value
R011 PMODE Configuration register
R012 PFREQ Pulse frequency (20Hz to 5kHz)
Pulse Output
R013 PSV Pulse start value/PWM Duty cycle
R014 PPV Pulse present value
R019 H1MODE Configuration register
R020 H1STRL Low word of the 24-bit start value
R021 H1STRH High word of the 24-bit start value
High-speed Counter
R022 H1ENDL Low word of the 24-bit end value
Channel 1
R023 H1ENDH High word of the 24-bit end value
R024 H1PVL Low word of the 24-bit present value
R025 H1PVH High word of the 24-bit present value
R026 HFLAG High-speed Counter Comparison flags for both HSC channels
R027 FTIME Input Delay Delay time for digital inputs
R028 PCATCH Pulse Catch Configuration register for pulse catch inputs
High Speed Counter

The D50 PLC provides two 24-bit, 10kHz high-speed counters (on the DC-input units only). Each of
the two counters functions identically to the other. Each has a set of 7 registers allocated for its
configuration and operation, plus an additional comparision register that they share. High-speed
counter channel 0 uses registers R4 to R10, while channel 1 uses register R19 to R25. Register R26 is
a shared comparison register that is used by both channels. The purpose of each register is described
in greater detail below.
Register Descriptions
MODE (R004, R019)

The mode register is used to turn on the high-speed counter, configure which mode it will be operating
in, and enable or disable the inputs used by the counter. Each bit in the low byte of the MODE register
is used to turn On or Off a feature of the high-speed counter channel.
STR (R005/6, R020/21)

The STR registers are a pair of registers that the user places the START value for the counter channel
into. When the register is configured for Ring Count Mode, or when the counter is reset using the
Preset bit or the Preset input, the START value is loaded into the present value of the counter. Since
the counter is a 24-bit value, two registers are required – the first holds the low 16 bits of the value,
and the second holds the high 8 bits.
END (R007/8, R022/23)

The END registers are a pair of registers that hold the Set Value for the high-speed counter. When the
present value is counting, bits are set in the comparison register that indicate when the counter is
below, at, or above the END value (see FLAG below). The END value is also a 24-bit value requiring
two registers, and is set by the user.
PV (R009/10, R024/25)
The PV registers are a pair of registers that hold the Present Value for the high-speed counter. The PV
registers hold the actual counting value of the inputs coming into the PLC. Like STR and END, PV is
a 24-bit value.
FLAG (R026)
The FLAG register provides comparison bits between the high-speed counter Present Values (PV) and
End Values (END). Each counter channel has three bits in the FLAG register that indicate whether the
PV is greater than (>), less than (<), or equal to (=) the END value. Since the equal to comparison is a
latched bit, a fourth bit is provided to reset the = bit.
Bit Registers
Three of the configuration registers used by the high-speed counters are bit registers – each bit in the
register serves a different purpose. The three bit registers and the individual bit meanings are
described in further detail below.
H0MODE – Mode Register R004
Bit #: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Name: RUN UD/2 RING PRST - R2 R1 R0 Description
Enable R0.0 as Up/Ph. A count input
Enable R0.1 as Down/Ph. B count input
Enable R0.2 as Preset input
Not Used
Preset Counter (STR PV)
Enable Ring Counter mode
Enable Up/Down or 2-phase mode
Run/Stop – Turn on Counter
H1MODE – Mode Register R019
Bit #: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Name: RUN UD/2 RING PRST - R6 R5 R4 Description
Enable R0.4 as Up/Ph. A count input
Enable R0.5 as Down/Ph. B count input
Enable R0.6 as Preset input
Not Used
Preset Counter (STR PV)
Enable Ring Counter mode
Enable Up/Down or 2-phase mode
Run/Stop – Turn on Counter
HFLAG – Comparison Register R026
Bit #: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Name: EQ1D GT1 LT1 EQ1 EQ0D GT0 LT0 EQ0 Description
PV = END on channel 0 (latched)
PV < END on channel 0
PV > END on channel 0
Unlatch EQ0 bit (PV = END)
PV = END on channel 1 (latched)
PV < END on channel 1
PV > END on channel 1
Unlatch EQ1 bit (PV = END)
Programming Procedure
The high-speed counter is very easy to use, and requires very little programming. The following steps
outline the standard programming procedure to set up, turn on, and use the D50 high speed counter.
1. Configure the type of counter to be used by turning on the necessary mode bits in the MODE
register. To set the counter up for 2-phase or Up/Down mode, set bit 6 (UD/2). To configure
the counter as a ring counter, set bit 5 (RING). If the counter uses only a single input, and is
not a ring counter, leave both bits off.
2. Enable the inputs required by the counter to count. On channel 0, set bit 0 (R0) of its MODE
register R4 if the input on R0.0 will be a count input. Likewise set bit 1 (R1) if the input on
R0.1 will be a count input (for example, for a down-counter or 2-phase counter). On channel
1, set bit 0 (R4) and bit 1 (R5) of its MODE register R19 based on which inputs, R0.4 and
R0.5, will be used as count inputs. The Preset bits PRST are should be set if an external input
will be used to reset the counter value.
3. Set the start value STR and the end value END for the counter, based on the application. The
STR value will be used to reset the counter, while the END value is used by the comparison
register HFLAG.
4. Turn on the counter channel. This is done simply by setting the RUN bit, bit 7, of the MODE
register for that channel.
5. Use either the comparison register (HFLAG) or the D50 PLC’s comparison instructions (>, <,
=, >=, <=, <>) on the present value (PV) of the counter in the program, based on the
application.
The following ladder program illustrates the above 5-step procedure for a simple counter application.
For this example, a standard Up Counter is programmed, with an end value of 100. At the count of
9000, the program turns on the D50 PLC’s first output R15.0, and at the count of 10000, the second
PLC output R15.1 is turned on. Since this is an Up Counter, the first input of channel 0 is used to
count input pulses.
F1.0 R4.6
(RST) Turn OFF 2-phase mode
R4.5
(RST) Turn OFF Ring Count mode
F1.0 R4.0
(SET) Turn ON Up input 0 (R0.0) for up count
R4.1
(RST) Turn OFF Down input 1 (R0.1)
R4.2
(RST) Turn OFF Preset input 2 (R0.2)
F1.0 DLET
D = R5 Set the Start Value (STR) to 0
S=0
DLET
D = R7 Set the End Value (END) to 10000
S = 10000
F1.0 R4.7
(SET) Turn ON the high-speed counter
D> R15.0
D = R9 (OUT) Turn ON R15.0 at 9000 counts
S = 9000
R26.0 R15.1
(OUT) Turn ON R15.1 when PV = END
Configurable Input Response Delay

The special I/O function register FTIME (R27) controls the amount of time that an input must remain
on before the input state is changed in the PLC I/O map. This amount of time is called the “Input
Response Delay”, and affects all eight inputs on the controller module (R0.0 to R0.7). This time is
user-configurable from anywhere from 0 to 64ms in length. This allows the user to avoid false input
signals due to contact bounce, input noise, or false signals of short duration. The delay is applied
equally both to the turn On, and turn Off, of the input signal, as shown in the diagram below.
Note: Any of the eight inputs that are used for either high-speed counter or pulse catch are not
affected by the Input Response Delay setting.
Input Response Delay

0 to 64ms
Input Signal
Modified Input R0.0
The Input Response Delay is automatically set for all the inputs when the new time value is loaded into
the FTIME register, R27. The ladder example below illustrates setting the Input Response Delay time
to a value of 25ms.
F1.0 LET
D = R27 Set the Input Response Delay
S = 25 register (FTIME) to 25ms
Pulse Catch Input

In many types of high-speed applications, such as products moving along a conveyor belt, the input
signal to the PLC is of very short duration, often less than the scan time of the PLC. To allow the user
program to detect those types of short-duration input signals, the D50 allows any or all of the digital
inputs on the controller to be configured as “Pulse Catch” inputs.
When configured as a pulse catch input, any input signal of 150µsec or more is latched On for the next
I/O scan. The input remains On for at lease one I/O scan, and turns Off on the next scan after the input
signal has turned off.
I/O I/O
Scan Scan
PLC Scan
>150usec
Input Signal
Modified Input R0.0
The PCATCH special I/O function register determines which of the eight inputs on the controller are
configured for pulse catch inputs, and which operate normally. Each bit in the PCATCH register R28
represents one of the eight inputs. If the bit is set On, then the corresponding input on the controller is
configured as a pulse catch input. The logic required to set the PCATCH register R28 is shown below.
In this example, inputs 1, 3, and 7 are set for Pulse Catch Inputs.
F1.0 LET
D = R28 Set Inputs 1, 3, and 7 as Pulse Catch
S = $8A Note: 8A hex = 10001010 binary
Pulse Catch
Inputs
DC 24V C 0 1 2 3 C 4 5 6 7
OUT IN IN

RUN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IN ERR
OUT RUN
0 1 2 3 4 5 STOP
Cutler-Hammer

C 0 C 1 C 2 3 4 5
Pulse Output
The D50 PLC provides two modes of Pulse Output on the first output contact of the controller. The
first mode, Pulse Mode, sends out a given number of pulses at a user-defined frequency. The second
mode, PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) Mode, sends out a continuous stream of pulses, at a user-
defined frequency and duty-cycle. Both modes use the same set of special I/O function registers (R11
to R14). The mode used by the D50 is determined by the configuration of the PMODE register, R11.
Register Descriptions
PMODE (R11)
The mode register is used to turn on the pulse output, configure which mode it will be operating in,
enable the output used, and set up the pulse count. Each bit in the low byte of the PMODE register is
used to turn On or Off a feature of the pulse output, as shown below.
PMODE – Mode Register R011
Bit #: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit Name: RUN FUNC OUT PRST - - - CMP Description
Pulse Output completed.
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Preset Pulse Counter (PSV PPV)
Enable Output R15.0 for Pulsing
Mode: Pulse = 0, PWM = 1
Run/Stop – Turn on Pulse Output
PFREQ (R012)
The PFREQ register sets the Pulse Frequency, from 20Hz to 5kHz, of the output. Whether in Pulse
Mode, or PWM Mode, the output pulses will be sent at this rate.
PSV (R013)
The PSV register is defined by the Mode of operation. In Pulse Mode, the PSV register holds the total
number of Pulses to be sent out, from 0 to 65,535. When set to 0, the pulse output is continuous. In
PWM Mode, the PSV register holds the duty cycle of the pulse, from 0 to 100%.
The Duty Cycle of the pulse is defined as the width of the pulse, from 0 (no pulse) to 100% (constant
On). For example, a 100Hz pulse will generate 100 pulses every second, or 1 pulse every 10ms. If the
duty cycle of the pulse is 75%, the pulse is ON for 75% of that 10ms, or for 7.5ms. It is OFF for the
remaining 25%, or 2.5ms. This is illustrated by the diagram below.
Pulse Frequency: 100Hz

Duty Cycle: 75%
7.5ms
10ms
PPV (R014)
The PPV register holds the Present Value of the Pulse Output when in Pulse Mode. The Present value
counts down from the initial value, set by the PSV register. When the PPV register reaches 0, the
pulses stop. In PWM Mode, the PPV register should always be 0.
Pulse Mode Programming Procedure

Programming the pulse output for Pulse Mode is a very simple procedure. The following steps allow
the user to set the pulse output to send out the exact number of pulses required by the application.
1. Configure the pulse output for Pulse Mode by turning Off bit 6 of the PMODE register R11.
2. Enable the pulse output R15.0 by turning On bit 5 of the PMODE register R11.
3. Set the Pulse Frequency PFREQ (R12) for the pulses to be sent out.
4. Set the initial Pulse Value PSV (R13) for the total number of pulses to be sent out.
5. Turn on the Pulse Output by turning On bit 7 of the PMODE register R11.
6. Begin the Pulse Output by turning on the Preset bit (bit 4) of the PMODE register R11. This
will move the total number of pulses into the Present Value register, and begin pulsing the
outputs.
The following ladder program illustrates the above procedure by configuring a Pulse Output on the
D50 PLC. The Pulse Output is set to send out exactly 200 pulses at a frequency of 50Hz, when the
PLC is first placed into RUN.
F1.0 R11.6
(RST) Turn OFF PWM mode
R11.5
(SET) Turn ON Pulse Output R15.0
F1.0 DLET
D = R12 Set the Frequency (PFREQ) to 50Hz
S = 50
DLET
D = R13 Set the Start Value (PSV) to 200
S = 200
F1.0 R11.7
(SET) Turn ON the Pulse Output
F1.0 R11.4
(OUT) Begin Pulses by setting the PRST bit
PWM Mode Programming Procedure

Programming the PWM Mode is similar to the Pulse Mode. Rather than setting an initial value and
triggering the PRST bit, the PWM mode simply requires the user to set the Frequency and Duty cycle.
The following procedure should be followed to properly set and use the PWM Mode.
1. Configure the pulse output for PWM Mode by turning On bit 6 of the PMODE register R11.
2. Enable the pulse output R15.0 by turning On bit 5 of the PMODE register R11.
3. Set the Pulse Frequency PFREQ (R12) for the pulses to be sent out.
4. Set the Pulse Duty Cycle PSV (R13) for the width of the pulses, from 0 to 100%.
5. Turn on the Pulse Output by turning On bit 7 of the PMODE register R11.
The following ladder program illustrates the above procedure by configuring a PWM Output on the
D50 PLC. The PWM Output is set to continuously send out pulses at a frequency of 50Hz and a duty
cycle of 25%, when the PLC is first placed into RUN.
F1.0 R11.6
(SET) Turn ON PWM mode
R11.5
(SET) Turn ON Pulse Output R15.0
F1.0 DLET
D = R12 Set the Frequency (PFREQ) to 50Hz
S = 50
DLET
D = R13 Set the Duty Cycle (PSV) to 25
S = 25
F1.0 R11.7
(SET) Turn ON the PWM Output
Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor
The D50PGM10 pocket editor provides a simple, convenient method of troubleshooting, monitoring
and editing a D50 PLC on the shop floor. This appendix describes in detail the various functions of
the pocket editor, and how to use them.
Overview
This appendix describes in detail the use of the D50PGM10 pocket editor for programming,
monitoring, and troubleshooting the D50 PLC. The Pocket Editor provides mnemonic-only program
loader support for the D50 PLC in a heavy-duty, light-weight industrial package. The various
functions of the pocket editor are presented in a step-by-step procedural guide to simplify the use and
operation of the editor.
Specifications
Operating Specifications
Item Specification
Supported PLCs D50
Power Supply 5VDC supplied from connected PLC
Indicator LED’s and 7-segment display
Display
Capacity 22 LEDs; 5-digit 7-segment display
Keypad 20-key multifunction keypad
Dimensions
PGM-10
AND OUT MCS SHF R M K F W TC

OR TIM MCR RUN
STR CNT SET ON
NOT DIF RST SST
K/7 F/8 W/9 FUN
AND OUT MCS DEL SHF

3.15in
M/4 5 6 AUX CHK (80mm)
OR TIM MCR INS SCH
R/1 2 3 ADR RD
STR CNT SET ENT PRE
0 MON SST WR
NOT DIF RST CLR NXT
3.45in 1.0in
(88mm) (25mm)
Part Descriptions
The pocket editor is comprised of 13 Instruction LED’s, 3 Status LED’s, 6 Register LED’s, a 5-digit
Address/Data LED Display, and 20 keys that operate as instruction keys, number keys, and function
keys. The diagram below points out the individual features of the pocket editor.
Status LED’s
Register
PGM-10 LED’s
Instruction
LED’s
AND OUT MCS SHF R M K F W TC
OR TIM MCR RUN
STR CNT SET ON
NOT DIF RST SST Address/Data
LED Display
K/7 F/8 W/9 FUN
AND OUT MCS DEL SHF
M/4 5 6 AUX CHK
OR TIM MCR INS SCH
R/1 2 3 ADR RD
STR CNT SET ENT PRE
0 MON SST WR
NOT DIF RST CLR NXT
Instruction/ Function
Number Keys Keys
Instruction LED’s
The instruction LED’s are illuminated to indicate the basic instruction for a given step of the
mnemonic program. When displaying a step in the program, one or more of these LED’s will be lit.
Status LED’s
The three status LED’s on the pocket editor are the SHF, ON, and RUN LED’s in the center.
• The SHF LED provides visual feedback that the user has pressed the shift (SHF) key.
• The RUN LED indicates when the D50 PLC is in the RUN mode.
• The ON LED indicates when a given contact or output point is turned On, when monitoring
and instruction or bit register.
Register LED’s
The six register LED’s indicate which address type is being displayed, when displaying a data value or
address. The possible register types are R for external I/O, M for internal contacts, K for internal
retentive (Keep) contacts, F for system flags, W for data words, and TC for timer/counter done
contacts.
Address/Data LED Display

The address/data LED display is a 5-digit 7-segment display capable of showing numerical and
character data. The display is used to show data values, register addresses, and step addresses.
• A 5-digit value is displayed to represent either a bit address (where the first three digits are the
word, and the last two are the bit), or a constant value that is a parameter for an instruction.
• A 4-digit value represents a word address for a register
• Function numbers and timer/counter channel numbers are represented with the first two
characters being Fn and ch, respectively.
• When displaying a step address in the mnemonic program, periods appear to the bottom-right
of each digit in the 5-digit address.
Instruction Keys
There are 12 instruction keys on the pocket editor that are used for entering the 25 basic instructions on
the D50 PLC. To enter certain of the basic instructions, more than one of the instruction keys may be
combined. Refer to the Basic Instruction table at the end of this appendix for details.
Function Keys
There are 8 function keys on the pocket editor, plus two functions that are accessed using the SHF key.
The 10 functions each have multiple uses, based on the mode of operation the pocket editor is being
used in.
Function Key Descriptions
Key Function Descriptions

DEL Delete a step of logic. To accept the Delete request, press the ENT key after the DEL key.
INS Insert a step of logic in front of the current step.
Clear the program.
Change the PLC mode between RUN/STOP.
ENT Enter a step of logic.
Switch between displaying instruction and step number.
Accept the requested function.
CLR Cancel key input.
Cancel the current display mode.
Release a forced output.
SHF Enable the shifted operation of each key.
SCH Search for an instruction, step address, or register.
PRE Return to the previously displayed step, or register.
NXT Advance to the next step or register.
Operating Procedures
There are seven separate types of operations that the D50PGM10 pocket editor can perform. These
seven operations provide all of the functionality required to program, edit, monitor, and configure the
D50 PLC. The seven operations are as follows:
• Clear Program – Deletes the entire program memory from the D50 PLC.
• Add Instruction – Allows the user to write a new program step by step.
• Monitor Program – View the D50 mnemonic program, one instruction at a time.
• Edit Program – Performs inserting, deleting, and changing of program instructions.
• Error Checking – Check the syntax of the program for errors.
• Monitor I/O – Allows the user to monitor and force register values.
• Run/Stop PLC – Switches the PLC between the RUN and STOP modes.
Key Operation Summary
Function Key Operation Mode

Clear Program INS DEL ENT STOP
Basic [Op-code key] [Register Type] [Register No.]
Timer/Counter OUT [Op-code key] [Channel No.] [Set Value]
SHF FUN [Function No.] ENT
Add Instruction STOP
[Operand 1] ENT
Application
[Operand 2] ENT
[Operand 3] ENT
Sequential NXT or PRE
Search by Step SHF 0 [Step No.] SCH
Monitor Program RUN/STOP
Search by Inst. [Enter Instruction] SCH
Search by Reg. SHF [Register Type] [Register No.] SCH
Insert Inst. [Enter Instruction] INS
Edit Program Delete Inst. DEL ENT STOP
Change Inst. [Enter Instruction] ENT
Error Checking SHF CHK RUN/STOP
Register Value SHF [Register Type] [Register No.] MON
Change: 0 [Register Value] ENT
Next: NXT
Monitor I/O Previous: PRE RUN
Force I/O Force On: SET ENT
Force Off: RST ENT
Clear Force: CLR
PLC RUN INS SET STOP
Run/Stop PLC
PLC STOP INS RST RUN
Clear Program
The Clear Program function will clear out the program memory from the D50 PLC. All of the register
memory will also be cleared, with the exception of the Keep (K) registers, and the Timer/Counter
registers.
• Function: Clear the program in the D50 PLC

• PLC Mode: STOP
Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence LED 5-Digit Display Remarks
INS AUX Switches to Auxiliary Mode
DEL ALL d Confirm delete all?
ENT End Complete delete all
Note: To cancel the clear after pressing the DEL key, press the CLR key.
Add Instruction
The Add Instruction procedure allows the user to enter new mnemonic programs, one instruction at a
time. In the example below, the small rung of ladder shown is entered one step at a time, as described
in the Operating Procedure table.
• Function: Add new program instructions to the D50 PLC

• PLC Mode: STOP
Ladder Program
R0.1 R0.2 R15.3

(OUT)
R15.3
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.1
OR R15.3
ANN R0.2
OUT R15.3
Operating Procedure
Display
INS DEL ENT End Clears program
STR R 1 INS STR R 1 STR R0.1
OR R 1 5 0 3 INS OR R 1503 OR R15.3
AND NOT R 2 INS AND NOT R 2 ANN R0.2
OUT R 1 5 0 3 INS OUT R 1503 OUT R15.3
End
Monitor Program
The Monitor Program procedure allows the user to view the currently running program in the D50
PLC. There are two ways to select the portion of the program to monitor, either by consecutively
selecting the next or previous step, or by searching for a particular step.
Sequential Step Monitor

Using the next step (NXT) and previous step (PRE) keys, each step of the program is displayed in
consecutive order, as is the state of the bit contact for that step, when applicable. The actual step
number of the instruction can be viewed by pressing the ENT key. In the example below, the small
rung of ladder shown is monitored one step at a time, using the NXT key as described in the Operating
Procedure table.
• Function: Step forward (and back) through the program instructions in the D50 PLC
• PLC Mode: STOP or RUN
Ladder Program
R0.1 K15.2
(OUT)
K15.2
K15.2 R16.3 TIM

Ch = 30
SV = 30
K15.2 MUL
D = M15
S1 = R15
S2 = K3
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.1
OR K15.2
OUT K15.2
STR K15.2
ANN R16.3
TIM 30 30
STR TC30
MUL M15 R15 K3
Operating Procedure
Display
NXT STR R 00001 STR R0.1
NXT OR K 01502 OR K15.2
NXT OUT K 01502 OUT K15.2
NXT STR K 01502 STR K15.2
ENT 0.0.0.0.3. Displays the step number
NXT 0.0.0.0.4. Moves to the next step
ENT AND NOT R 01603 ANN R15.3
NXT OUT TIM Ch030 TIM 30 30
NXT 00030 TIM 30 30
NXT STR TC 030 STR TC30
NXT Fn039 MUL M15 R15 K3
NXT M 00015 MUL M15 R15 K3
NXT R 00015 MUL M15 R15 K3
NXT K 00003 MUL M15 R15 K3
End
Note: By pressing the PRE key at any time, the previous instruction will be displayed.
Search Step Monitor

The Search key (SCH) can also be used to monitor the program, by searching for either the exact step
number, or a contact or register within the step. In the example below, the small rung of ladder shown
is monitored by searching for various steps in the program.
• Function: Search for a specific step in the D50 PLC

• PLC Mode: STOP or RUN
Ladder Program
R0.0 LET
D = K0
S=0
M0.5 R0.0 INC

R D = K0
DEC
D = K0
== R15.1
A = K15.4 (OUT)
B = 20
R0.0 M8.15 R15.2

(OUT)
M0.1 M8.15 LET

D = K1
S=2
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.0
LET K0 0
STR M0.5
AND DIF R0.0
INC K0
DEC K0
STR== K15.4 R15.1
OUT R15.1
STR R0.0
AND M8.15
OUT R15.2
STN M0.1
AND M8.15
LET K1 2
Operating Procedure
Display
SHF 0 9 9 9 SCH End Searches to End of program
SHF 0 0 SCH STR R 00000 Search for first step (step 0)
SHF 0 3 SCH AND DIF R 00000 Search for step 3
AND M 8 1 5 SCH AND M 00815 Search for instruction
SCH AND M 00815 Continue search
SHF 0 8 SCH STR R 00000 Search for step 8
NXT AND M 00815
PRE STR R 00000
PRE OUT R 01501
Edit Program
The D50PGM10 pocket editor provides the user the ability to insert, delete, or change an instruction in
the D50 PLC. Each of the three procedures is illustrated on the following pages.
Insert Instruction
In the example below, one contact is inserted in the rung of ladder, as shown.
• Function: Insert a new step into the D50 PLC program

• PLC Mode: STOP
Ladder Program
R0.1 R15.3
(OUT)
R15.3
R0.1 M1.8 R15.3

(OUT)
R15.3
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.1 STR R0.1
OR R15.3 OR R15.3
OUT R15.3 AND M1.8
OUT R15.3
Operating Procedure
Display
OUT R 1 5 0 3 SCH OUT R 01503 Search for instruction to add after
AND M 1 0 8 INS AND M 108 Insert the new instruction
OUT R 01503 Next instruction will be displayed
PRE AND M 00108 Verify instruction was added
Delete Instruction
In the example below, one contact is deleted from the rung of ladder, as shown.
• Function: Delete an existing step out of the D50 PLC program

• PLC Mode: STOP
Ladder Program
R0.1 M0.5 K15.4
(OUT)
K15.2
R0.1 K15.4
(OUT)
K15.2
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.1 STR R0.1
OR K15.2 OR K15.2
ANN M0.5 OUT K15.4
OUT K15.4
Operating Procedure
Display
AND NOT M 5 SCH AND NOT M 5 Search for instruction to delete
DEL AND NOT M d.0005 Ready to delete – marked with d.
ENT OUT K 01504 Next instruction will be displayed
Change Instruction
In the example below, the address of one contact is changed in the rung of ladder, as shown.
• Function: Change an existing step in the D50 PLC program

• PLC Mode: STOP
Ladder Program
R0.3 M12.14 TIM

Ch = 10
SV = 240
R0.3 K0.3 TIM

Ch = 10
SV = 240
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.3 STR R0.3
AND M12.14 ANN K0.3
TIM 10 240 TIM 10 240
Operating Procedure
Display
AND M 1 2 1 4 SCH AND M 01214 Search for instruction to change
AND NOT K 3 ENT AND NOT K 3 Enter the changed instruction
NXT OUT TIM ch010 View next instruction
PRE AND NOT K 00003 Verify instruction was changed
Error Checking
The D50 has built-in error-checking routines that can check the PLC program for syntax errors such as
multiple output coils using the same reference, invalid coil addresses, and so on. The D50 pocket
editor can request an error check from the D50 PLC using the SHF and CHK keys.
To start the error check, press the SHF key, and then the CHK key. If errors are detected, the 5 digit
display will show an “E” followed by a two-digit error code. If no errors are detected, the current
instruction will be display with no change.
• Function: Check the program in the D50 PLC for syntax errors
• PLC Mode: STOP
Error Codes
Error Number Error Name Error Description

E10 I/O Overrange I/O address specified in an instruction is too high or low
E11 T/C Overrange T/C Channel number outside the range 0-255
E12 Word Overrange Word register address specified is too high or low
E13 Illegal Code An undefined function code has been used
E14 User Memory Error Error occurred while writing an instruction to the user memory
E15 System Operation Miscellaneous undefined error has occurred
E16 User Memory Failure User program checksum error – invalid memory
E17 I/O Mismatch Mismatch between physical I/O and program
E18 JMP/CALL A jump or call to an undefined label or subroutine
E19 LBL Number Error LBL instruction number has been duplicated
E20 JMPS/JMPE The JMPS/JMPE instructions are not properly paired
E21 FOR/NEXT The FOR/NEXT instructions are not properly paired
E22 SBR/RET The SBR/RET instructions are not properly paired
E23 END The END instruction is missing
E30 Not Found Instruction searched for was not found
E31 CPU Running Program may not be edited while CPU is in RUN mode
E32 Overrange Error An operation has tried to use a value that is out of range
Monitor I/O
There are two types of monitoring that the pocket editor can perform. The first type is bit monitoring,
which displays the state of a given contact or coil in the program. The second type of monitoring is
register monitoring, which displays the 16-bit value of any user-specified register address. The
monitor mode can also be used to force output bits to a given state, On or Off.
Bit Monitoring
I/O bits (contacts and coils) can only be monitored through the PLC program. At each step in the PLC
program, the ON LED will reflect the state of the bit address in that step of the program. If the ON
LED is lit, the bit address displayed is in the On state.
• Function: Monitor the state of a contact in the program

• PLC Mode: RUN
Ladder Program
R0.1 R15.0
(OUT)
R0.1
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.1
ORN R0.1
OUT R15.0
Operating Procedure
Display
OUT R 1 5 0 0 SCH OUT ON R 01500 Finds step, displays On/Off status
Register Monitoring
Any valid register address can be monitored using the register monitor mode of the pocket editor. In
this mode, the register is continuously updated from the D50 PLC, and can be changed by the user.
To enter the monitor register mode, press the SHF key, the register address, and then the MON (DIF)
key. Use the NXT and PRE keys to move to the next or previous register address. To change the
value, press the 0 (NOT) key, followed by the new value and the enter (ENT) key. To display the
address of the register being monitored, press the ENT key. To exit the monitor register mode, press
the Clear (CLR) key.
• Function: Monitor/Change the value of a register

• PLC Mode: RUN
Operating Procedure
Display
SHF W 0 MON 00000 Displays the current value of W0
NXT 00000 Displays the current value of W1
ENT W 00001 Displays the address W1
PRE W 00000 Displays the address W0
ENT 00000 Displays the current value of W0
0 C Enters the “Change Value” mode
1 2 3 123 Enter the new value for W0
ENT 00123 Displays the current value of W0
CLR End Exit monitor mode
Force Outputs
The states of output coils can be forced On or Off in the D50 PLC. The output to be forced must be an
output that has been programmed in the PLC. The SET and RST keys are used for Force On and Force
Off, respectively. Using the NXT or PRE keys will clear the force from the coil and move to the next
or previous instruction. The CLR key will remove the force while continuing to display that
instruction.
• Function: Force an output to either an On or Off state

• PLC Mode: RUN
Ladder Program
R0.1 R0.3 R15.1
(OUT)
M0.0 R0.4 R15.2

(OUT)
K1.2
R1.2 R17.3
(OUT)
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.1
AND R0.3
OUT R15.1
STR M0.0
OR K1.2
AND R0.4
OUT R15.2
STR R1.2
OUT R17.3
Operating Procedure
Display
OUT R 1 5 0 1 SCH OUT R 01501 Finds step, displays On/Off status
SET ENT OUT ON R 01501 Force ON
RST ENT OUT R 01501 Force OFF
NXT STR M 00000 Release force, go to next step
OUT R 1 7 0 3 SCH OUT ON R 01703 Find instruction
RST ENT OUT R 01703 Force OFF
CLR OUT ON R 01703 Release force, continue to display
Run/Stop PLC
When the RUN/STOP switch on the D50 PLC is in the RUN position, the mode can be overridden by
the pocket editor. To place the D50 PLC in STOP, press the INS key, followed by the RST key. To
return the PLC to the RUN mode, press the INS key followed by the SET key.
• Function: Clear the program in the D50 PLC

• PLC Mode: STOP
Operating Procedure
Display
INS RUN AUX Switches to Auxiliary Mode
RST End PLC is stopped
INS AUX Switches to Auxiliary Mode
SET RUN End PLC switched to RUN
Instruction Codes
The following tables list the key sequences required to enter each of the mnemonic instructions
supported by the D50 PLC.
Basic Instructions
Mnemonic Display
Instruction Key Sequence LED 5-Digit Display
STR STR STR
STN STR NOT STR NOT
AND AND AND
ANN AND NOT AND NOT
OR OR OR
ORN OR NOT OR NOT
ANB AND MCS AND MCS
ORB OR MCS OR MCS
OUT OUT OUT
NOT NOT NOT
MCS MCS MCS
MCR MCR MCR
SET SET SET
RST RST RST
STR DIF STR DIF STR DIF
AND DIF AND DIF AND DIF
OR DIF OR DIF OR DIF
STR DFN STR DIF NOT STR DIF NOT
AND DFN AND DIF NOT AND DIF NOT
OR DFN OR DIF NOT OR DIF NOT
TIM OUT TIM OUT TIM ch
SST OUT SST OUT SST ch
UC OUT CNT OUT CNT UC
DC OUT CNT NXT OUT CNT dC
UDC OUT CNT NXT NXT OUT CNT Ud
Note: Instructions ANB, ORB, MCS, and MCR require no operand.
Advanced Instructions
Instruction Function No. Instruction Function No.

STR ==S1, S2 FUN 1 ADD D, S1, S2 FUN 35
AND ==S1, S2 FUN 2 ADC D, S1, S2 FUN 36
OR ==S1, S2 FUN 3 SUB D, S1, S2 FUN 37
STR <> S1, S2 FUN 4 SBC D, S1, S2 FUN 38
AND <> S1, S2 FUN 5 MUL D, S1, S2 FUN 39
OR <> S1, S2 FUN 6 DIV D, S1, S2 FUN 40
STR > S1, S2 FUN 7 ADDB D, S1, S2 FUN 41
AND > S1, S2 FUN 8 ADCB D, S1, S2 FUN 42
OR > S1, S2 FUN 9 SUBB D, S1, S2 FUN 43
STR <= S1, S2 FUN 10 SBCB D, S1, S2 FUN 44
AND <= S1, S2 FUN 11 MULB D, S1, S2 FUN 45
OR <= S1, S2 FUN 12 DIVB D, S1, S2 FUN 46
STR >= S1, S2 FUN 13 WAND D, S1, S2 FUN 47
AND >= S1, S2 FUN 14 WOR D, S1, S2 FUN 48
OR >= S1, S2 FUN 15 XOR D, S1, S2 FUN 49
STR < S1, S2 FUN 16 XNR D, S1, S2 FUN 50
AND < S1, S2 FUN 17 XCHG D1, D2 FUN 51
OR < S1, S2 FUN 18 LDR D, Sr FUN 52
INC D FUN 19 STO Sr, D FUN 53
DEC D FUN 20 FOR D FUN 54
INCB D FUN 21 STR D== S1,S2 FUN 55
DECB D FUN 22 AND D==S1, S2 FUN 56
ABS D FUN 23 OR D==S1, S2 FUN 57
NEG D FUN 24 STR D<> S1, S2 FUN 58
NOT D FUN 25 AND D<> S1, S2 FUN 59
RLC D, N FUN 26 OR D<> S1, S2 FUN 60
RRC D, N FUN 27 STR D> S1, S2 FUN 61
ROL D, N FUN 28 AND D> S1, S2 FUN 62
ROR D, N FUN 29 OR D> S1, S2 FUN 63
SHL D, N FUN 30 STR D<= S1, S2 FUN 64
SHR D, N FUN 31 AND D<= S1, S2 FUN 65
LET D, S FUN 32 OR D<= S1, S2 FUN 66
BCD D, S FUN 33 STR D>= S1, S2 FUN 67
BIN D, S FUN 34 AND D>= S1, S2 FUN 68
Instruction Function No. Instruction Function No.

OR D>= S1, S2 FUN 69 DOR D, S1, S2 FUN 102
STR D< S1, S2 FUN 70 DXOR D, S1, S2 FUN 103
AND D< S1, S2 FUN 71 DXNR D, S1, S2 FUN 104
OR D< S1, S2 FUN 72 DXCHG D1, D2 FUN 105
DINC D FUN 73 DLDR D, Sr FUN 106
DDEC D FUN 74 DSTO Sr, D FUN 107
DINCB D FUN 75 DFOR D FUN 108
DDECB D FUN 76 DIS D, Nd, Sr FUN 109
DABS D FUN 77 UNI D, Sr, Nd FUN 110
DNEG D FUN 78 MOV D, Sr, Ns FUN 111
DNOT D FUN 79 FMOV D, Ns, V FUN 112
DRLC D, N FUN 80 BMOV D, Sr, Ns FUN 113
DRRC D, N FUN 81 BFMV D, Ns, V FUN 114
DROL D, N FUN 82 BSET D, N FUN 115
DROR D, N FUN 83 BRST D, N FUN 116
DSHL D, N FUN 84 BNOT D, N FUN 117
DSHR D, N FUN 85 BTST D, N FUN 118
DLET D, S FUN 86 DECO D, S FUN 119
DBCD D, S FUN 87 ENCO D, S FUN 120
DBIN D, S FUN 88 SEG D, S FUN 121
DADD D, S1, S2 FUN 89 SUM D, S FUN 122
DADC D, S1, S2 FUN 90 JMP L FUN 123
DSUB D, S1, S2 FUN 91 CALL Sb FUN 124
DSBC D, S1, S2 FUN 92 LBL L FUN 125
DMUL D, S1, S2 FUN 93 SBR Sb FUN 126
DDIV D, S1, S2 FUN 94 JMPS FUN 127
DADDB D, S1, S2 FUN 95 NEXT FUN 128
DADCB D, S1, S2 FUN 96 SC FUN 129
DSUBB D, S1, S2 FUN 97 RC FUN 130
DSBCB D, S1, S2 FUN 98 CC FUN 131
DMULB D, S1, S2 FUN 99 JMPE FUN 132
DDIVB D, S1, S2 FUN 100 RET FUN 133
DAND D, S1, S2 FUN 101 END FUN 134
Programming Examples
The following pages present some very basic programming examples, showing how to enter mnemonic
code into the D50 PLC using the pocket editor. Each example program is devided into three sections;
the ladder program, the equivalent mnemonic code, and the key sequence for entering the program
using the pocket editor
Example 1 – Basic Instructions
Ladder Program
R0.3
(MCS)
M0.0 M0.2 M0.4

(OUT)
M0.1 M0.3
M0.4 M1.0 R15.2

(OUT)
M1.1 M1.2
F0.15
(MCR)
Mnemonic Program
STR R0.3
MCS
STR M0.0
OR M0.1
STR M0.2
OR M0.3
ANB
NOT
OUT M0.4
STR M0.4
AND M1.0
STR M1.1
AND M1.2
ORB
OUT R15.2
STR F0.15
MCR
Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence LED 5-Digit Display Mnemonic Instruction
STR R 3 INS STR R 3 STR R0.3
MCS INS MCS MCS
STR M 0 INS STR M 0 STR M0.0
OR M 1 INS OR M 1 OR M0.1
OR M 3 INS OR M 3 OR M0.3
AND MCS INS AND MCS ANB
NOT INS NOT NOT
OUT M 4 INS OUT M 4 OUT M0.4
AND M 1 0 0 INS AND M 100 AND M1.0
STR M 1 0 1 INS STR M 101 STR M1.1
AND M 1 0 2 INS AND M 102 AND M1.2
OR MCS INS OR MCS ORB
OUT R 1 5 0 2 INS OUT R 1502 OUT R15.2
STR F 1 5 INS STR F 15 STR F0.15
MCR INS MCR MCR
Example 2 – Timer Instructions
Ladder Program
R1.3 TIM
Ch = 255
SV = 100
M14.14 SST
Ch = 254
SV = 50
TC255 M5.2
(SET)
TC254 M0.10
(RST)
Mnemonic Program
STR R1.3
TIM 255 100
STR M14.14
SST 254 50
STR TC255
SET M5.2
STR TC254
RST M0.10
Operating Procedure
Display
STR R 1 0 3 INS STR R 103 STR R1.3
OUT TIM 2 5 5 ENT OUT TIM ch255 TIM 255 100
1 0 0 INS 100 TIM 255 100
STR M 1 4 1 4 INS STR M 1414 STR M14.14
OUT SST 2 5 4 ENT OUT SST ch254 SST 254 50
5 0 INS 50 SST 254 50
STR TIM 2 5 5 INS STR TC 255 STR TC255
SET M 5 0 2 INS STR M 502 SET M5.2
RST M 1 0 RST M 10 RST M0.10
Example 3 – Counter Instructions
Ladder Program
M0.10 UC
U Ch = 25
SV = 100
M0.11
R
M0.12 DC
D Ch = 255
SV = 100
M0.13
R
TC25 M0.11
(SET)
TC255 M0.13
(SET)
Mnemonic Program
STR M0.10
STR M0.11
UC 25 100
STR M0.12
STR M0.13
DC 255 100
STR TC25
SET M0.11
STR TC255
SET M0.13
Operating Procedure
Display
STR M 1 0 INS STR M 10 STR M0.10
OUT CNT 2 5 ENT OUT CNT UC 25 UC 25 100
1 0 0 INS 100 UC 25 100
OUT CNT OUT CNT UC -
NXT OUT CNT dC DC 255 100
2 5 5 ENT OUT CNT dC255 DC 255 100
1 0 0 INS 100 DC 255 100
STR TIM 2 5 INS STR TC 25 STR TC25
SET M 1 1 INS SET M 11 SET M0.11
SET M 1 3 INS SET M 13 SET M0.13
Example 4 – Comparison/Advanced Instructions
Ladder Program
== INC
A = K0 D = K4
B = K1
==
A = 100
B = K3
Mnemonic Program
STR== K0 K1
OR== 100 K3
INC K4
Operating Procedure
Display
SHF FUN 1 Fn 1 STR== K0 K1
ENT S1
K 0 K 0 STR== K0 K1
ENT S2
K 1 K 1 STR== K0 K1
ENT Fn. 1 STR== K0 K1
INS End
SHF FUN 3 Fn 3 OR== 100 K3
ENT S1
0 0
1 0 0 100 OR== 100 K3
ENT S2
K 3 K 3 OR== 100 K1
ENT Fn. 3 OR== 100 K1
INS End
SHF FUN 1 9 Fn 19 INC K4
ENT d
K 4 K 4 INC K4
ENT Fn. 19 INC K4
INS End
Installation & Maintenance
Instructions MM-600(E)
Series FS8-W ®
General Purpose
Liquid Flow Switch
Now
(specified models only)
with
Stainless Steel
OPERATION Paddles
This control is an independently mounted water flow
Series FS8-W
sensing device that makes or breaks an electrical
circuit when flow stops or starts.
! WARNING
• Before using product, read and understand instructions.
ION
CAUT
ING
WARN
• Save these instructions for future reference.
• All work must be performed by qualified personnel trained in the proper application,
installation, and maintenance of plumbing, steam and electrical equipment and/or systems in
accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.
• To prevent electrical shock, turn off the electrical power before making electrical
connections.
• To prevent an electrical fire or equipment damage, electrical wiring insulation must have a
rating of 167˚F (75˚C) if the liquid’s temperature exceeds 180˚F (82˚C).
• To prevent electrocution, when the electrical power is connected to the flow switch, do not
touch the terminals.
• Make sure flow switch electrical cover is secured before turning on electric power.
Failure to follow this warning could cause property damage, personal injury or death.
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Liquid Pressure: 160 psi (11.3 kg/cm2)
Liquid Temperature Range (TL): 32 - 225˚F (0 - 107˚C)
Ambient Temperature Range (TS): 32 - 120˚F (0 - 49˚C)
Electrical Enclosure Rating: Nema Type 4X (IP 56)
Maximum Velocity: 10ft/sec (3M/sec)
Pipe Connection Thread Size: - 1” NPT - All models
except “J”
- 1” BSPT - “J” models
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
Motor Switch Rating (Amperes)
CE Circuit Rating
Voltage Full Load Locked Rotor Pilot Duty 7.4 (7.4)/120~ 0.3/120=
120 VAC 7.4 44.4 125 VA at 3.7 (3.7)/240~ 0.15/240=
240 VAC 3.7 22.2 120 or 240 VAC
50 or 60 cycles
NOTE: Switch on ‘G’ models is rated for 300 watts @ 125VAC.
Models that meet CE Conformance:

FS8-WJA-E
• This Control: is for continuous operations For applications with loads 0.5 and 38mA, power
is not electronic factors exceeding 0.65, an anticipated system
has Type 1C action (micro switch operation rate of less than once per 5 minutes,
interruption on operation) and any one cycle greater than 3 seconds on and 3
seconds off.
• LVD 73/23/EEC
Additional suppression may be required for applica-
• EMC 89/33/EEC
tions outside these ranges.
For applications with loads between 0.5 and 3.7 Amps,
power factors exceeding 0.65, an anticipated system • Declaration of Conformity
switch operation rate of less than once per 2.5 minutes, Available on request.
and any one cycle greater than 3 seconds on and 3
seconds off.
2
FLOW RATES
Flow rates required to activate flow switch are shown Settings will vary when used to sense flow of other
in chart below. The values are calculated for sensing fluids or if located in a vertical pipe.
water (potable, non-polluted) in a horizontal pipe.
Mode of Operation Max. Flow

Pipe Rate gpm
Size NPT Flow Velocity No Flow Velocity (lpm) w/o
in. (mm) Settings gpm (lpm) fps (mps) gpm (lpm) fps (mps) Paddle Damage
Factory or
1 (25) Minimum 4.9 (18.5) 1.82 (.55) 3.4 (12.9) 1.25 (.38) 27
Maximum 17.6 (66.6) 6.53 (2.60) 15 (56.8) 5.56 (1.69) (102)
Factory or
11 ⁄4 (32) Minimum 7.5 (28.4) 1.60 (.49) 5.3 (20.1) 1.14 (.35) 47
Maximum 29 (110) 6.23 (1.9) 24.6 (93.1) 5.28 (1.61) (178)
Factory or
11 ⁄2 (40) Minimum 9.4 (35.6) 1.48 (.45) 6.7 (25.4) 1.05 (.32) 63
Maximum 37.8 (143) 5.95 (1.81) 32.2 (122) 5.07 (1.54) (239)
Factory or
2 (50) Minimum 13.7 (51.8) 1.31 (.4) 9.4 (35.6) .9 (.27) 105
Maximum 56.4 (214) 5.39 (1.64) 47.4 (179) 4.53 (1.38) (398)
Factory or
21 ⁄2 (65) Minimum 17.9 (67.8) 1.20 (.36) 12.1 (45.8) .81 (.25) 149
Maximum 71.3 (270) 4.78 (1.46) 59.2 (224) 3.97 (1.21) (565)
Factory or
3 (80) Minimum 24.2 (91.6) 1.05 (.32) 16.4 (62.1) .71 (.22) 230
Maximum 89 (337) 3.87 (1.18) 72.5 (274) 3.15 (.96) (872)
Factory or
4 (100) Minimum 35.3 (134) .89 (.27) 27 (102) .68 (.21) 397
Maximum 118 (446) 2.89 (.91) 105 (397) 2.64 (.8) (1505)
Factory or
5 (125) Minimum 48.6 (184) .78 (.24) 37.4 (142) .6 (.18) 654
Maximum 178 (674) 2.86 (.87) 160 (606) 2.57 (.78) (2479)
Factory or
6 (150) Minimum 60.3 (228) .67 (.20) 46.8 (177) .52 (.16) 900
Maximum 245 (927) 2.72 (.83) 225 (852) 2.5 (.76) (3411)
Values are ± 10%
NOTE: DO NOT USE LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES ON SYSTEMS

WITH FLOW VELOCITY GREATER THAN 10 FEET
(3M) PER SECOND.
3
STEP 1 - Paddle Sizing
Determine the correct paddle length for your installation from the
chart below.
Pipe Size Paddle Trim to Length

(Standard Length)
1" (25mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
1 (25) 1 (25) N/A 2" (51mm)
1 1/4 (32) 2 (25) 1 1/4 (32)
1 1/2 (40) 2 (51) 1 1/2 (38) 3" (76mm)
2 (50) 2 (51) 1 5/8 (41)

2 1/2 (65) 3 (76) 2 1/4 (57)
3 (80) 3 (76) 2 5/8 (67)
4 (100) 6 (152) 3 5/8 (92)
6" (152mm)
6 (150) 6 (152) 5 5/8 (143)
8+ (200+) 6 (152) N/A
NOTE: All models include 4 paddles as shown.
a. If the paddle must be trimmed, measure the

paddle from the center of large hole (A) to the
A
length required. Using non-serrated tin snips,
trim the end (B) on a curve just like the paddle B Required
was originally cut. Length
b. If the flow rate in the pipe exceeds the Series FS8-W “K” Factor
maximum adjustment on the Flow Switch Pipe Flow No-Flow
use the following formula to change the Size NPT Maximum Maximum
paddle lengths. in. (mm) Adjustment Adjustment
2 (50) 118.5 99.5
K 3 (80) 278.0 227.0
Paddle Length = _______________
Flow Rate (GPM) 4 (100) 442.0 391.0
5 (125) 847.0 762.0
NOTE: If trimming the paddle for a no-flow action make sure 6 (150) 1440.0 1325.0
there is enough flow to activate switch.
4
STEP 2 - Determine the Location of the Flow Switch
• The flow switch should be located in a horizontal
section of pipe where there is a straight horizontal
run of at least 5 pipe diameters on each side of the
flow switch. The flow switch may be installed in a
vertical pipe if the flow is in the upward direction.
1" PIPE
CONNECTION
• The flow switch must be installed in the upright
position as shown with arrow mark on side of casting FLUID FLOW
in the same direction as fluid will flow. D
• Some system conditions that require more than 5 pipe 5xD 5xD
diameters are high viscosity fluid and high fluid velocity. MINIMUM MINIMUM
D= PIPE DIAMETER
• The flow switch must be installed in the pump suction
piping when spring-loaded check valves and/or other
close coupled accessories are installed in the pump
discharge piping.
a. The flow switch must be installed in the pipe using face or hex bushing to reduce the tee outlet to 1”
a threaded tee connection or welding fitting of pipe thread if a reduced tee outlet thread size fitting
minimum length such as a half coupling. Use a is not available.
FACE OR HEX. 1" (25mm)
BUSHING
1" (25mm) 1" MAX
(25mm)
11/4" 11/4" 11/4" (32mm) 11/4" (32mm) 2" (50mm) 2" (50mm)
1" (25mm) (32mm) (32mm) 11/2" (40mm) 11/2" (40mm) 21/2" (65mm) 21/2" (65mm)
11/2" 11/2" 2" (50mm) 2" (50mm) 3" (80mm) 3" (80mm)
(40mm) (40mm) 4" (100mm) 4" (100mm)
1" 1" 21/2" (65mm) 21/2" (65mm)
(25mm) 2" 2"
(25mm) 3" (80mm) 3" (80mm) 6" (150mm) 6" (150mm)
(50mm) (50mm)
Threaded Threaded Threaded Welded

Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe
b. When installing brazed/soldered copper pipe,

size the threaded adapter to ensure the paddle
arm extends into the main run of the pipe.
1" MAX
(25mm)
Paddle Arm
CORRECT INCORRECT
STEP 3 - Connecting the Flow Switch to Pipe

a. Insert the 8/32 x 1/4” flathead screw through
washer and paddle. Attach screw to opposite side
of the paddle arm’s curve and tighten to a torque
of approximately 12-16 lb•in (1.36-1.81 N•m).
5
b. Apply pipe sealing compound or Teflon® tape to the
flow switch pipe threads. Teflon®
NOTE: Do not apply sealant to first threads as this

switch is grounded (earthed) via the pipe mounting.
c. Insert the flow switch into the pipe tee. Turn

the flow switch two (2) or three (3) revolutions
clockwise until tight. Do not put excessive
force on cover when turning.
d. Place a 1 3/8” open end wrench on flow switch

body to tighten to final position. Final position
is with arrow on body aligned in the same
direction as liquid flow.
FLOW
STEP 4 - Electric Wire Connections
! WARNING
• To prevent electrical shock, turn off the electrical power before making electrical connections.
• To prevent an electrical fire or equipment damage, electrical wiring insulation must have a rating of 167˚F
(75˚C) if the liquid’s temperature exceeds 180˚F (82˚C).
• To prevent electrocution, when the electrical power is connected to the flow switch, do not touch the
terminals.
• Make sure flow switch electrical cover is secured before turning on electric power.
Failure to follow this warning could cause property damage, personal injury or death.
a. Cover Removal and Installation Procedure

A
• Using a flathead screwdriver, unscrew the four
cover screws and remove the electrical connec- x4
tion cover (A).
• Place electrical connection cover on the flow

switch and insert four cover screws. Tighten the
screws to 10 lb•in (1.13 N•m).
6
b. Electrical Conduit Connection
• Connect electric conduit to flow switch electrical enclosure.
• Follow accepted electrical practices when installing fittings

and making connections.
• Refer to and follow local codes and standards when

selecting the types of electrical fittings and conduit to
connect to flow switch.
c. Determine which switch action is required for the

flow switch.
• “Flow” means that the switch will close circuit
C. N.O. N.C. C. N.O. N.C.
C.-N.O. and open circuit C.-N.C. when flow rate
is increased above setpoint of flow switch.
FLOW NO FLOW
• “No Flow” means that the switch will open circuit
C.-N.O. and close circuit C.-N.C. when flow rate
is decreased below setpoint of flow switch.
d. Based upon the mode of operation (“Flow” or “No-

Flow”) required, complete the appropriate steps to
connect wires to flow switch. Use a Phillip’s head
COMMON
screwdriver to loosen and tighten switch terminal NORMALLY
screws when attaching wires. OPEN Flow

Opens
NORMALLY Common Flow
CLOSED Closes Circuit
For “Flow” Mode of Operation (Fig. 1) 1
Circuit
2
3
If the flow switch will be used to actuate a signal, (Common( (Normally (Normally
closed (
open (
alarm or other device when flow occurs, connect
the wire from that device to the “N.O.” contact.
Connect the “Hot” power supply wire to “C” terminal.
LINE LINE
For “No Flow” Mode of Operation (Fig. 2) 3
FS4-3
2 1 3
FS4-3
2 1
If the flow switch will be used to actuate a signal, HOT HOT
alarm or other device when no flow occurs, connect

the wire from that device to the “N.C.” contact. LOAD LOAD
Connect the “Hot” power supply wire to “C” terminal. Fig. 1 Fig. 2
STEP 5 - Testing
a. Place cover on flow switch and turn on power. Initiate fluid

flow through the system. Observe the device being
activated by the flow switch to determine if device is ON
operating as required.
b. Turn off fluid flow to determine if device is operating
as required. OFF
c. Repeat initiating and turning off fluid flow several times to

test flow switch and device for proper operation.
- If operating as required, put system into service.
- If not operating as required, Flow Switch may need
to be adjusted.
7
STEP 6 - Adjustment
Adjustment is necessary only if required flow/no flow set-

points are above factory set minimum.
a. Turn off power. Remove electric enclosure cover.

b. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to increase setpoint.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to lower flow switch

COMMON
setpoint from original factory minimum setting.
NORMALLY
Lowering (turning adjusting screw counterclock-
OPEN
wise) the setpoint from original factory setting NORMALLY
CLOSED
may cause erratic flow switch operation.
c. Place cover on flow switch and turn on power. ADJUSTMENT

SCREW
d. Test the operation of the flow switch after each
adjustment.
MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem:
SCHEDULE:
1. Flow Switch Does Not Operate
• Inspect paddle annually. Turbulent or high Solution:
flow velocity conditions may require more a. Make sure power has been turned on to device
frequent inspection and/or replacement. and flow switch.
b. Verify that flow rate is high enough for flow switch
• Replace paddle if damaged or showing signs to activate. Measure flow rate and match with
of wear. velocities shown in flow rate chart.
c. Check to see if paddle moves freely. Some system
• Replace flow switch every 5 years or 100,000 piping disassembly may be required.
cycles, whichever occurs first.
2. Flow Switch Operates Erratically
Solution:
a. Flow switch may be located in an area of high
turbulence causing paddles to flutter.
b. Adjustment screw may have been turned below
original factory setpoint. Verify that flow rate is high
enough for flow switch to activate. Measure flow
rate and match with velocities shown in flow rate
chart.
c. Check to see if paddle moves freely. Some system
piping disassembly may be required.
3. Flow Switch Does Not Deactivate
Solution:
a. Check to see if paddle moves freely. Some system
piping disassembly may be required.
b. Measure flow rate and match with velocities shown
in flow rate chart. Flow switch must prove flow
before it can indicate no flow.
3500 N. Spaulding Avenue

Chicago, Illinois 60618
tel: 773 267-1600
fax: 773 267-0991
www.mcdonnellmiller.com
©2002 ITT Industries Inc.

Printed in U.S.A. 8-03 246791
Medir
•
Interruptores de Nivel Monitorear
•
Analizar
● Presión: máx. 16 bar

● Temperatura:
máx. 110 °C
● Material:
latón o acero inoxidable
● Conexión:
G 3/4, M 27 x 1.5
Las oficinas KOBOLD existen en los siguientes paises: KOBOLD Messring GmbH Modelo:
Nordring 22-24
D-65719 Hofheim/Ts. NV
ARGENTINA, AUSTRIA, BELGICA, CANADA, CHINA, 쎰 (0 6192 ) 2 99 - 0
Fax (0 6192 ) 2 33 98
FRANCIA, ALEMANIA, INGLATERRA, PAISES BAJOS, E-mail: info.de@kobold.com
POLONIA, ITALIA, SUIZA, USA, VENEZUELA Internet: www.kobold.com 17
Interruptores de Nivel Modelo NV
Descripción Detalles Técnicos

El modelo NV del interruptor de nivel de KOBOLD es un instrumento Cuerpo: NV-11..: latón, Ms 58
compacto de precio razonable para monitorear niveles. Un flotador NV-12..: acero inoxidable, 1.4301
cilíndrico de acero inoxidable asociado a un extremo de un brazo Conexiones: NV-11..: latón, Ms 58
del balance se mueve hacia arriba y hacia abajo con el nivel líquido. NV-12..: acero inoxidable, 1.4301
El movimiento del flotador se transfiere a un imán permanente
acondicionado en el otro extremo del brazo de balance El imán Flotador: Acero inoxidable, 1.4301
permanente cambia un contacto reed que se acondiciona en Resorte de hoja: Acero inoxidable, 1.4310
un tubo deslizante fuera del medio. Se fija el tubo mientras que un
contacto en la fábrica, es decir, el contacto N/A se cierra cuando Brazo de balance: Acero inoxidable, 1.4310
selevanta el nivel. La función de conmutación es invertida moviendo Manga: NV-11..: latón, Ms 58
el tubo. Los instrumentos se entregan en las fundas estándares para la NV-12..: acero inoxidable, 1.4301
instalación lateral. La cinta del Teflón se utiliza para sellarel interruptor.
Tubo
b: de contacto poliamida
Sello: NV-11..: buna N
Dimensiones NV-12..: Viton
Máx. temperatura: 110°C
155 or 130
94 50 or 25 Máx. presión: 16 bar
Posicion de instalacion: Horizontal
Compon. de contacto: 1 contacto N/A / contacto N/C
dependiendo del calibrado g
min. 63
Ø 21
Conexíón eléctrica: 1.5 m cable, PVC

Voltaje de conmutación: Máx. 230 VAC/VDC
SW 30 SW 32 G 3/4 or M 27x1,5
Capacidad de contacto: Máx. 40 VA / watt
Corriente de conmutación: Máx. 2 A
Resistencia de contacto: Máx. 80 mOhm
Punto cerrado: Máx. 6 mm (encima de la línea central)
Reajuste de la unidad del contacto
Punto abierto: Máx. 3 mm (más abajode la línea central)
Para reajustar la unidad del contacto la placa que bloquea
en la parte superior de la cubierta debe ser aflojada y la Hísteresis de conmutación: Aproximadamente 8 mm
unidad del contacto ser movida. Densidad: > 0.8 a 25 mm flotador
Las flechas azules (blancas) o rojas se sitúan en la unidad del > 0.7 a 50 mm flotador
contacto para los propósitos del reajuste. El borde delantero
de la placa que bloquea, sirve como marca de ajuste. Protección: IP 65
● Contacto N/A Aplicaciones

Ajuste la unidad del contacto cerca de la flecha roja
● Calderas de la calefacción
El contacto se cierra mientras que se levanta el nivel del líquido.
● Lavado de automoviles
● Contacto N/C
Ajuste la unidad del contacto cerca de la flecha (blanca) azul ● Máquinas de la limpieza
El contacto se abre mientras que se levanta el nivel líquido.
Datos de pedido (Ejemplo: NV-1102)
Conexión Largo del Diseño de Diseño de

rosca macho flotador Latón Acero Inoxida.
Núm de Pedido Núm de Pedido
G 3/4 25 mm NV-1101 NV-1201
G 3/4 50 mm NV-1103 NV-1203
M 27 x 1.5 25 mm NV-1102 NV-1202
M 27 x 1.5 50 mm NV-1104 NV-1204
18 www.kobold.com No se responsabiliza por errores editados;

sujeto a cambios sin previo aviso.
CAT49A TEEJET 027-045 8/12/04 3:11 PM Page 39
VisiFlo® Hollow Cone Spray Tips
Typical Applications:
Excellent: Use for directed applications in ■ Standard ConeJet spray nozzles
air blast spraying for orchards and vineyards (not color-coded) are available in brass
and other specialty crops. Also well-suited and stainless steel with 65° (TY) and
for applications of insecticides, fungicides, 80° (TX) spray angles.
defoilants and foliar fertilizers at pressures ■ Finely atomized hollow cone spray
of 40 PSI (3 bar) and above. pattern provides thorough coverage.
Features: ■ Maximum pressure rating
■ VisiFlo color-coded versions consist of 300 PSI (20 bar) (spray angle
of stainless steel or ceramic orifice is 80° at 100 PSI (7 bar)).
in a polypropylene body.
l/min
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar
TXVS-1 100 0.055 0.065 0.074 0.081 0.087 0.093 0.098 0.103 0.108 0.112 0.116 0.120 0.124 0.127 0.131 0.134 0.137 0.140 0.143
TXVS-2 100 0.110 0.131 0.148 0.164 0.177 0.189 0.201 0.211 0.221 0.231 0.240 0.248 0.256 0.264 0.272 0.279 0.286 0.293 0.299
TXVK-3 100 0.164 0.196 0.223 0.245 0.266 0.284 0.301 0.317 0.332 0.346 0.359 0.372 0.384 0.396 0.407 0.418 0.429 0.439 0.449
TXVK-4 50 0.218 0.262 0.299 0.331 0.360 0.386 0.410 0.433 0.454 0.474 0.493 0.512 0.529 0.546 0.562 0.578 0.594 0.608 0.623
TXVK-6 50 0.327 0.393 0.448 0.496 0.539 0.579 0.615 0.649 0.681 0.711 0.740 0.767 0.794 0.819 0.844 0.867 0.890 0.912 0.934
TXVK-8 50 0.433 0.525 0.603 0.671 0.732 0.788 0.840 0.888 0.934 0.978 1.02 1.06 1.10 1.13 1.17 1.20 1.24 1.27 1.30
TXVK-10 50 0.541 0.657 0.753 0.838 0.915 0.985 1.05 1.11 1.17 1.22 1.27 1.32 1.37 1.42 1.46 1.50 1.55 1.59 1.63
TXVK-12 50 0.649 0.788 0.904 1.01 1.10 1.18 1.26 1.33 1.40 1.47 1.53 1.59 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.81 1.86 1.90 1.95
TXVK-18 50 0.968 1.18 1.37 1.53 1.67 1.80 1.93 2.04 2.15 2.25 2.35 2.45 2.54 2.63 2.72 2.80 2.88 2.96 3.03
TXVK-26 50 1.40 1.71 1.97 2.20 2.41 2.60 2.78 2.95 3.11 3.26 3.40 3.54 3.67 3.80 3.92 4.04 4.16 4.27 4.38
TX†800050VK 100 0.164 0.196 0.223 0.245 0.266 0.284 0.301 0.317 0.332 0.346 0.359 0.372 0.384 0.396 0.407 0.418 0.429 0.439 0.449
TX†800067VK 50 0.218 0.262 0.299 0.331 0.360 0.386 0.410 0.433 0.454 0.474 0.493 0.512 0.529 0.546 0.562 0.578 0.594 0.608 0.623
TX†8001VK 50 0.327 0.393 0.448 0.496 0.539 0.579 0.615 0.649 0.681 0.711 0.740 0.767 0.794 0.819 0.844 0.867 0.890 0.912 0.934
TX†80015VK 50 0.487 0.591 0.678 0.754 0.823 0.886 0.944 0.999 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.19 1.23 1.28 1.32 1.35 1.39 1.43 1.46
TX†8002VK 50 0.649 0.788 0.904 1.01 1.10 1.18 1.26 1.33 1.40 1.47 1.53 1.59 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.81 1.86 1.90 1.95
TX†8003VK 50 0.968 1.18 1.37 1.53 1.67 1.80 1.93 2.04 2.15 2.25 2.35 2.45 2.54 2.63 2.72 2.80 2.88 2.96 3.03
TX†8004VK 50 1.29 1.58 1.82 2.03 2.23 2.40 2.57 2.72 2.87 3.01 3.14 3.27 3.39 3.51 3.62 3.73 3.84 3.94 4.04
†Specify “A” or “B.” See pages 37 and 38 for more information on ConeJet spray tips.
Note: Always double check your application rates. See pages 153-157 for useful formulas and information.
VisiFlo Flat Spray Tips
Typical Applications: Features:

Excellent: Use for directed applications in ■ Tapered edge flat spray pattern
air blast spraying for orchards and vineyards for uniform coverage.
and other specialty crops. Also well-suited ■ VisiFlo color-coded version available
for applications of insecticides, fungicides, with ceramic orifice.
defoilants and foliar fertilizers at pressures
of 40 PSI (3 bar) and above. ■ Maximum pressure rating
of 300 PSI (20 bar).
l/min
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar
TP8001VK 100 0.32 0.39 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.64 0.68 0.71 0.75 0.78 0.81 0.84 0.87 0.90 0.93 0.96 0.98 1.01
TP80015VK 100 0.48 0.59 0.68 0.76 0.83 0.90 0.96 1.02 1.08 1.13 1.18 1.23 1.27 1.32 1.36 1.40 1.45 1.48 1.52
TP8002VK 50 0.65 0.79 0.91 1.02 1.12 1.21 1.29 1.37 1.44 1.51 1.58 1.64 1.71 1.77 1.82 1.88 1.94 1.99 2.04
XR8003VK 50 0.96 1.18 1.36 1.52 1.67 1.80 1.93 2.04 2.15 2.26 2.36 2.46 2.55 2.64 2.73 2.81 2.89 2.97 3.05
XR8004VK 50 1.29 1.58 1.82 2.04 2.23 2.41 2.58 2.74 2.88 3.03 3.16 3.29 3.41 3.53 3.65 3.76 3.87 3.98 4.08
XR8005VK 50 1.61 1.97 2.27 2.54 2.79 3.01 3.22 3.41 3.60 3.77 3.94 4.10 4.26 4.41 4.55 4.69 4.83 4.96 5.09
XR8006VK 50 1.94 2.37 2.74 3.06 3.35 3.62 3.87 4.10 4.33 4.54 4.74 4.93 5.12 5.30 5.47 5.64 5.81 5.96 6.12
XR8008VK 50 2.58 3.16 3.65 4.08 4.47 4.83 5.16 5.47 5.77 6.05 6.32 6.58 6.83 7.07 7.30 7.52 7.74 7.95 8.16
SPECIALTY NOZZLES 39
VisiFlo® Hollow Cone Spray Tips
Typical Assembly with Ceramic Disc and Core
Hollow Cone
Spray Pattern
TeeJet 4514-NY Core Disc CP20230 Produced by
Nozzle Body Slotted Strainer* TeeJet Cap
Cores #13, 23,
25, 45 & 46
*Use CP20229-NY gasket when 4514-NY Nylon slotted strainer is not used.
Hollow Cone Type Spray Tips

l/min
0.7 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 15 20 1 10 20
mm bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar
D1 DC13 0.79 — — 0.22 0.26 0.29 0.32 0.34 0.43 0.50 0.57 — 66° 68°
D1.5 DC13 0.91 — — 0.25 0.29 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.48 0.56 0.63 — 70° 72°
D2 DC13 1.0 — 0.22 0.29 0.33 0.37 0.41 0.44 0.53 0.63 0.70 41° 74° 75°
D3 DC13 1.2 — 0.24 0.30 0.35 0.41 0.44 0.48 0.59 0.68 0.77 45° 77° 78°
D4 DC13 1.6 0.27 0.31 0.40 0.47 0.53 0.59 0.63 0.76 0.89 1.0 64° 84° 85°
D1 DC23 0.79 — — 0.24 0.28 0.32 0.34 0.38 0.46 0.54 0.61 — 63° 65°
D1.5 DC23 0.91 — — 0.28 0.34 0.39 0.42 0.46 0.58 0.69 0.78 — 66° 67°
D2 DC23 1.0 — 0.28 0.37 0.43 0.49 0.53 0.57 0.70 0.83 0.93 43° 72° 72°
D3 DC23 1.2 0.25 0.29 0.39 0.46 0.52 0.58 0.62 0.78 0.93 1.1 56° 77° 77°
D4 DC23 1.6 0.32 0.37 0.51 0.61 0.70 0.77 0.83 1.1 1.3 1.4 62° 88° 88°
D5 DC23 2.0 0.37 0.44 0.59 0.72 0.82 0.91 0.98 1.3 1.5 1.7 73° 96° 95°
D6 DC23 2.4 0.42 0.50 0.69 0.83 0.95 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 79° 100° 99° CP26277-1-NY
D1 DC25 0.79 — — 0.33 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.54 0.69 0.83 0.95 — 49° 51° Quick TeeJet® Cap
D1.5 DC25 0.91 — — 0.45 0.53 0.61 0.67 0.73 0.91 1.1 1.2 — 54° 55° For ceramic disc and core.
D2 DC25 1.0 — 0.37 0.51 0.62 0.71 0.79 0.86 1.1 1.3 1.5 32° 61° 61° See page 57 for ordering information.
D3 DC25 1.2 0.39 0.45 0.63 0.75 0.86 0.95 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.8 47° 69° 69°
D4 DC25 1.6 0.57 0.68 0.94 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 63° 82° 82°
D5 DC25 2.0 0.64 0.81 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.4 2.9 3.3 70° 85° 84°
D6 DC25 2.4 0.87 1.0 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.2 3.8 4.4 77° 89° 88°
D7 DC25 2.8 1.0 1.2 1.7 2.0 2.3 2.6 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.1 83° 92° 91°
How to order:
D8 DC25 3.2 1.2 1.4 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.1 3.4 4.4 5.3 6.2 89° 96° 95°
To order orifice disc only, specify
D10 DC25 4.0 1.5 1.7 2.4 3.0 3.5 3.9 4.2 5.5 6.7 7.7 94° 102° 101°
disc number and material.
D12 DC25 4.8 1.8 2.2 3.0 3.7 4.3 4.8 5.2 6.7 8.2 9.5 101° 111° 110°
Examples:
D14 DC25 5.6 1.9 2.3 3.3 4.1 4.7 5.2 5.8 7.5 9.1 10.2 105° 113° 112°
D1 DC45 0.79 — — — 0.48 0.56 0.61 0.67 0.84 1.0 1.2 — 39° 40°
DCER-2 – Ceramic
D1.5 DC45 0.91 — — 0.53 0.64 0.74 0.81 0.90 1.1 1.4 1.7 — 48° 50° D2 – Hardened Stainless Steel
D2 DC45 1.0 — 0.43 0.66 0.80 0.91 1.0 1.1 1.4 1.7 2.0 26° 58° 58° DE-2 – Stainless Steel
D3 DC45 1.2 — 0.53 0.74 0.91 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.3 34° 62° 62° DVP-2 – Polymer
D4 DC45 1.6 0.67 0.80 1.1 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 3.1 3.6 59° 73° 72° To order core only, specify core
D5 DC45 2.0 0.87 1.0 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.3 2.5 3.2 3.9 4.5 63° 76° 75° number and material.
D6 DC45 2.4 1.1 1.3 1.9 2.3 2.7 3.0 3.3 4.3 5.3 6.1 70° 80° 79° Examples:
D7 DC45 2.8 1.3 1.5 2.2 2.7 3.1 3.5 3.9 5.0 6.2 7.2 78° 86° 85° DC13-CER – Ceramic
D8 DC45 3.2 1.6 1.9 2.7 3.3 3.9 4.3 4.8 6.2 7.6 8.9 84° 89° 88° DC13-HSS – Hardened Stainless Steel
D10 DC45 4.0 2.0 2.5 3.5 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.2 8.0 9.8 11.5 88° 92° 91°
DC13-AL – Aluminum
D12 DC45 4.8 2.5 3.1 4.4 5.3 6.2 6.9 7.6 9.8 12.1 14.0 95° 101° 100°
DC13 – Brass
D14 DC45 5.6 2.8 3.4 4.9 6.0 7.0 7.8 8.6 11.2 13.6 15.9 99° 104° 103°
DC13-NY – Nylon
D16 DC45 6.4 3.3 4.0 5.7 7.1 8.2 9.3 10.2 13.2 16.3 19.1 106° 111° 110°
D1 DC46 0.79 — — — 0.58 0.66 0.74 0.81 1.0 1.3 1.5 — 17° 17°
D1.5 DC46 0.91 — — — 0.84 0.97 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.1 — 18° 18°
D2 DC46 1.0 — — 0.89 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.5 — 20° 18°
D3 DC46 1.2 — — 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.8 2.3 2.8 3.2 — 23° 21°
D4 DC46 1.6 1.1 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.2 4.0 4.9 5.7 20° 32° 31°
STRAINER NOTE: For nozzles using orifice disc
D5 DC46 2.0 1.4 1.7 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.9 4.3 5.6 6.8 7.9 28° 41° 40°
numbers 1, 1.5 and 2; or core numbers 31 and
D6 DC46 2.4 2.1 2.5 3.6 4.4 5.0 5.7 6.2 8.0 9.8 11.4 38° 49° 47° 33, slotted strainer number 4514-20 equivalent
D7 DC46 2.8 — — 4.5 5.5 6.3 7.1 7.8 10.0 12.3 13.8 — 55° 53° to 25 mesh screen size is required. For all other
D8 DC46 3.2 — — 5.9 7.2 8.3 9.3 10.2 13.2 16.3 18.8 — 61° 59° larger capacity discs and cores, slotted strainer
number 4514-32 equivalent to 16 mesh screen
D10 DC46 4.0 — — 7.9 9.7 11.3 12.6 13.8 17.9 22 25 — 66° 64°
size is required.
40 SPECIALTY NOZZLES
Disc-Core Type Cone Spray Tips
For spraying pesticides at higher pressures ■ Produce smaller droplets for thorough
and flow rates. Especially suitable for coverage with contact pesticides and
wettable powders and other abrasive foliar applications.
chemicals. Larger capacity nozzles are ■ Maximum spray pressure
also used in air blast sprayers. to 300 PSI (20 bar).
Full Cone
Orifice Discs Spray Pattern
Available in a variety of sizes and materials. Ceramic Sizes Available: Produced by Cores
#31, 33, 35 & 56
Ceramic for increased wear life, hardened DCER-2 through DCER-8, DCER-10.
stainless steel, stainless steel and polymer.
Ceramic Hardened Stainless Polymer

Stainless Steel Steel
Cores
Standard cores are made of brass. Also Ceramic Sizes Available:
available in ceramic, hardened stainless DC13-CER, DC23-CER, DC25-CER,
steel, aluminum and Nylon. All cores with DC31-CER, DC33-CER, DC35-CER,
the exception of ceramic are made with DC45-CER, DC46-CER, DC56-CER.
rear “nibs.” Make sure core is always placed
with the nib facing the nozzle body.
Core
Ceramic Hardened Aluminum Brass Nylon CP18999 Seal

Stainless Steel
Full Cone Type Spray Tips

l/min
How to order:
To order orifice disc only, specify
mm
0.7 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 15 20 1 10 20 disc number and material.
bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar
Examples:
D1 DC31 0.79 0.31 0.36 0.49 0.59 0.67 0.74 0.80 1.0 1.2 1.4 42° 40° 38°
DCER-2 – Ceramic
D1.5 DC31 0.91 0.39 0.45 0.63 0.76 0.86 0.95 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.8 54° 46° 40°
D2 DC31 1.0 0.45 0.53 0.72 0.86 0.98 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 56° 54° 49°
D2 – Hardened Stainless Steel
D3 DC31 1.2 0.49 0.58 0.80 0.95 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.6 1.9 2.2 58° 67° 58° DE-2 – Stainless Steel
D1 DC33 0.79 0.32 0.36 0.46 0.56 0.64 0.71 0.78 0.98 1.2 1.4 24° 37° 37° DVP-2 – Polymer
D1.5 DC33 0.91 0.42 0.47 0.63 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.0 1.3 1.6 1.9 34° 46° 45° To order core only, specify core
D2 DC33 1.0 0.47 0.56 0.78 0.95 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.3 42° 55° 52° number and material.
D3 DC33 1.2 0.57 0.68 0.95 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.5 2.8 46° 57° 56° Examples:
D4 DC33 1.6 0.78 0.91 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.9 2.1 2.7 3.3 3.7 49° 63° 63° DC13-CER – Ceramic
D1 DC35 0.79 0.30 0.36 0.48 0.58 0.65 0.71 0.78 0.97 1.2 1.3 16° 27° 27° DC13-HSS – Hardened Stainless Steel
D1.5 DC35 0.91 0.41 0.47 0.63 0.76 0.85 0.94 1.0 1.3 1.5 1.7 19° 30° 30° DC13-AL – Aluminum
D2 DC35 1.0 0.53 0.62 0.83 0.99 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.7 2.0 2.2 38° 45° 40°
DC13 – Brass
D3 DC35 1.2 0.58 0.72 0.98 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 42° 48° 42°
DC13-NY – Nylon
D4 DC35 1.6 1.0 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.3 2.5 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.8 65° 68° 60°
CP18999-EPR Seal Gasket
D5 DC35 2.0 1.3 1.6 2.2 2.6 3.0 3.3 3.6 4.5 5.5 6.3 65° 69° 62°
D2 DC56 1.0 — — 0.80 0.98 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.8 2.2 2.5 — 18° 16°
D3 DC56 1.2 — — 1.1 1.3 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.4 3.0 3.4 — 24° 22°
D4 DC56 1.6 — 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.8 3.1 4.0 4.8 5.6 18° 30° 28°
STRAINER NOTE: For nozzles using orifice disc
D5 DC56 2.0 1.4 1.8 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.9 4.3 5.5 6.7 7.8 24° 35° 33° numbers 1, 1.5 and 2; or core numbers 31 and
D6 DC56 2.4 2.2 2.7 3.7 4.5 5.3 5.9 6.5 8.5 10.2 11.9 31° 40° 38° 33, slotted strainer number 4514-20 equivalent
D7 DC56 2.8 2.9 3.4 4.9 6.0 6.9 7.7 8.5 11.0 13.5 15.6 42° 53° 51° to 25 mesh screen size is required. For all other
larger capacity discs and cores, slotted strainer
D8 DC56 3.2 3.7 4.4 6.2 7.6 8.8 9.8 10.8 13.9 17.0 19.6 48° 58° 56°
number 4514-32 equivalent to 16 mesh screen
D10 DC56 4.0 5.1 6.1 8.6 10.6 12.2 13.6 15.0 19.3 24 27 57° 66° 64° size is required.
SPECIALTY NOZZLES 41
110-113 11/9/99 10:14 AM Page 110
STRAINERS
STRAINERS
A Tip Strainers
A Line Strainers
110-113 11/9/99 10:15 AM Page 111
STRAINERS
Tip Strainers
TeeJet Strainers
Strainers protect spray tip orifices from clog- TeeJet Slotted Strainers
ging and damage. Stainless steel screens in
24, 50, 100 and 200 mesh. Polypropylene One-piece strainers for use with liquids containing
screens available in 25 and 50 mesh only. suspended solids.
19845-PP
TeeJet Strainer Body & Mesh Screen TeeJet Available Equivalent to

Strainer Number Cap Material Material Strainer Number Material Mesh Size
5053* Brass Stainless Steel 4514-*-10 Brass or Nylon 50
8079-PP* Polypropylene Stainless Steel Brass, Aluminum
4514-*-20 25
5053-AL* Aluminum Stainless Steel or Nylon
6051-SS* Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Brass, Aluminum

4514-*-32 16
or Nylon
19845-PP* Polypropylene Polypropylene
*Above numbers for brass. For nylon add “NY”. For aluminum add “AL”.
*Specify mesh size when ordering.
4193A TeeJet Strainer

and Check Valve
TeeJet Strainers...with VisiFloT color-coding Minimizes nozzle dripping, fits all TeeJet nozzles. Ball
check opens at 5 PSI (0.35 bar). Recommended for
Nylon slotted and polypropylene wire mesh strainers are flow rates up to 0.8 GPM (3 l/min). 24, 50, 100 and 200
color-coded for easy identification of strainer mesh size. mesh screens.
Mesh Size Color Code Note: Use of these ball check valves results in a pressure
16 GREY drop of 5 to 10 PSI (0.35 to 0.7 bar) depending on spring rating.
24 WHITE Check Valve Body and Cap Mesh Screen
Number Screw Material Material
25 YELLOW
4193A- * - * Brass Stainless Steel
50 RED
4193A-AL- * - * Aluminum Stainless Steel
80 BLUE
4193A-SS- * - * Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
100 GREEN 4193A-PP- * - * Polypropylene Stainless Steel
200 ORANGE *When ordering, specify spring rating and screen mesh size.
Line Strainers
The AA122 line strainer features a compact size that is well-suited ⁄ 9 or 3⁄49 (F) NPT connections. The maximum pressure rating
12
for small agricultural and turf sprayers. The AA122 is constructed of is 150 PSI (10 bar).
polypropylene for excellent chemical resistance and is available in
AA122-PP Screens Approx. Flow Rate

Net Pressure
Compact Liquid Strainer Pipe
Mesh Part Full Area Weight
with 5 PSI
Rating
Strainer Number Connection Pressure Drop
Size Number (sq. in.) oz. (PSI)
in GPM
16 CP23174-1-SSPP
AA122-1⁄2-PP ⁄9
12
30 CP23174-2-SSPP 12
50 CP45102-3-SSPP 7.7 3.5 150
AA122-3⁄4-PP ⁄9
34 80 CP45102-4-SSPP 16
100 CP45102-5-SSPP
Available in BSPT.
STRAINERS 111
110-113 11/9/99 10:15 AM Page 112
STRAINERS
Line Strainers
The AA122ML line strainer features a compact size that is screen for excellent chemical resistance and is available in 1⁄29 or
well-suited for small agricultural and turf sprayers. The AA122ML ⁄ 9 (F) NPT pipe connection. It also includes M6x1 metric thread
34
is constructed of polypropylene head and bowl with stainless steel mounting connections. Maximum pressure rating 150 PSI (10 bar).
AA122 ML Screens Approx. Flow Rate

Net Pressure
Compact Liquid Strainer Pipe with 5 PSI
Mesh Part Full Area Weight Rating
Number Conn. Pressure Drop
Strainer Size Number (sq. in.) (oz.)
in GPM
(PSI)
16 CP23174-1-304SS
AA122ML-1⁄2-PP-* 1
⁄29 30 CP23174-2-304SS 12
50 CP45102-3-SSPP 7.7 3.5 150
AA122ML-3⁄4-PP-* 3
⁄49 80 CP45102-4-SSPP 16
100 CP45102-5-SSPP
* = Mesh Size Available in BSPT.
Strainer heads are available in polypropylene, nylon, aluminum VitonT o-ring seal supplied with 3⁄49 and 19 nylon models; EPDM
and cast iron. Bowl materials include polypropylene or nylon. supplied with 3⁄49 and 19 polypropylene models; Buna-N gaskets
Each strainer includes stainless steel screen (with polypropylene supplied with 11⁄49 and 11⁄29 sizes. VitonT optional.
frames on 3⁄49 to 11⁄29 sizes). Maximum temperatures up to 100°F.
AA124A-NYB Screens Approx. Flow Rate

Net Pressure
(Nylon) Strainer Pipe with 5 PSI
Size Number (sq. in.) (lbs.) (PSI)
in GPM
AA124A- ⁄ -AL-*
34
1 150
AA124A-3⁄4-NYB-* ⁄9
34
16 CP16903-1-SSPP 23 110
0.6
AA124A-3⁄4-PP-* 30 CP16903-3-SSPP 75
17
AA124A-1-AL-* 50 CP16903-4-SSPP 1 150
AA124A-1-NYB-* 19 80 CP16903-5-SSPP 34 110
0.6
AA124A-1-PP-* 75
AA124-NYB Screens Approx. Flow Rate

Net Pressure
(Nylon) Strainer Pipe with 5 PSI
in GPM
AA124-11⁄4-AL-* 2.5 150
11⁄49 16 CP15941-1-SSPP 60
AA124-11⁄4-NYB-* 30 CP15941-2-SSPP 1.25 75
41
AA124-11⁄2-AL-* 50 CP15941-3-SSPP 2.5 150
11⁄29 80 CP15941-4-SSPP 70
AA124-11⁄2-NYB-* 1.25 75
AA124-2-AL-* 16 CP14634-1-SS 160 150
29 30 CP14634-2-SS 91 7
50 CP14634-3-SS
AA124-21⁄2-AL-* 21⁄29 80 CP14634-4-SS 170 150
AA124ML-AL Screens Approx. Flow Rate

Net Pressure
(with mounting holes) Strainer Pipe with 5 PSI
in GPM
AA124ML-3⁄4-AL-* ⁄9
34 16 CP16903-1-SSPP 23
30 CP16903-3-SSPP 150
50 CP16903-4-SSPP 17 1
AA124ML-1-AL-* 19 80 CP16903-5-SSPP 34
AA124ML-11⁄4-AL-* 11⁄49 16 CP15941-1-SSPP 60

30 CP15941-2-SSPP 41 2.5
50 CP15941-3-SSPP
AA124ML-1 ⁄ -AL-*
12
1⁄9
12
80 CP15941-4-SSPP 70
16 CP14634-1-SS 150
AA124ML-2-AL-* 29 160
30 CP14634-2-SS
50 CP14634-3-SS 91 7
AA124ML-21⁄2-AL-* 21⁄29 80 CP14634-4-SS 170
How to order:
Specify strainer no., mesh size, material. To order screen only, specify screen no.
Example: AA124-11⁄4-NYB-16 Nylon Example: CP15941-1-SSPP
112 STRAINERS
110-113 11/9/99 10:15 AM Page 113
STRAINERS
Flush-Out Strainer The 37270-122-PP flush-out strainer the screen may be periodically flushed
features a compact size that is well suited by opening a valve (valve not included)
37270-122-PP for small agricultural and turf sprayers. The in flush-out line. Maximum pressure rating
37270-122-PP is constructed of polypropy- 150 PSI (10 bar).
lene head and bowl with stainless steel
screen for excellent chemical resistance How to order:
and is available in 1⁄29 or 3⁄49 (F) NPT pipe Specify strainer no., mesh size.
connection. The particles collected on Example: 37270-122-1⁄2-NYB-16
Screens Approx. Flow Rate
Net Pressure
Strainer Pipe with 5 PSI
Size Number (sq. in.) oz. (PSI)
in GPM
16 CP23174-1-304SS
37270-122-1⁄2-PP-* 1
⁄29 30 CP23174-2-304SS 12
50 CP45102-3-SSPP 7.7 3.5 150
37270-122-3⁄4-PP-* 34
⁄9 80 CP45102-4-SSPP 16
100 CP45102-5-SSPP
Self-Cleaning Line Strainers

The TeeJet self-cleaning strainer extends The tapered inner cylinder inside the entire
your spraying time with a self-cleaning length of the screen provides a gap Liquid Liquid
Inlet Outlet
feature that minimizes clogging. Mounted between the screen face and the cylinder.
on the discharge side of the pump, the This gap causes the inlet fluid to flow at a
strainer uses excess pump flow to bypass high velocity past the screen face providing
clogging particles back to the spray tank. for a continuous washdown of particles to
the bypass line. In order for the washdown High velocity of liquid
Available in 3⁄49, 19, 11⁄49 and 11⁄29 nylon and stream between
to occur, a minimum flow rate of 6 GPM/23
aluminum, as well as 3⁄49 and 19 polypropy- cylinder and screen
l/min (3⁄49 and 19 size) and 8 GPM/30 l/min provides continuous
lene NPT or BSPT threads. All stainless
(11⁄49 and 11⁄29 size) is required through the washdown of particles
steel strainer element. Strainers with
bypass line. to bypass line.
mounting lugs are designated by “ML”.
AA124A-SC-PP Material Minimum

Size
(Polypropylene) Strainer Pipe Screen Screen Part Full Area Max. Bypass
of Pressure
Number Conn. Mesh Number Required
Head Bowl Opening (sq. in.) (PSI)
(GPM)
AA124A-SC-NYB
AA124A-3⁄4-SC-NYB-* Nylon Nylon 110
(Nylon)
AA124A-3⁄4-SC-PP-* ⁄9
34
Polypropylene Polypropylene 75
16 CP12285-1-SS 1.2 mm
AA124A-3⁄4-SC-AL-* Aluminum Nylon 30 CP12285-4-SS 0.56 mm 150
17 6
AA124A-1-SC-NYB-* Nylon Nylon 50 CP12285-2-SS 0.28 mm 110
80 CP12285-3-SS 0.18 mm
AA124A-1-SC-PP-* 19 Polypropylene Polypropylene 75
AA124A-1-SC-AL-* Aluminum Nylon 150
AA124-11⁄4-SC-NYB-* Nylon Nylon 75
11⁄49 16 CP12290-1-SS 1.2 mm
AA124-11⁄4-SC-AL-* Aluminum Nylon 30 CP12290-2-SS 0.56 mm 150
41 8
AA124-11⁄2-SC-NYB-* Nylon Nylon 50 CP12290-3-SS 0.28 mm 75
11⁄29 80 CP12290-4-SS 0.18 mm
AA124-11⁄2-SC-AL-* Aluminum Nylon 150
Material Minimum
Size
AA124ML-SC-AL Strainer Pipe Screen Screen Part Full Area Max. Bypass
of Pressure
(Aluminum) Number Conn. Head Bowl Mesh Number (sq. in.) Required
Opening (PSI)
(GPM)
AA124ML-3⁄4-SC-AL-* ⁄9
34 16 CP12285-1-SS 1.2 mm
30 CP12285-4-SS 0.56 mm
50 CP12285-2-SS 0.28 mm 17 6
AA124ML-1-SC-AL-* 19 Aluminum Nylon 80 CP12285-3-SS 0.18 mm
150
AA124ML-11⁄4-SC-AL-* 11⁄49 16 CP12290-1-SS 1.2 mm
30 CP12290-2-SS 0.56 mm 41 8
50 CP12290-3-SS 0.28 mm
AA124ML-11⁄2-SC-AL-* 11⁄29 80 CP12290-4-SS 0.18 mm
How to order:
Specify strainer no., mesh size, material. To order screen only, specify screen no.
Example: AA124ML-11⁄4-SC-NYB-16 Nylon Example: CP12285-1-SS
STRAINERS 113
FILTRO PULIDOR MODELO “3 x 9”
POS PARTE No CANT. DESCRIPCION

1 FL-009 1 MANOMETRO
2 FL-001 1 TAPA DEL FILTRO
3 FL-003 1 JUNTA
4 FL-004 3 TUERCA
5 FL-007 27 ELEMENTO FILTRANTE
6 FL-002 3 GUIA
7 FL-010 1 VALVULA DE ALIVIO
8 FL-005 9 OPRESOR
9 FL-006 18 SEPARADOR
10 FL-008 1 CUERPO DEL FILTRO
11 FL-012 9 GUIA OPRESORA
HOJA No. 1
Interruptores termomagnéticos tipos ED2, QJ2,
CQD, ED4, ED6 FXD6, JXD6, LXD6, LMXD6, NXD6 3
Inversión y seguridad
Protección Confiable
• Protección contra cortocircuito ajustable y sin

escalonamiento y respuesta al disparo sin
retardo.
• Protección contra sobrecarga fija de

respuesta con retardo de tiempo inverso.
• ED2 y QJ2: Capacidad interruptiva simétrica

de 10 KA (240, 60 HZ).
• ED6,FXD6,JXD6, LXD6, LMXD6, NXD6:

Capacidad interruptiv simétrica desde 25 kA
hasta 50kA (480V, 60 Hz) y desde 18 kA hasta
25 kA (600 V, 60 Hz)
• Temperatura ambiente admisible de

-20 hasta +55°C.

diferencia!
Normas
NMX-J 266
IEC 947-2
Siemens 109
Interruptores termomagnéticos tipos
ED2, QJ2, CQD, ED4, ED6 FXD6, JXD6, LXD6, LMXD6, NXD6
Generalidades
Los Interruptores Termomagnéticos Siemens, Los interruptores del tipo ED6, con corrientes Los interruptores LXD6 de 500 y 600 A de
protegen circuitos y aparatos en instalaciones nominales desde 15 hasta 125A, tienen corriente nominal, de nuevo diseño y marco
eléctricas residenciales, comerciales e importantes aplicaciones en combinación con compacto y ahorran espacio y estan diseñados
industriales contra sobrecarga y cortocircuitos. arrancadores, para centro de control de con disparadores intercambiables. Sus aplica-
Todos los interruptores Siemens tienen un motores, interconexión de barras colectoras ciones son adecuadas tanto para centro de
mecanismo de operación de característica (bus), así como en tableros de control para control de motores como para tableros de
cierre-apertura (rápido). La interrupción por protección de circuitos de distribución y distribución y potencia.
disparo libre, permite (cuando exista la potencia, tableros de control de máquinas-
incidencia de sobrecarga sostenida o falla de herramienta. Los interruptores tipo LMXD6 de 700 y 800 A
cortocircuito) que prevalezca la operación de corriente nominal, tiene su adecuada
automática de apertura sobre la operación de Los interruptores FXD6, con corrientes aplicación como interruptor principal en la
cierre. La posición de la manija muestra al nominales de 150 hasta 250 A, proporcionan protección de alimentadores principales, en
dispararse el efecto de la interrupción, una gran confiabilidad para aplicaciones en tableros generales de distribución y potencia,
cualquier falla que ocurra en algún polo, instalaciones industriales y comerciales, en interruptores de transferencia y en centros de
operará al mecanismo tripolar, efectuando la centro de control para motores, tableros de control de motores.
apertura simultanea en las tres fases. distribución y control. Los interruptores de
tipo JXD6, de 300 y 400 A, estan diseñados Los interruptores tipo NXD6 con corrientes
Aplicaciones principalmente para ser utilizados en tableros nominales de 1 000 y 1 200 A, tienen su
de distribución y potencia, tableros de principal aplicación como interruptores
Los interruptores tipo ED2 y CQD, con soldadoras por resistencia, tableros de generales en alimentadores y en tableros de
corrientes nominales desde 15 hasta 100A, distribución general, centros de control de distribución y control.
tienen importantes aplicaciones en motores.
combinación con arrancadores, centros de
control de motores, tableros de distribución y Por su característica de disparadores no
control, protección en máquinas y intercambiables, permiten la alimentación por
herramientas, así como en la protección de la parte inferior sin menoscabo de la
circuitos de distribición y fuerza. capacidad interruptiva.
110 Siemens
Tabla de selección
Marco Corriente nominal Rango de disparo instantáneo Interruptor tipo No. Catálogo No. Catálogo Peso Aprox.
ED2 15
A mínimo máximo completo
ED23B015
anterior
3000 4481
actual
A7B10000002704
Kg
1,72
3
3 polos 20 ED23B020 3000 4482 A7B10000002705
240 V.c.a. 30 ED23B030 3000 4483 A7B10000002706
40 ED23B040 3000 4484 A7B10000002707
50 ED23B050 3000 4485 A7B10000002708
60 ED23B060 3000 4486 A7B10000002709
70 ED23B070 3000 4487 A7B10000002710
100 ED23B100 3000 4488 A7B10000002711
QJ2 70 QJ23B070 4000 1346 A7B10000001517 2,0
3 polos 100 QJ23B100 4000 1347 A7B10000001520
240 V.c.a. 100 QJ23B100 4002 2057 A7B10000001522
150 QJ23B150 4000 1348 A7B10000001523
200 QJ23B200 4001 5363 A7B10000001525
225 QJ23B225 4000 1350 A7B10000001526
CQD 15 CQD315 4000 1429 A7B10000001146 1,0
3 polos 20 CQD320 4000 1430 A7B10000001147
220/440 V.c.a. 30 CQD330 4000 1431 A7B10000001148
40 CQD340 4000 1432 A7B10000001149
50 CQD350 4000 1433 A7B10000001150
70 CQD370 4000 1434 A7B10000001151
100 CQD3100 4000 1435 A7B10000001145
ED4 , 15 ED43B015 3001 0892 A7B10000002712
3 polos 20 ED43B020 3001 0893 A7B10000002713
240/480Vc.a. 30 ED43B030 3001 0894 A7B10000002714
40 ED43B040 3001 0895 A7B10000002715
50 ED43B050 3001 0896 A7B10000002716
70 ED43B070 3001 0897 A7B10000002717
100 ED43B100 3001 0898 A7B10000002718
125 ED43B125 3001 0899 A7B10000002719
ED6 15 ED63B015 3000 4489 A7B10000002720 1,72

3 polos 20 ED63B020 3000 4490 A7B10000002721
600 V.c.a. 30 ED63B030 3000 4491 A7B10000002722
500 V.c.c. 40 ED63B040 3000 4492 A7B10000002723
50 ED63B050 3000 4493 A7B10000002724
70 ED63B070 3000 4494 A7B10000002725
100 ED63B100 3000 4495 A7B10000002726
125 ED63B125 3000 4496 A7B10000002727
FXD6 150 800 1 500 FXD63B150 4000 1336 A7B10000001245 4,55
3 polos 175 900 2 000 FXD63B175 4000 1594 A7B10000001246
600 V.c.a. 200 900 2 000 FXD63B200 4000 1595 A7B10000001247
500 V.c.c. 225 1 100 2 500 FXD63B225 4000 1596 A7B10000001249
250 1 100 2 500 FXD63B250 4000 1597 A7B10000001251
JXD6 300 1 250 2 500 JXD63B300 4000 1598 A7B10000001404 8,85
3 polos 400 2 000 4 000 JXD63B400 4000 1599 A7B10000001405
600 V.c.a.
500 V.c.c.
LXD6 500 3 000 6 000 LXD63B500 4000 1600 A7B10000001421 8,85
3 polos 600 3 000 6 000 LXD63B600 4000 1601 A7B10000001422
600 V.c.a.
500 V.c.c.
LMXD6 700 4 000 8 000 LMXD63B700 4000 1351 A7B10000001417 27,90
3 polos 800 4 000 8 000 LMXD63B800 4000 1352 A7B10000001418
600 V.c.a.
500 V.c.c.
NXD6 1 000 5 000 10 000 * ND63B100 4000 1339 A7B10000001472 27,90
3 polos 1 200 5 000 10 000 * ND63B120 4000 1340 A7B10000001473
600 V.c.a.
600 V.c.a..
Datos Técnicos
Marco tamaño / tipo ED2 QJ2 CQ2 ED4 ED6 FXD6 JXD6 LXD6 LMXD6 ND6
Max. corriente nominal (In max) a 40°C 60 Hz 100 225 100 125 250 400 600 800 1200
Capacidad interruptiva UL 240V 10 000 A 10 000 A 65 000 A 6500A 65 000 A 65 000 A 65 000 A 65 000 A 65 000 A 65 000 A
Amperes Simétricos RMS 480V 14 000 A 14000A 25 000 A 35 000 A 35 000 A 35 000 A 50 000 A 50 000 A
600V 18 000 A 18 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A 25 000 A
NOTA: La operación automatica de todos los interruptores arriba indicados, se realiza por medio de los dispositivos térmicos y magnéticos, localizados en cada polo y
poseen características de disparo con retardo de tiempo inverso y disparo instantáneo para la protección de circuitos. Los interruptores han sido calibrados para llevar
al 100% de su corriente nominal y a una temperatura ambiente de 40°C. El disparo magnético instantáneo, se ajusta en forma fácil y accesible, desde el frente del
interruptor para los marcos con corriente nominal de 250 A y mayores.
* Sin ensamblar
Siemens 111
Curvas características de disparo
Los valores indicados para los tiempos de

disparo son promedios del margen de
reacción, en estado frío y encontrándose
sometidas a la misma carga las 3 cintas
bimetálicas.
De acuerdo con VDE 0660, la corriente de

reacción, en caso de carga bipolar, puede
elevarse hasta el 10%, y hasta el 20% si la
carga es unipolar. Por lo tanto, en la
maniobra en uno o dos polos, las vías de
corriente se conectarán en serie.
A la temperatura de servicio, los tiempos de

disparo disminuyen hasta en un 25%.
Dimensiones en mm.
Tipo A B C D G1 G2 A1 B2
CQD 123,7 76,2 73,1 87,4 10,0 26,0 32,0 38,10
ED2/ED6/ED4 160,7 76,2 101,6 115,8 20,8 55,8 34,80 38,10
FXD6 241,3 113,7 101,6 115,8 52,3 76,4 91,95 56,85
JXD6/LXD6 279,4 190,0 101,6 115,8 73,15 76,45 113,54 95,0
LMXD6 406,40 190,50 114,30 150,62 91,4 113,03 165,10 95,25
NXD6 228,60 152,40 209,40 114,30
112 Siemens
Interruptores en gabinetes metálicos
Tabla de selección
Los interruptores ED2, ED4, ED6, FXD6,JXD6, LXD6, MD6 y ND6, en gabinetes metálicos, son adecuados para proteger cables, tableros y
motores contra efectos de corto circuito contra sobrecargas sostenidas; la protección mecánica del gabinete metálico cumple con lo indicado en
la Norma Nacional NMX-J-235 (Tipo 1) y la Norma Internacional IEC 529 (IP21) caja de usos generales.
3
Tipo Caja P/int. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N P1 P2 Número de Número de
catálogo anterior catálogo actual
S301 ED2/ED6/ED4 1
S201 CQD 35 5 110 20 22 133 223 356 230 113 113 100 43 43 21 56 4002 4095 A7B93000001250
S421 FXD6 108 4 85 20 63 125 180 305 220 110 110 130 31 40 75 60 3001 1691 A7B10000002867
S701 JXD6 135 5 110 20 22 230 290 520 230 113 113 130 43 43 53 77 4003 3737 A7B93000001343
LXD6 210 5 185 20 22 320 380 700 400 200 200 200 43 100 74 77 4003 3738 A7B93000001344
S1200 MD6
ND6 305 5 280 20 22 590 610 1200 600 300 300 300 43 150 92 114 3001 3088 A7B10000002869
S801 LMXD6
3001 3962 A7B10000002870
Dimensiones
Vista Frontal Vista Lateral
Siemens 113
Lámparas indicadoras 3SL1
Para tensiones de hasta 400 V con

bases roscadas E-14
Descripción Las lámparas indicadoras 3SL1 son

Las lámparas indicadoras están resistentes a los efectos del clima, es
compuestas porla base roscada con decir, pueden emplearse incluso en
la pieza de sujeción y lente completo. lugares donde la humedad del aire sea
En su aspecto exteriory dimensiones, superior al 80% y tengan lugar
las lámparas indicadoras son parecidas condensaciones frecuentes.
a los pulsadores de control.
El lente está protegido contra polvo y
chorros de agua (clase de protección
IP65).
Para fijación en la placa Base roscada E 14 Las placas indicadoras

frontal y empalme de los con pieza de sujeción. y los focos se solicitarán
conductores por la parte
posterior. Lente completo.
porseparado.
4
Placa indicadora.
Base roscada
con pieza de
sujeción.
Lente completo.
Orificios de sujeción y perforaciones de montaje para lámparas indicadoras 3SL1
Dimensiones en milímetros
* Distancia mínima para el montaje de varias

lámparas indicadoras 3SL 10.
Siemens 4/9
Lámparas indicadoras 3SL1
Las lámparas indicadoras se suministran siempre completas.

Las placas indicadoras y los focos se solicitan por separado.
Tabla de selección
Ilustración Material Color del lente Tipo Catálogo Peso
e inscripción No. neto Kg
de la placa
Lámpara indicadora rojo 3SL1020 3000 4892 0,07

para fijación en la placa verde 3SL1021 3000 4893
frontal. blanco 3SL1025 3000 4894
ámbar 3SL1022 3000 4895
Focos
incandescentes 24 V 3SX1324 40000 0584 0,003
6W 115 V 3SX1327 40000 0585
220 V 3SX1333 40000 1569
Focos de gas 440 V 5PG1030 40000 1570
Placas indicadoras Conectar - 4000 0578 0,001

Desconectar
Parar - 4000 1568
Arrancar
Adelante - 4000 0568
Reversa
Sobrecarga 4000 0570
Montaje y dimensiones Dimensiones en milímetros
Fijación en la placa frontal
Conexión por la parte posterior. Base roscada E 14
Si se emplean lámparas indicadoras con placa, el anillo de junta debe colocarse debajo de la placa.
4/10 Siemens
Relevadores de sobrecarga
bimetálicos SIRIUS 3RU y electrónicos 3RB 1
Alta calidad y confiabilidad
¡En la protección de sobrecarga,

lo más versatil!
• Compensación automática de temperatura

ambiente desde -20 hasta +55°C.
• Protección para efectos contra sobrecarga

y falla de fase en las tres vías de corriente.
• Corriente de disparo de fácil selección,

dentro de amplio margen de ajuste.
• Fácil selección de restablecimiento:

automático o manual.
• Contacto auxiliar de conmutación o

normalmente abierto, para señalización.
• Instalación directa a los contactores o por

separado (con pieza de soporte).
• Fácil y segura conexión (guía del

destornillador en cada terminal
perfectamente identificada).
• Seguridad en el servicio.
• Sencillez en su manejo.
• Compacto en su forma.

diferencia!
Normas:
IEC publicación 292
VDE 0660
NMX-J-290
Siemens 37
Relevadores bimetálicos trifásicos SIRIUS 3RU
para tiempos de disparo hasta 10s (clase 10)
Descripción
Prescripciones Contactos auxiliares Función TEST

e indicación del estado de conexión
IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1 y DIN VDE 0660. Los relés de sobrecarga están equipados con
Los relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 son un contacto NC para la desconexión del La indicación del estado de conexión sirve al
resistentes a los efectos del clima. contactor y con un contacto NA para el aviso mismo tiempo como función TEST. Al
Los aparatos están asegurados contra de disparo. accionarse, se simula un disparo del relé de
contactos involuntarios según DIN VDE 0106, Los contactos tienen una alta capacidad de sobrecarga.
parte 100. conexión con las bobinas de los contactores. Ambos interruptores auxiliares son
accionados y el estado de conexión aparece
Generalidades Clase de disparo indicado.
Los relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 forman parte La clase de disparo es CLASS 10, es decir, se Borne de repetición de bobina y de
de la nueva generación de aparatos de puede emplear para los arranques de motor contactos auxiliares
control SIRIUS 3R. Se pueden adquirir en de hasta 10 s.
cuatro tamaños diferentes para hasta 100 A. Con los relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 16
Los relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 relevan a los Sensibilidad a la caída de fase (tamaño S00) los bornes de repetición de
exitosos aparatos 3UA5. Una estabilidad a contactos auxiliares y de bobina A2 del
largo plazo y una vida útil duradera Como protección contra sobrecarga en caso contactor son pasados en el montaje directo
caracterizan estos aparatos. Los relés de de fallo de fase se encuentra integrado un al contactor, obteniéndose una considerable
sobrecarga están óptimamente armonizados dispositivo de sensibilidad al fallo de fase, es simplificación en el cableado. Con los
eléctrica y mecánicamente con los decir, un disparo prematuro cuando la aparatos de los tamaños S0 hasta S3 ello no
contactores 3RT10. No obstante, también se marcha sea en dos fases. es necesario, ya que los contactores están
pueden instalar por separado con un soporte equipados con 4 bornes de conexión de
de conexión para el montaje independiente. Regulación del relé de sobrecarga bobinas.
Los aparatos hasta el tamaño SO se pueden
montar sobre perfiles, y desmontarse, sin Tras la apertura de la tapa transparente Accesorios
necesidad de utilizar herramientas. precintable, el tornillo de ajuste de intensidad
Los relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 no se pueden queda accesible. El relé de sobrecarga se debe Los accesorios son unitariamente aplicables
montar en los contactores 3TB y 3TF. ajustar a la intensidad asignada del motor. en todos los tamaños.
Medio ambiente Función STOP - un RESET a distancia eléctrico en distintas

variantes de tensión.
Los aparatos sólo contienen materiales El accionamiento sólo tiene efecto sobre el
reciclables que no perjudican al medio contacto NC. - un RESET a distancia mecánico compuesto
ambiente. Su producción tampoco perjudica por un vástago, un embudo y un soporte para
al medio ambiente. Selección manual/automática el accionamiento de la puerta del tablero con
un pulsador 3SB1.
Empleo Con la tecla azul se puede seleccionar la
posición automática o manual. - un disparador por cable de RESET para
Los relés de sobrecarga térmicos 3RU11 están aparatos de difícil acceso.
concebidos para la protección contra
sobrecargas de motores trifásicos con una
1 Plaquita de características
intensidad nominal de hasta 100 A (45 kW,
2 Conmutador selector RESET
AC-3, 400 V).
manual/automático
Como protección contra cortocircuito se
3 Tecla STOP
deberán prever unos fusibles o los inte-
4 N˚ de pedido completo en el frontal del
rruptores automáticos para combinaciones aparato
1
de arranque 3RV10 (véase guardamotores
5 Indicación del estado de conexión y
3RV10). 5 función de prueba TEST
2
6 6 Cubierta transparente precintable (para
Condiciones del ambiente 3 7 proteger el tornillo de ajuste de la
intensidad, la función TEST y el
Gracias a los nuevos bimetales y a la posicionamiento de RESET
8
permanente compensación de temperatura, manual/automático)
los aparatos se pueden emplear sin 4 7 Tornillo de ajuste de la intensidad
restricciones en una temperatura ambiente 9 8 Borne de repeticion de bobina
de hasta 60 ˚C. (con montaje a contactor)
9 Borne de repetición de contactos
auxiliares (con montaje a contactor)
Relé de sobrecarga 3RU11
38 Siemens
Descripción
Curvas características de disparo
Las curvas características intensidad-tiempo 1

muestran la dependencia del tiempo de
disparo partiendo del estado frío del múltiplo
de la intensidad de ajuste Ie En un relé con
temperatura de empleo, precargado con 1 x
Ie, los tiempos de disparo quedan reducidos
aprox. a un 25%. Para la carga monopolar, las
curvas de disparo se encuentran entre las
curvas características. Durante el
funcionamiento normal se deberán calentar
las 3 tiras bimetálicas del relé de sobrecarga.
Los relés de sobrecarga 3RU son apropiados
para la protección de motores con control del
corte de fases.
Para la protección de consumidores
monofásicos o de corriente continua se
deberán conectar en serie todas las tres vías
de corriente principales.
La intensidad de disparo límite con carga
simétrica tripolar se sitúa entre 105% y 120%
de la intensidad de ajuste.
Clases de disparo de los relés de

sobrecarga térmicos, retardados
magnéticos o electrónicos - Extracto de
IEC 947-4
Clase de disparo Tiempo de disparo tA en

segundos con 7,2 x Ie
partiendo del estado frío
10A 2< tA ≤10

10 4< tA ≤10
20 6< tA ≤20
30 9< tA ≤30 Representación de principio de la curva característica intensidad-tiempo
Esquema de conexión
1 polo 2 polos
Esquema de conexión de los aparatos
Relé de sobrecarga 3RU11 16 Relé de sobrecarga 3RU11 2 hasta 3RU11 4
Siemens 39
Datos técnicos según IEC 947-4-1 e IEC 947-5-1

Tipo 3RU11 16-.... 3RU11 26-.... 3RU11 36-.... 3RU11 46-....
Tamaño S00 S0 S2 S3
Indicación del estado de conexión sí
Función de prueba TEST sí
Tecla STOP sí
Borne de repetición de bobina sí no es necesario
Borne de repetición de contactos auxiliares sí no es necesario
Grado de protacción Según IEC 529/DIN VDE 0470, parte 1 IP 20 IP 20 IP 201) IP 201)
Protección contra contactos involuntarios Según DIN VDE 0106, parte 100 A prueba de contacto involuntario con los dedos
Resistencia al choque senoidal Según IEC 68, parte 2-27 g/ms 8/10 8/10 8/10 8/10
Circuito principal
Tensión asignada de aislamiento Ui (grado 3 de ensuciamiento) V 690 690 690
Tensión asignada soportada al impulso Uimp kV 6 6 8
Tipo de corriente Corriente continua, corriente alterna
Seccionamiento seguro entre Según DIN VDE 0106, parte 101 V 400
vías de corriente auxiliares y principales
Intensidad de ajuste A 0,11-0,16 1,8-2,5 5,5-8 18-25
hasta 9-12 hasta 20-25 hasta 40-50 hasta 80-100
Potencia disipada por aparato (máx.) W 3,9 hasta 6,6 3,9 hasta 6 6 hasta 9 10 hasta 16,5
Protección contra cortocircuitos sólo relés de sobrecarga Véase datos para selección y pedido
con fusibles junto con contactor Véase tabla en la página...
Sección de conexión del circuito principal
Tipo de conexión Conexión por tornillo Borne de caja 4 mm
Tornillo de conexión Pozidriv tam. 2 Pozidriv tam. 2 hexágono interior
Secciónes de conexión mínimas/máximas flexibles con manguito 1 condutor mm2 0,5/2,5 1/6 0,75/25 2,5/50
2 conductores mm2 0,5/2,5 1/2,5 ó 2,5/6 0,75/16 2,5/35
unifilar o multifilar 1 condutor mm2 0,5/42) 1/6 (máx. 10) 0,75/35 2,5/70
2 conductores mm2 0,75/42) 1/2,5 ó 2,5/6 0,75/25 2,5/50
cables AWG, unifilares o multifilares 2 X AWG 18 hasta 14 14 hasta 10 18 hasta 2 10 hasta 1/0
Borne da caja desmontable conexiones por pletinas – – – sí
Circuito auxiliar
Contactos auxiliares 1 NA + NC
Capacidad de carga de los contactos
Con corriente alterna AC-14/AC-15 tensión asignada de empleo Ue V 24 230 400 600
intensidad asignada de empleo Ie NC A 4 3 1,5 0,6
NC A 2,2 1,5 0,8 0,6
con corriente continua DC-13 tensión asignada de empleo Ue V 24 110 220

intensidad asignada de empleo Ie A 1 0,15 0.1
Los contactores son aptos para autómatas
Fiabilidad de los contactos programables PLC (17 V, 5 mA)
Protección contra cortocircuitos
Cartuchos fusibles Clase de servicio gL/gG A 6
rápidos A 10
Interruptor de protección de línea en característica C A 63)
Tensión asignada de aislamiento Ui (grado 3 de ensuciamiento) V 690
Tensión asignada soportada al impulso Uimp kV 6
Seccionamiento seguro entre vías de corriente auxiliares según DIN VDE 0106, parte 101 V 400
Secciones de conexión del circuito auxiliar
Tipo de conexión Conexión por tornillo Conexión por resorte (Cage Clamp)
Tornillo de conexión Pozidriv tam. 2 –
Secciones de conexión mínimas/máximas Flexibles con manguito 1 condutor mm2 0,5/2,5 0,5/2,5
2 conductores mm2 0,5/2,5 0,5/2,5
unifilar o multifilar 1 condutor mm2 0,5/42) 0,5/2,5
2 conductores mm2 0,75/42) 0,5/2,5
Soporte de conexión para montaje independiente
para fijación por tornillo o por abroche sobre perfil de 35 mm, tamaño S3 también sobre perfil de 75 mm
Tipo 3RU19 16-3AA01 3RU19 26-3AA01 3RU19 36-3AA01 3RU19 46-3AA01
Para relés de sobrecarga 3RU11 16-.... 3RU11 26-.... 3RU11 36-.... 3RU11 46-....
Secciones de conexión del circuito principal
Tipo de conexión Conexión por tornillo Borne de caja 4 mm
Tornillo de conexión Pozidriv tam. 2 Pozidriv tam. 2 hexágono interior
Secciones de conexión mínimas/máximas Flexibles con manguito 1 condutor mm2 0,5/2,5 1/6 0,75/25 2,5/50
unifilar o multifilar 1 condutor mm2 0,5/42) 1/6 0,75/25 2,5/70
cables AWG, unifilar o multifilar 1 x AWG 18 hasta 14 14 hasta 10 18 hasta 2 10 hasta 1/0
1) Espacio de conexión: grado de protección IP 00.
2) No según IEC.
3) Hasta Ik ≤ 0,5 kA; ≤ 260 V.
40 Siemens
Tabla de selección
Relevadores bimetálicos Tamaño Tipo Alcance de Número de Número de Peso kg
regulación catálogo catálogo
A anterior actual 1
S00 3RU1116 - 0JB0 0,7 - 1,0 40015144 3RU11160JB0 0,12
3RU1116 - 1AB0 1,1 - 1,6 40015145 3RU11161AB0
3RU1116 - 1BB0 1,4 - 2,0 40016874 3RU11161BB0
3RU1116 - 1CB0 1,8 - 2,5 40015146 3RU11161CB0
3RU1116 - 1DB0 2,2 - 3,2 40016875 3RU11161DB0
3RU1116 - 1EB0 2,8 - 4,0 40015161 3RU11161EB0
3RU1116 - 1FB0 3,5 - 5 40016884 3RU11161FB0
3RU1116 - 1GB0 4,5 - 6,3 40015162 3RU11161GB0
3RU1116 - 1HB0 5,5 - 8 40016885 3RU11161HB0
3RU1116 3RU1116 - 1JB0 7 - 10 40015820 3RU11161JB0
S0 3RU1126 - 1CB0 1,8 - 2,5 40015164 3RU11261CB0 0,16

3RU1126 - 1EB0 2,8 - 4,0 40015165 3RU11261EB0
3RU1126 - 1FB0 3,5 - 5 40016892 3RU11261FB0
3RU1126 - 1GB0 4,5 - 6,3 40015169 3RU11261GB0
3RU1126 - 1HB0 5,5 - 8 40016893 3RU11261HB0
3RU1126 - 1JB0 7 - 10 40015190 3RU11261JB0
3RU1126 - 1KB0 9 - 12,5 40016886 3RU11261KB0
3RU1126 - 4AB0 11 - 16 40015191 3RU11264AB0
3RU1126
S2 3RU1136 - 1HB0 5,5 - 8,0 40015821 3RU11361HB0 0,3

3RU1136 - 1JB0 7 - 10 40015195 3RU11361JB0
3RU1136 - 4AB0 11 - 16 40015192 3RU11364AB0
3RU1136 - 4DB0 18 - 25 40015193 3RU11364DB0
3RU1136 - 4EB0 22 - 32 40016887 3RU11364EB0
3RU1136 - 4FB0 28 - 40 40015194 3RU11364FB0
3RU1136 - 4GB0 36 - 45 40017416 3RU11364GB0
3RU1136 - 4HB0 40 - 50 40016914 3RU11364HB0
3RU1136
S3 3RU1146 - 4FB0 28 - 40 40015196 3RU11464FB0 0,5

3RU1146 - 4JB0 45 - 63 40015197 3RU11464JB0
3RU1146 - 4KB0 57 - 75 40015198 3RU11464KB0
3RU1146 - 4LB0 70 - 90 40016888 3RU11464LB0
3RU1146
Accesorios
S00 3RU19- 16-3AA01 40015978 3RU19163AA01 0,04
Soporte para
montaje por S0 3RU19- 26-3AA01 40015979 3RU19263AA01 0,06
separado S2 3RU19- 36-3AA01 40016020 3RU19363AA01 0,15
S3 3RU19- 46-3AA01 40016021 3RU19463AA01 0,23
Siemens 41
Dimensiones en mm
Conexión por tornillo Distancia lateral hacia partes puestas a

tierra: 6 mm como mínimo
Relé de sobrecarga 3RU11 16 Relé de sobrecarga 3RU11 16,

Tamaño S00 Tamaño S00
Con soporte de conexión para montaje
independiente.
Relé de sobrecarga 3RU11 26

Tamaño S0
Tamaño S2
con soporte de conexión para montaje independiente

Tamaño S3
2) Fijación sobre perfil de 35 mm,
profundidad 15 mm según DIN EN 50 022
o perfil de 75 mm según DIN EN 50 023
42 Siemens
Datos técnicos
Tensión de aislamiento 500 V c.a.; 60 0 Vc.c.
Corriente térmica Ith 2 6A
Corriente nominal I e (AC5) 3 A con 220 V c.a.

1.5 A con 440V c.a.


Tabla de selección
Ilustración Diagrama de Ejecución Tipo No.de Peso

conexión Catálogo neto Kg
Pulsador doble
de conexión: 0.5m
4
Descripción: 0 - 1 3SA8 100 3000 4903 0,05
Dimensiones en mm.

botones 3SA8 1
perforación 3,2
“conectar”botón verde
“desconectar”boton rojo
Tipo 3SA8 1
c = normal 50 0 Dimensiones b c

Siemens 4/11
Tablillas terminales (clemas)
tipos 8WA5 y 8WA1 (block)
Conexión eléctrica segura
• Los tableros pueden salir del taller o de la fábrica

totalmente alambrados.
• Todas las acometidas o salidas de de conductores

presentan la misma longitud de aislamiento removido,
para conexión en la tablilla. (Puede realizarlo personal
auxiliar).
• La interconexión de conductores es rápida (se abate el

tiempo de interconexión, con el consecuente ahorro por
mano de obra), segura y de presentación impecable.
• Fácil detección y correción de posibles fallas.
• Realizar fácilmente cualquier modificación o ampliación.
• Perfecto sistema de identificación legible y permanente.
• Interconexión auténtica, segura y durarera.
• Seguridad en el servicio.
• Sencillez en el manejo.
• Compacto en su forma.
¡Características que hacen la diferencia!
Normas: VDE 0609

VDE 0110
VDE 0611
Tablillas terminales (clemas) Página

tipos 8WA5 y 8WA1
Descripción 4/13
Datos técnicos 4/13
Tabla de selección 4/14
Tablillas Terminales (Clemas) tipo 8WA1
Descripción
Conceptos técnicos A continuación se colocan los rótulos A través de la guía del conductor, es
En la acometida o salida de conductores
de los tableros de control y distribución,
son las tablillas terminales los elementos
(casquetes),placa terminal,ángulos
terminales y eventualmente barra de
unión. Preparado y completo el “grupo
colocada fácilmente la sección desnuda
del cable o alambre en el conector de la
tablilla terminal.
4
básicos e ideales de interconexión. de tablillas terminales”resta únicamente
fijarlo en el tablero, para posteriormente Conexión segura
Fácil instalación realizar las interconexiones. El conector de la tablilla terminal está
Las tablillas terminales se instalan en los constituido de tal forma que,al apretar al
tableros sobre un riel de fijación tipo Fácil alambrado tornillo de fijación, el elemento móvil del
5ST1141 previsto para este objeto, según Dado que las tablillas terminales están conector presiona con firmeza el
la longitud que se precise (longitud máx. montadas, una junto a otra formando una conductor evitando torceduras o bucles
de suministro 914 mm.) fila compacta,está previsto en el cuerpo por deslizamiento.
de la tablilla terminal una guía para el
Se monta la tablilla terminal sobre el riel destornillador y evitar su deslizamiento.
de fijación sin herramienta alguna.
Datos técnicos
Tipos 8WA1011-3DF21 8WA1011-3DH21 8WA1305
Tensión nominal de aislamiento 800 Vc.a.
Material del cuerpo aislante Termoplástico
Tamaño 2,5 6 35
Máxima corriente permisible 26 A 44 A 135 A
Calibre mínimo del conductor 18 AWG 16 AWG 12 AWG
Calibre máximo del conductor 12 AWG 10 AWG 2 AWG
Espesor de la tablilla terminal 6 mm 8 mm 16 mm
4/13
Tablillas Terminales (Clemas), tipos 8WA1 (block de 3)
Tabla de selección
Material Tipo No.de Catálogo
Tablilla block (3 pzas.) 8WA1011 - 3DF21 40000 794

6 mm
Hasta26 A
Barra unión para máx. 10

clemas. Incluye tornillos. 8WA1898 40000 804
Tablilla block (3 pzas.) 8WA1011 - 3DH21 40000 795

8 mm
Hasta 44 A

Tablilla block (3 pzas.) 8WA1305 40000 796

16 mm
Hasta 135 A

Clema terminal 8WA2808 40000 2726
Accesorios para tablillas terminales

Riel de fijación en tramos 5ST1 141 40000 798
de 914 mm
Casquetes (rótulos) para las tablillas terminales
Secuencia numérica
1-20 8WA8 868-ODA 30000 4464
21-40 8WA8 868-ODB 30000 4465
41-60 8WA8 868-ODC 30000 4466
61-80 8WA8 868-ODD 30000 4467
81-100 8WA8 868-ODE 30000 4468
Accesorios de designación para tablillas terminales.

Los casquetes de plástico son de color blanco, los números impresos indelebles.
Se suministran en bolsas de 5 tiras cada una con secuencia numérica de 20 números.
4/14 Siemens
TELEDYNE HASTINGS
INSTRUCTION
INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTRUMENTS
VT/CVT SERIES
VACUUM G AUGES
GA
and CONTROLLERS
page 1
Manual Print History
The print history shown below lists the printing dates of all revisions and addenda created for this
manual. The revision level letter increases alphabetically as the manual undergoes subsequent
updates. Addenda, which are released between revisions, contain important change information that
the user should incorporate immediately into the manual. Addenda are numbered sequentially.
When a new revision is created, all addenda associated with the previous revision of the manual are
incorporated into the new revision of the manual. Each new revision includes a revised copy of this
print history page.
Revision A (Document Number 146-0497) .................................................................... April 1997

Revision B (Document Number 146-0999) ........................................................... September 1999
Revision C (Document Number 146-032001) ............................................................. March 2001
Revision D (Document Number 146-092002) ......................................................September 2002
Revision E (Document Number 146-082005) ............................................................ August 2005
Visit www.teledyne-hi.com for WEEE disposal guidance.
Hastings Instruments reserves the right to change or modify the design of its equipment without any obligation to provide
notification of change or intent to change.
Table of Contents
1 . 0 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................. 5
INFORMATION
1.1 Features ............................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................................... 5
2 . 0 INST ALLA
INSTALLA TION .................................................................................. 7
ALLATION
2.1 Panel Mount Vacuum Gauge and Controller ........................................................................ 7
2.2 Cabinet Mount Vacuum Gauge ............................................................................................ 8
2.3 Cabinet Models With Internal Switching .............................................................................. 8
2.4 External Cables And Wiring ................................................................................................. 9
2.5 Vacuum Gauge Tube .......................................................................................................... 11
3 . 0 VACUUM GA UGE OPERA

GAUGE TION ................................................... 1 3
OPERATION
3.1 Meter Mechanical Zero ..................................................................................................... 13
3.2 AC Input Power ................................................................................................................. 13
3.3 Pressure Measurement ....................................................................................................... 13
3.4 Controller Set Points .......................................................................................................... 13
3.5 Operation And Performance Check .................................................................................... 13
3.6 Gauge Tube Operating Principle ........................................................................................ 14
3.7 Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 14
3.7.1 Calibration Using A Vacuum System ...................................................................... 14
3.7.2 Calibration Using A Hastings Reference Tube ........................................................ 14
4 . 0 WARRANTY and REPAIR ................................................................ 1 7

REPAIR
4.1 Warranty Repair ................................................................................................................ 17
4.2 Non-warranty Repair ......................................................................................................... 17
SECTION 1
General Information
This manual contains technical and general information relating to the installation, operation, and
calibration of Hastings Vacuum Gauges,, Controllers, and Gauge Tubes.
For best performance, Hastings vacuum gauges should be operated with the appropriate Hastings
gauge tube. Attempting to use a Hastings vacuum gauge with other manufacturers tubes may
result in damage to both the gauge and tube.
1.1 Features
Hastings vacuum gauges and controllers are self-contained instruments that offer extreme versatil-
ity for most vacuum applications. The electronic design assures long life and minimal maintenance.
Compact VT & CVT Models are ready for mounting onto a panel.
Hastings vacuum gauges and controllers utilize Hastings rugged but sensitive gauge tubes which
are designed specifically for each of the three available pressure ranges (consult Hastings Ordering
and Dimension guide).
1.2 Specifications
Pressure range:
VT-4 series, CVT-14/24, ..................................................................... 0-20 Torr or 0-20 mbar
VT-5, CVT-15/25, ......................................................................... 0-100 mTorr or 0-0.1 mbar
VT-6series, CVT-16/26, .................................................................... 0-1000 mTorr or 0-1 mbar
Input power ........................................................................................... 115 or 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Output signal ..................................................................................... 0-1 VDC (analog, non-linear)

Optional VT series
Standard CVT series
Control relays ................................................................................... 5A @ 250 VAC (resistive load)

5A @ 30 VDC (resistive load)
Cables ................................................................................................................. 6 ft (1.8 m) power

8 ft (2.4 m) gauge tube
Weight:
Panel mount meters ........................................................................... 1.78 lb (0.81 kg) w/cables
Panel mount controllers ..................................................................... 2.13 lb (0.97 kg) w/cables
Cabinet models .................................................................................... 4.25 lb (2.0 kg) w/cables
1.3 Accessories
Gauge tube extension cables are available in 8, 25, 50, & 100 foot lengths. Other installation
accessories include various drop out traps, quick disconnects and filters. Please consult your factory
representative or the Hastings Ordering and Dimension guide for information
concerning these accessories.
page 5
SECTION 2
Installation
2.1 Panel Mount Vacuum Gauge and Controller
Refer to figures 2.1 and 2.2 for outline dimensions of Hastings VT and CVT series units, to be
used when considering mounting locations. Use dimensional drawing (figure 2.3) to cut-out and
drill the gauge/controller mounting panel. Install gauge or controller onto panel using hardware
supplied with your unit.
figure 2.1; VT series outline dimensions
figure 2.2; CVT series outline dimensions
page 7
figure 2.3; CVT/VT series mounting dimensions (not to scale)
2.2 Cabinet Mount Vacuum Gauge
Hastings cabinet models require only installation of a Hastings gauge tube.
2.3 Cabinet Models With Internal Switching
Hastings cabinet model vacuum gauges can be obtained with 2-position or 5-position tube switch-
ing functions that will allow the user to display pressure from one or more selected tubes. No
special installation is necessary, simply connect the power cord and the gauge tube cables.
Note: All of the gauge tube cables on either a 2-position or a 5-position unit must be equal
in length. Mixing cable lengths on a particular unit will produce a calibration error due to
the different resistances of the cables.
page 8
2.4 External Cables And Wiring
WARNING:To prevent shock hazard to personnel, always install protective cover before
application of AC power or prior to placing instrument in- service.
VT series units
Connect the AC power cable, gauge tube cable, and analog output (analog output is only available
on units configured from the factory with 0-1 VDC ) as detailed in figure 2-4. The terminal block
protective cover must be removed to access screw terminals.
Terminal Function Description
3 Gauge tube cable Heated T.C. (blk wire)

4 AC power cable 115 VAC (blk wire)
5 Gauge tube cable Heated T.C. (wht wire)
6 Gauge tube cable Compensated T.C. (green wire)
7 Analog output (1vdc) negative analog output terminal
8 Analog output (1vdc) positive analog output terminal
9 AC power cable Lo VAC (wht wire)
13 COM chassis ground
14 COM AC power ground (green/yellow wire)
7 8
WARNING: 6 9
When 115 VAC is connected to the
auto transformer, 230 VAC appears
at the 230 VAC terminal. The same 5 10
occurs when you attach 230 VAC to
the unit, 115 VAC appears at the 115
VAC terminal.
3 4
13 14
figure 2.4 ; VT series terminal block
page 9
CVT series units
Connect the AC power cable, gauge tube cable, control relay and analog output (analog output is
optional on VT and standard on CVT) as detailed in figure 2-5. The terminal block protective
cover must be removed to access screw terminals.
TERMINAL FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
1 Lo set relay (Normally Closed) relay contact

2 Lo set relay (Normally Open) relay contact
3 Gauge tube cable Heated T.C. (blk wire)
5 Gauge tube cable Heated T.C. (wht wire)
6 Gauge tube cable Compensated T.C. (green wire)
7 Analog output (1vdc) negative analog output terminal
8 Analog output (1vdc) positive analog output terminal
9 AC power cable Lo VAC (wht WIRE)
10 AC power cable 230 VAC (blk WIRE)
11 Spare no connection
12 Lo set relay (COM) relay contact
13 COM chassis ground
14 COM AC power ground (green/yellow wire)
15 Hi set relay (Normally Closed) relay contact
16 Hi set relay (Normally Open) relay contact
17 Hi set relay (COM) relay contact
7 8
WARNING:
When 115 VAC is connected 6 9
to the auto transformer, 17
230 VAC appears at the 230
VAC terminal. The same 5 15 16 10
occurs when you attach 230 11
VAC to the unit, 115 VAC
appears at the 115 VAC
3 1 2 4
terminal.
12
13 14
figure 2.5; CVT series terminal block
page 10
2.5 Vacuum Gauge Tube
All Hastings gauge tubes are shipped with a protective cap or cover at the evacuation port to
reduce contamination and prevent physical damage to the internal thermopile elements. Once the
protective cap or cover is removed, a tube can be installed in any convenient position in the
vacuum system without adversely affecting calibration or performance. The recommended
orientation is with the tube vertical and its stem down. This will aide in preventing condensable
materials from remaining in the gauge tube.
Hastings instruments also offers a wide variety of installation accessories for use with your vacuum
gauge tube. Please consult the Hastings Ordering and Dimension Guide or contact your factory
representative for information on these products.
WARNING: Compression seal fittings “Quick-Connects” are not for use in systems
where the tube can be pressurized above atmosphere.
page 11
SECTION 3
Vacuum Gauge Operation
3.1 Meter Mechanical Zero
With the gauge in its normal operating position (AC power removed), check that the meter pointer
covers the Dot at right-end of the dial face. If the Dot is not covered by the pointer, adjust screw
at the front of the meter until the pointer covers the Dot.
3.2 AC Input Power

Connect the plug end of power cable into a single phase 115 or 230 V, 50/60 Hz power source (as
per unit configuration). When replacing the power cords standard plug with a plug to match a
particular system, care should be taken to connect the new plug in accordance with the terminal
block connections listed in section 2.4 of this manual.
3.3 Pressure Measurement

Connect gauge tube cables octal socket onto the octal base of a gauge tube installed in vacuum
system. The gauge will display the system pressure on the meter dial face. To check the accuracy
of the gauge, perform the required operations as specified in section 3.5 of this manual.
3.4 Controller Set Points (CVT units only)

The CVT series vacuum controllers are provided with either single or double set points. On a
single set point controller, the right-front panel knob allows the user to adjust or position the
“RED” pointer on the dial face where a desired control function will occur.
On the double set point controller, the left-front panel knob is added to allow the user to adjust or
position a second “RED” pointer on the dial face where a desired control function will occur.
On those controllers configured with two front panel knobs; the left knob controls the LO Set
pressure (Relay K1), and the right knob controls the HI Set pressure (Relay K2).
Control logic determines that a relay will (energize) when the indicated pressure is lower than the
set-pressure, and de-energize when the indicated pressure is higher than the set-pressure or if their
is a loss of AC power to the unit.
3.5 Operation And Performance Check

All Hastings vacuum gauges, controllers, and tubes have been carefully calibrated and checked at
the factory before shipment. When a operational check or calibration is desired, refer to the
procedure outlined in this section.
The simplest and quickest way of checking the operation and performance of a gauge and/or gauge
tube is to maintain a new or known-good gauge tube on hand for use as a Reference. To check
operation, install both the Reference and suspect gauge tubes in a common vacuum system (locate
the gauge tubes as close as possible to each other), then evacuate the system until a stable base
pressure is obtained. Alternately connect the vacuum gauge to each gauge tube and record its
pressure readings. If the gauge tube-under-test produces a higher pressure reading than the
Reference gauge tube, this indicates a calibration shift and is usually the result of contamination
(particulate, oil, or other chemical deposits). You can try to restore calibration of the contaminated
gauge tube by cleaning it internally with an appropriate solvent such as high-purity isopropyl
alcohol (flood interior cavity of gauge tube gently with solvent and allow it to stand and soak for
about 15 to 30-minutes). Drain the contaminated solvent and let gauge tube dry in ambient air
until all of the cleaning solvent has evaporated. To prevent mechanical damage to the thermopile
elements, do not use forced air to dry the gauge tube. Gauge tubes that remain out of calibration
after cleaning should be replaced.
page 13
3.6 Gauge Tube Operating Principle
Operation of the Hastings gauge tube is based on a low voltage AC bridge that heats a noble metal
thermopile. A change in pressure in the gauge tube changes the molecular collision rate and
therefore the thermal conduction of the gas or gas mixture surrounding the thermopile. This results
in a temperature shift in the AC heated thermocouples A and B (Fig. 3.1). The resultant temperature
shift causes a change in the DC output from couples A and B inversely with pressure changes. The
DC thermocouple C (when installed) is in series with the circuit load. Thermocouple C provides
compensation for transient changes in ambient temperature.
figure 3.1
3.7 Calibration
Using a vacuum system to calibrate a gauge or gauge/tube combination will result in a more
accurate pressure measurement. For instances where this is not possible, calibrating the gauge using
a Hastings reference tube provides the best alternative.
NOTE: For cabinet models, the top-cover must be removed to access the CAL control.
3.7.1 Calibration Using A Vacuum System

Install the gauge tube in a vacuum system (gauge connected to AC power and stabilized), then
evacuate to a pressure one decade or more below the gauge dial face resolution. Connect the gauge
to tube and wait until the displayed pressure is stable.
NOTE: When using a DV-4 type gauge tube, system pressure must be less than 1.0 x10-2 Torr.
NOTE:
When using DV-5, or DV-6 type gauge tubes, system pressure must be less than 1.0 x 10-5 Torr.
Adjust the gauge CAL.adjustment (figure 3.2) until the meter pointer indicates zero-left on the dial
face.
page 14
3.7.2 Calibration Using A Hastings Reference Tube
Connect a Hastings reference tube to a stabilized vacuum gauge. Wait until the displayed pressure
is stable.
NO TE: The following table specifies the Hastings reference tube to be used in the calibration of a
NOTE:
gauge based upon the type of gauge tube being used:
Reference tube Gauge tube
DB-16D DV-4
DB-18 DV-5
DB-20 DV-6
Adjust the gauge CAL control (figure 3.2) until the meter pointer indicates the pressure specified
on the decal of the reference tube in use.
figure 3.2; VT/CVT calibration points
page 15
SECTION 4
Warranty and Repair
4.1 Warranty Repair Policy
Hastings Instruments warrants this product for a period of one year from the date of shipment to be free
from defects in material and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to defects or failures resulting from
unauthorized modification, misuse or mishandling of the product. This warranty does not apply to batteries
or other expendable parts, nor to damage caused by leaking batteries or any similar occurrence. This
warranty does not apply to any instrument which has had a tamper seal removed or broken.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied, including any implied warranty as to
fitness for a particular use. Hastings Instruments shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential
damages.
Hastings Instruments, will, at its option, repair, replace or refund the selling price of the product if Hastings
Instruments determines, in good faith, that it is defective in materials or workmanship during the warranty
period. Defective instruments should be returned to Hastings Instruments, shipment prepaid, together
with a written statement of the problem and a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. Please consult
the factory for your RMA number before returning any product for repair. Collect freight will not be
accepted.
4.2 Non-Warranty Repair Policy
Any product returned for a non-warranty repair must be accompanied by a purchase order, RMA form and
a written description of the problem with the instrument. If the repair cost is higher, you will be contacted
for authorization before we proceed with any repairs. If you then choose not to have the product repaired, a
minimum will be charged to cover the processing and inspection. Please consult the factory for your RMA
number before returning any product repair.
TELEDYNE HASTINGS INSTRUMENTS

804 NEWCOMBE AVENUE
HAMPTON, VIRGINIA 23669 U.S.A.
ATTENTION: REPAIR DEPARTMENT
TELEPHONE (757) 723-6531
1-800-950-2468
FAX (757) 723-3925
E MAIL hastings_instruments@teledyne.com
INTERNET ADDRESS http://www.hastings-inst.com
Repair Forms may be obtained from the “Information Request” section of the
Hastings Instruments web site.
page 17
VALVULAS WORCESTER DE
MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Serie 44 (400)/600/H600
Una gran cantidad de posibles configuraciones hacen de ésta
válvula de 3 piezas, la más versátil del mercado: diversos
materiales de construcción y sellos, diferentes rangos de
operación, varios tipos de conexión, así como múltiples
opciones, la convierten en la mejor para cada aplicación ya sea
manual o automatizada.
VALVULAS WORCESTER DE MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.
SERIE 44(400)/600/H600
La válvula Serie 44, 600 y H600están disponibles en una variedad de opciones y combinaciones, como diferentes tipos de
materiales de sellos y asientos para todo tipo de aplicaciones, distintas configuraciones como Diverter, 3 vías, Higiénicas,
Fire Safe, Criogénicas, con plato ISO5211 para automatización, etc. así como todo tipo de conexiones roscadas, soldables,
clamp, etc.
El diseño de Asientos de bajo torque permite a nuestras válvulas ser fácilmente automatizadas por componentes también
disponibles en nuestros almacenes
Las válvulas Series 44 y 600 pueden ser ordenadas con la opción "Fire Safe" (válvulas diseñadas para controlar el flujo en
caso de incendio) las cuales han sido certificadas bajo el estándar API 607 4° Edición.
Así mismo, todas las válvulas Worcester a partir de 2" pueden ser ordenadas con el monograma API 6D, gracias a la
certificación otorgada por el American Petroleum Institute a nuestros productos.
Copyright 2003, Válvulas Worcester de México, S.A. de C.V. / Rhino Valves Worldwide
Maiz 263 Col. Valle del Sur Iztapalapa México, D.F.
C.P. 09819 Teléfonos de ventas: 01 (55) 5670-51-55 / 5670-7101 Página 1/7
Página Web www.worcester.com.mx vwm 01-2003-VW
E-mail vrubio@worcester.com.mx / exportrhino@worcester.com.mx
SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600
Terminaciones NPT, BS, SW,BW ó Clamp.

paso reducido o completo. Construcción
robusta de latón, acero al carbón y acero
inoxidable. Cuerpo de 3 piezas de 1/4" a 2".
Presión de prueba 1500 psi (serie 400), 2200
psi (serie 600), latón 1000 psi (1/2" A 1 1/2"
PASO TOTAL). Sellos para ciclo frecuente
en diversos materiales.
Opciones :
Dispositivo para candado

Plato ISO5211 (EXCEPTO LATON)
“A Prueba de fuego” (EXCEPTO
LATON)
API 607 4ª. Edición
Opción H600 : Presión de prueba 3000 WOG,

vástago 17-4 PH, tornillos B7. Sellos de uso
rudo para alta presión.
SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600
COEFICIENTE DEL FLUJO

TAMAÑO Cv (USGPM) LONGITUD EQUIVALENTE
VALVULA DEL TUBO CEDULA 40 EN PIES
1/2" 8 3.1
3/4" 12 6.3
1" 32 3.1
1 1/2" 82 4.3
2" 120 7.5
SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600
LISTADO DE PARTES SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600 1/2"- 2"
MATERIAL
INDICE CANT DESCRIPCION LATON * ACERO AL CARBON ACERO INOXIDABLE
1 1 CUERPO ASTM B C37700 ASTM A 216 WCB/A105 ASTM A 351 CF 8M
ASTM B 21 C46400,
2 1 BOLA ASTM A 351 CF 8M ASTM A 351 CF 8M
ASTM B 283 C37700
3 2 SELLO PTFE PTFE PTFE
4 2 ASIENTO PTFE PTFE PTFE
5 2 TAPA ASTM B 283 C37700 ASTM A 216 WCB ASTM A 351 CF 8M
6 4 TORNILLO SAE J429 GR. 5 SAE J429 GR. 5 ASTM F593 TIPO A 304
7 4 TUERCA ASTM A 194 2HM ASTM A 194 2HM ASTM F594 TIPO A 304
8 1 VASTAGO AISI 316 AISI 1018-12L14 AISI 316
9 1 RONDANA DELGADA R-PTFE 25% R-PTFE 25% R-PTFE 25%
10 1 RONDANA GRUESA R-PTFE 15% R-PTFE 15% R-PTFE 15%
11 1 SEPARADOR AISI 416 AISI 416 AISI 416
12 2 RONDANA CONCAVA AISI 1076 AISI 1075 AISI 302
13 2 TUERCA P/VASTAGO ASTM A 194 2HM ASTM A 194 2HM ASTM F594 TIPO A 304
14 1 SEGURO P/TUERCA AISI 304 AISI 304 AISI 304
15 1 MANERAL ASTM A 743 CF8/CA15 ASTM A 743 CF8/CA15 ASTM A 743 CF8/CA15
DIPOSITIVO P/CANDADO
16 1 ASTM A 743 CF8/CA15 ASTM A 743 CF8/CA15 ASTM A 743 CF8/CA15
(OPCIONAL)
SOLO PARA H600

3 1 SELLO VITON VITON
4 2 ASIENTO DELRIN DELRIN
6 4 TORNILLO ASTM A 193 GR.B7 ASTM A 193 GR.B7
7 4 TUERCA ASTM A 194 2HM ASTM A 194 2HM
8 1 VASTAGO ASTM A 564 (S17400) ASTM A 564 (S17400)
18** 1 RONDANA DELGADA MULTIFIL MULTIFIL
19** 1 RONDANA GRUESA MULTIFIL MULTIFIL
20** 1 RONDANA GRUESA DELRIN DELRIN
* SOLO DISPONIBLE PARA SERIE 44

** REEMPLAZAR EN POSICION 9 Y 10
SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600
La tubería es solamente representativa.
Los datos en este catálogo son solo

como referencia y están sujetos a
cambios sin previo aviso
Dimensiones en pulgadas.
Condiciones de Servicio:
CONDICION ACERO AL CARBON ACERO INOXIDABLE
CLASE ANSI # (Serie 44-Tapas Octagonales) 400 400
TEMPERATURA DE OPERACION -20 a 100°F (-29 a 38°C) -20 a 100°F (-29 a 38°C)
MAXIMA PRESION DE TRABAJO ACEPTABLE 990 psi (69.6 kg/cm2) 960 psi (67.5 kg/cm2)
PRESION MAXIMA DE PRUEBA 1500 psi (105 kg/cm2) 1450 psi (102 kg/cm2)

CLASE ANSI # (Serie 600-Tapas Redondas) 600 600
MAXIMA PRESION DE TRABAJO ACEPTABLE 1480 psi (104 kg/cm2) 1440 psi (101.3 kg/cm2)

CLASE ANSI # (Paso Completo Tapas Octagonales) 600 600
MAXIMA PRESION DE TRABAJO ACEPTABLE 1480 psi (104 kg/cm2) 1440 psi (101.3 kg/cm2)
Nota: Siempre considere el máximo de presión permitida por los elementos suaves como asientos y sellos.
SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600
PASO REDUCIDO
SERIE 44 (400)/600/H600 1/2" - 2"
TAMAÑO A B C D PASO PESO KG LARGO ALTURA ANCHO

1/2" 4 1/4 1.58 2.61 1.51 0.438 0.59 5.56 2.45 1.75
3/4" 4 1/4 1.67 2.83 1.61 0.563 0.75 5.67 2.67 2.00
1" 5 3/4 2.21 3.72 2.17 0.813 1.46 7.66 3.40 2.38
1 1/4" 5 3/4 2.40 4.22 2.35 1.000 2.01 7.86 3.71 2.63
1 1/2" 7 3.02 4.56 2.89 1.250 3.33 9.28 4.62 3.19
2" 7 3.21 5.01 3.07 1.500 4.29 9.51 5.00 3.57
PASO COMPLETO
SERIE FP44 (400)/FP600/FPH600 1/4" - 2"
TAMAÑO A B C D PASO PESO KG LARGO ALTURA ANCHO

1/4" 4 1/4 1.58 2.61 1.51 0.438 0.64 5.56 2.45 1.75
3/8" 4 1/4 1.58 2.61 1.51 0.438 0.62 5.56 2.45 1.75
1/2" 4 1/4 1.67 2.83 1.61 0.563 0.75 5.67 2.67 2.00
3/4" 5 3/4 2.21 3.72 2.17 0.813 1.46 7.66 3.40 2.38
1" 5 3/4 2.40 4.22 2.35 1.000 2.01 7.86 3.71 2.63
1 1/4" 7 3.02 4.56 2.89 1.250 3.33 9.28 4.62 3.19
1 1/2" 7 3.21 5.01 3.07 1.500 4.29 9.51 5.00 3.57
2" 7 3/8 3.26 5.87 4.29 2.000 9.40 10.29 6.56 4.55
NORMAS INTERNACIONALES APLICABLES
NORMAS INTERNACIONALES APLICABLES
Norma Descripción Aplicables en Tamaño Contenido
Válvulas que requieren

especial resistencia a las Todos los
NACE Para ambientes ácidos, metales
modelos 1/4" - 8"
MR-01-75 fracturas por ataque ferrosos y no ferrosos inoxidables
excepto Latón
sulfhídrico
Fugas por asientos de
Todos los
ANSI/FCI 70-2 válvulas de control. 1/4" - 8" Prueba de aire atrapado
modelos
Clase VI
Todos los
Tamaño-Rosca-Temperatura.
Sistema de marcación modelos
MSS-SP-26 1/4" - 8" Presión-Materiales-Nomb. Fund. No.
Standard excepto series
Colada
42, 43, 1000
Método visual Todos los
12 tipos de fallas mas frecuentes
MSS-SP-55 aceptación de válvulas modelos 1/2" - 8"
observables a simple vista
de acero fundidas excepto Latón
Especificación para Todos los Sistema de Calidad de acuerdo a
API 6D 2" - 8"
tubos y válvulas modelos American Petroleum Institute
Todos los
modelos Certificado disponible en algunas
API 607 Prueba "Fire Safe" 1/4" - 8"
excepto serie válvulas
42, 43 y 1000
Inspección y prueba de Todos los
API 598 1/4" - 2"
válvulas modelos
Todos los Dimensiones-Materiales-Rango.
Bridas para líneas de
ANSI B 16.5 modelos 1/2" - 8" Presión-Temperatura-Rayado.
acero con tuberías
bridadas Diferentes tipos de bridas
Longitud de válvulas Todos los
ANSI B 16.10 entre bridas y/o para modelos 1/2" - 8" Dimensiones cara-cara
soldar bridadas
Dimensionamiento Todos los
extremos : modelos
ANSI B 16.11 1/4" - 6" Dimensiones cara-cara
S.W. (Socket Weld) S.E. excepto
(Roscados) bridadas
Espesor de pared-diseños.
Todos los Especificaciones-Materiales.
ANSI B 16.34 Válvulas de acero 1/4" - 14"
modelos Rango-Presión-Temperatura. Prueba
hidrostática
Terminaciones soldables
ANSI B 16.25 1/2" - 6"
(Buttweld)
Maiz 263 Col. Valle del Sur Iztapalapa Mexico, D.F.
Web page www.worcester.com.mx vwm 01-2003-VW
COMO ORDENAR
COMO ORDENAR UNA VALVULA WORCESTER

4 4 6 T T 1 1/2" SW D
MATERIAL
SERIE CUERPO Y VASTAGO Y ASIENTOS SELLOS TAMAÑO CONEXIÓN TIPO
TAPAS ESFERA
4 (400) 1 - LATON 1 - LATON B - BUNA B - BUNA 1/4" SE - SCREW END - NORMAL

6 (600) 4 - ACERO 4 - ACERO T - PTFE T - PTFE 3/8" SW - SOCKET WELD FP - PASO COMPLETO
H6 (H600) AL CARBON AL CARBON R - RPTFE R - RPTFE 1/2" BW - BUTT WELD FS - FIRE SAFE
42 - MITE 6 - ACERO 6 - ACERO Y - LUBETAL Y - LUBETAL 1 1/4" 150# ANSI 150 D - DIVERTER
43 - MASS INOXIDABLE INOXIDABLE (DERIN) (DERIN) 1 1/2" 300# ANSI 300 T - 3 VIAS
60 (6000) M - MULTIFIL M - MULTIFIL 2" C - CRIOGENICA
45 I-INOXIDABLE T - PTFE 2 1/2"
150 U - UHMWPE U - UHMWPE 3"
152 D - DEVLON V D - DEVLON V 4"
151 6"
300 USE SOLO UNA LETRA 8"
302 (ASIENTO) SI NECESITA LA
COMBINACION NORMAL
DE MATERIALES
DE ASIENTOS Y SELLOS
Nota: No todas las combinaciones están disponibles.

Ver las tablas siguientes y consultar con fábrica o distribuidor
autorizado por la disponibiliadad.
Existen otros materiales, opciones y conexiones.
COMBINACION NORMAL DE MATERIAL DE SELLOS Y ASIENTOS
SERIE ASIENTOS SELLO CUERPO SELLO VASTAGO
TODAS BUNA BUNA RPTFE

TODAS PTFE PTFE PTFE
TODAS RPTFE PTFE RPTFE
TODAS LUBETAL VITON RPTFE
TODAS MULTIFIL MULTIFIL MULTIFIL
SERIE 400 INOXIDABLE PTFE PTFE
TODAS UHM WPE VITON RPTFE
FS SOLO PTFE GRAFOIL GRAFOIL
H600 SOLO DELRIN VITON DELRIN / MULTIFIL
6000 DELRIN / VITON VITON DELRIN / MULTIFIL
Web page www.worcester.com.mx vwm 01-2003-VW
VÁLVULAS WORCESTER DE MÉXICO S.A. DE C.V.
RHINO VALVES WORLDWIDE
MANUAL DE MANEJO, INSTALACIÓN, OPERACIÓN,
MANTENIMIENTO Y SEGURIDAD.
VALVULA DE BOLA SERIE 400 (44) y 600 (incluye opción ISO). Paso Regular 1/2” – 2”.
Inspección de Material:
Le recomendamos revisar las válvulas al ser entregadas por el transportista para verificar que no hayan
sido dañadas durante su transporte y manejo. Reporte cualquier daño encontrado.
Manejo :
Almacene las válvulas en un lugar seguro, libre de lluvia, humedad, polvo o cualquier agente que pueda
deteriorarlas. Las válvulas son enviadas con protectores plásticos en las terminaciones para evitar que se
introduzca el polvo u otros materiales. Manténgalos colocados hasta el momento de su instalación.
Si planea almacenar la válvula por un largo periodo de tiempo, le recomendamos dejarla en posición abierta
para evitar que se marquen los asientos.
INFORMACIÓN GENERAL.
Materiales :
DESCRIPCIÓN ACERO AL CARBON ACERO INOXIDABLE
CUERPO A-216-WCB A-351-CF8M
ASIENTO PTFE PTFE
BOLA A-351-CF8M / AISI 316 A-351-CF8M / AISI 316
SELLO PTFE / GRAFOIL (fire safe) PTFE / GRAFOIL (fire safe)
TAPA A-216-WCB A-351-CF8M
TUERCA ASTM A-194-2HM F-594 TYPE 304
TORNILLO SAE J429 Gr.5 A193 B8
ROLDANA DE APOYO R-PTFE R-PTFE
VASTAGO AISI 1018 / AISI 12L14 / A105 AISI 316
EMPAQUE SUPERIOR R-TFE / GRAFOIL (fire safe) R-TFE / GRAFOIL (fire safe)
RONDANAS CONCAVAS AISI 1075 AISI 304
SEGURO PARA TUERCA AISI 304 AISI 304
SEGUIDOR AISI 416 AISI 416
MANERAL (& lock. Dev. Opc) ASTM A-743 CF8 / CA15 ASTM A-743 CF8 / CA15
Condiciones de Servicio:
CONDICIÓN ACERO AL CARBON ACERO INOXIDABLE
CLASE ANSI # (Serie 44-Tapa Octagonal) 400 400
TEMPERATURA DE OPERACIÓN. -20 a 100°F (-29 a 38°C) -20 a 100°F (-29 a 38°C)
MÁX. PRESIÓN DE TRABAJO PERMITIDA 990 psi (69.6 Kg/cm2) 960 psi (67.5 Kg/cm2)
MÁXIMA PRESIÓN DE PRUEBA. 1500 psi (105 Kg/cm2) 1450 psi (102 Kg/cm2)
CONDICIÓN ACERO AL CARBON ACERO INOXIDABLE

CLASE ANSI # (Serie 600-Tapa Redonda) 600 600
TEMPERATURA DE OPERACIÓN. -20 a 100°F (-29 to 38°C) -20 a 100°F (-29 a 38°C)
MÁX. PRESIÓN DE TRABAJO PERMITIDA 1480 psi (104 Kg/cm2) 1440 psi (101.3 Kg/cm2)
MÁXIMA PRESIÓN DE PRUEBA. 2225 psi (157 Kg/cm2) 2175 (153 Kg/cm2)
Nota : Siempre considere la máxima presión permitida por los elementos suaves de la válvula como
asientos y sellos.
Manual de Instalación y Servicio para Válvulas de la Serie 400 (44) y 600. Rev. C – Ags 03. Pág 1 de 7
Dimensiones Generales:
Serie 400 (44) y 600 Paso Regular
DESCRIPCIÓN ½” ¾” 1” 1 ¼” 1 ½” 2”
LONGITUD in (mm) 2.61 2.83 3.72 4.22 4.56 5.01
Cara a Cara (66) (72) (94) (107) (116) (127)
ANCHO in (mm) 1.75 2.00 2.38 2.63 3.19 3.57
(44) (51) (60) (67) (81) (91)
ALTURA in (mm) 2.45 2.67 3.40 3.71 4.62 5.00
(62) (68) (86) (94) (117) (127)
PESO lb (Kg) 1.30 1.65 3.22 4.43 7.33 9.45
(0.59) (0.75) (1.46) (2.01) (3.33) (4.29)
Series 400 (44) y 600 Paso Regular - ISO

DESCRIPTION ½” ¾” 1” 1 ¼” 1 ½” 2”
LONGITUD in (mm) 2.39 2.61 3.36 3.66 4.49 4.85
Cara a Cara (60.6) (66.3) (85.3) (93) (114) (123.3)
ALTURA in (mm) 2.03 2.26 2.76 3.07 3.70 4.07
Solo Cuerpo (excluyendo Maneral y (51.6) (57.3) (70) (78) (94) (103)
altura de vástago)
PESO lb (Kg) (incluye maneral) 1.4 1.8 3.5 4.7 7.8 10.2
(0.65) (0.82) (1.59) (2.15) (3.53) (4.62)
Instalación y Operación:
La válvula es bi-direccional y puede ser instalada en cualquier posición.
Puede ser operada manualmente rotando suavemente el maneral 90°. Cuando el maneral está paralelo a la
línea, la válvula está en posición abierta. A 90° está en posición cerrada. La válvula también puede ser
operada mediante dispositivos de automatización (opcionales).
Precaución : Recuerde que la Válvula de Bola es un dispositivo para Abrir o Cerrar una línea y no está
diseñada para el control de flujo. Nunca deje la válvula en una posición diferente de “Abierto” o “Cerrado”
ya que en otra posición, los asientos podrían ser dañados, reduciendo su vida útil.
Precaución : No instale la válvula en un sistema con alta vibración, ya que los tornillos que fijan las tapas
con el cuerpo, pueden aflojarse. En caso necesario, recomendamos se incluya roldanas de presión (lock
washers) en cada uno de los tornillos para evitar que se aflojen.
Precaución : Después de la instalación, algunas rebabas pueden permanecer en el interior de la línea

(tubería). Si no son eliminadas, estás pueden rayar a los asientos y bola, resultando en fugas de la válvula.
Siempre limpie la línea después de la instalación para eliminar agentes extraños.
Válvulas Actuadas:
A. Si su válvula no tiene plato superior ISO5211, primero tiene que quitar los dos tornillos superiores de
la válvula, sacar el montaje del actuador y el cople que conecta al vástago con el actuador.
B. Si su válvula si tiene plato superior ISO5211, usted puede realizar las siguientes instrucciones sin
tener que quitar el actuador y su montaje de la válvula.
Válvulas soldadas a la tubería por cualquier técnica:
Si cuenta con una Horma (jig) del cuerpo de la válvula:
1. Quite las tapas de una válvula, retirando para ellos los

cuatro tornillos que la sujetan al cuerpo. Coloque las tapas en
la horma (jig) atornillándolas adecuadamente.
2. Suelde cada extremo a la instalación.
3. Ensamble la válvula de acuerdo a los puntos 9 y 10 de esta
sección.
Si no cuenta con una horma (jig) del cuerpo de la válvula:
4. Suelde con unos puntos en cada tapa de la válvula en el lugar de instalación para asegurarla. No
caliente excesivamente!
5. Quite los tornillos que sujetan cuerpo y tapas, excepto uno, abra la válvula. Afloje el ultimo tornillo,
saque el cuerpo de la válvula de la línea girándolo hacia fuera.
NOTA: Las válvulas que incluyen en su diseño anillo centrante (como algunas válvulas a prueba de
fuego) no rotarán.
6. Quite los sellos del cuerpo y asientos. Cierre la válvula y retire la bola, recuerde la posición del
barreno esto es muy importante a la hora del ensamble.
7. Regrese el cuerpo a su posición en la línea y asegúrelo en las tapas con dos tornillos diagonalmente.
8. Termine de soldar (Sí esta soldando con gas o bronce, no aplique la flama directamente al cuerpo).
9. Re ensamble la válvula, usando los sellos adicionales que le fueron
suministrados en lugar de los temporales instalados en fábrica. Si su
válvula incluye sellos “S-Gasket” instale unos nuevos con la cara más ancha
del lado del cuerpo. Recuerde que la esfera, solo podrá ser ensamblada,
con la válvula en posición cerrada
10. Apriete los tornillos que sujetan al cuerpo con las tapas uniformemente y
en forma cruzada, aplicando el torque recomendados a continuación.
Torque Recomendado del lado de la tuerca

Diámetro del
Acero al Carbon Acero Inoxidable
Tornillo
(lb*plg) Nm (lb*plg) Nm
¼” 96-120 10.8-13.6 72-94 8.1-10.6
5/16” 156-204 17.6-23.1 120-144 13.6-16.3
3/8” 216-264 24.4-29.8 192-216 21.7-24.4
7/16” 480-540 54.2-61.0 336-384 38.0-43.4
11. Si usted quitó el montaje del actuador, colóquelo nuevamente junto con su cople. Asegúrese que todo el
ensamble está alineado en el centro. Si el actuador no está alineado y/o el cople no es perpendicular a la
válvula, la válvula no trabajará correctamente pudiendo producirse fuga de fluido por el vástago.
Válvulas roscadas:
Dependiendo de las condiciones o de la técnica utilizada, atornille la válvula completa, o bien desarme la
válvula siguiendo las instrucciones del punto 5 de la sección anterior (quitando los cuatro tornillos), y
atornillando cada tapa a su extremo correspondiente. Re ensamble la válvula siguiendo las instrucciones de
los puntos 9 y 10 de la sección anterior.
La válvula funcionará sin fugas y con un bajo torque por un largo periodo de tiempo si es operada dentro de
sus parámetros de diseño. El torque de una válvula nueva depende de su tamaño, así como del material de
los Asientos instalados y la presión a la que es sometida. Para conocer dicho torque, por favor consulte
nuestro catalogo impreso o multimedia, o bien visite nuestra página web: www.worcester.com.mx.
Después de la instalación y antes de operar la válvula, consulte la Guía de Seguridad al final de este
documento.
Mantenimiento:
Después de un tiempo de operarla y dependiendo de las condiciones de uso, la válvula puede requerir
mantenimiento. Recuerde que su válvula tiene un año de garantía, si se encuentra aun en ese periodo,
comuníquese con su distribuidor, no intente repararla pues podría perder dicha garantía. Use solo partes
originales WORCESTER/RHINO para asegurar que su válvula trabaje de acuerdo con sus especificaciones.
Solicítelas a través de nuestra amplia red de distribuidores en todo el mundo.
Vástago:
Aunque el diseño del vástago incluye un sistema auto-ajustable compensador de desgaste y de las
contracciones y expansiones producidas por cambios térmicos, si la válvula presenta fuga por esta sección
le recomendamos las siguientes instrucciones:
a) Si su válvula tiene un actuador instalado, verifique si esta alineado con el vástago a través del cople.
Un actuador desalineado puede producir presión lateral sobre el vástago, resultando en fugas.
b) Apriete ligeramente la tuerca del vástago hasta que deje de fugar. Recuerde que apretar demasiado la
tuerca incrementa el torque de la válvula, dañando el sello o reduciendo su vida útil, además de
dificultar la operación de la válvula. Si la fuga continúa, siga los siguientes pasos:
c) Cierre la línea donde se encuentra la válvula, verificando que no está presurizada o que algún fluido
peligroso haya quedado atrapado en su interior. Desensamble la válvula siguiendo los pasos A o B y 5 y
6 de la sección de instalación.
Precaución: Las válvulas de bola pueden retener fluido a presión en la cavidad del cuerpo cuando están
cerradas. Tenga cuidado, siempre abra la válvula para eliminar la presión antes de desensamblarla.
Precaución : Siempre despresurice, desconecte y separe los componentes de automatización instalados en

la válvula antes de trabajar en ella.
d) Reemplace el sello del vástago y el empaque superior de vástago, removiendo para ello el maneral, la
tuerca, el seguro de la tuerca, las rondanas cóncavas y el separador.
e) Re-ensamble su válvula poniendo los elementos del vástago en forma inversa a la que los saco. Apriete
ligeramente la tuerca del vástago para ajustarlos (cuando usted haya instalado la válvula en la línea
podrá darle el ajuste final).
f) Termine el ensamble de la válvula, siguiendo los pasos 9 a 11 de la sección de Instalación.
Nota: Tenga cuidado con los asientos. No los maltrate o raye, o deberá reemplazarlos
Sellos:
En caso de fuga entre el cuerpo y tapas, le recomendamos las siguientes instrucciones:

a) Verifique que el torque de las tuercas que une al cuerpo con las tapas sea el apropiado, si es necesario
apriete las tuercas. Si esto sucede repetidamente, se puede deber a una excesiva vibración en la línea.
Le sugerimos la inclusión de “Juntas de Expansión” para evitarla. Si esto no es posible o suficiente,
recomendamos instalar rondanas de presión en cada uno de las tuercas para disminuir este efecto.
b) Si la fuga persiste desensamble la válvula de acuerdo los pasos “A” o “B”, “5” y “6” de la sección de
instalación. Tenga cuidado que la bola no caiga al separar las dos partes del cuerpo.
c) Re- ensamble la válvula colocando un nuevo sello según los pasos 9 a 11 de la sección de Instalación.
Fuga Interna:
Si la válvula presenta una fuga interna (el fluido pasa a través de la válvula en posición cerrada), puede ser
por desgaste en los asientos o por defecto (rayados) en los asientos o en la bola. Le recomendamos las
siguientes instrucciones:
a) Algunos materiales sólidos pueden incrustarse entre los asientos y la bola. Opere la válvula varias
veces para tratar de despejar dichos residuos.
b) Si la válvula tiene un actuador instalado, verifique que cierre perfectamente, esto significa que
complete su propia ruta, si no, quizá la válvula tiene un torque elevado o el actuador puede estar
desalineado o defectuoso. Verifique que el voltaje y/o presión de aire en el actuador es el adecuado.
Le recomendamos que en caso de ser necesario, quite el actuador y opere la válvula manualmente para
verificar si es el funcionamiento del actuador el que produce la fuga.
c) Si la válvula tiene un torque excesivo, pruebe aflojando un poco la tuerca del vástago, si no funciona o
se produce fuga por ésta parte, deberá cambiar los sellos del vástago.
d) Si la fuga interna persiste, desensamble la válvula siguiendo los pasos “5” y “6” de la sección de
Instalación.
e) Verifique cuidadosamente los asientos y la bola poniendo mas atención en las superficies de contacto
mutuo. Busque cualquier material incrustado, ralladura o imperfección y en cualquier caso reemplace la
parte dañada.
f) Re-ensamble la válvula colocando un sello de cuerpo nuevo de acuerdo a los pasos 9 a 11 de la sección
de Instalación.
Nota : Los asientos de material duro como el Delrin, Peek, etc. son ajustados en fábrica durante el
ensamble de la válvula hasta lograr un torque bajo sin fuga. Si usted los reemplaza en campo y nota un
aumento dramático del torque de la válvula, le recomendamos disminuir el espesor de ambos asientos por la
parte posterior de estos hasta lograr el torque deseado. Puede usar una lija, moviendo los asientos en
forma circular sobre ésta en una superficie plana, de tal manera que queden parejos.
1. CUERPO (se muestra cuerpo ISO)

2. BOLA
3. SELLO
4. ASIENTO
5. TAPA
6. TORNILLO
7. TUERCA
8. VASTAGO
9. ROLDANA DE APOYO
10. EMPAQUE SUPERIOR
11. SEGUIDOR
12. ROLDANAS CONCAVAS
13. TUERCA
14. SEGURO PARA TUERCA
15. MANERAL
16. SEGURO P/CANDADO (OPC.)
SEGURIDAD :
PRECAUCIÓN!
Las válvulas son recipientes a presión, los cuales pueden ser peligrosos si no son calculados,
seleccionados, mantenidos y operados adecuadamente. Para prevenir riesgos, siga las
siguientes precauciones:
1. Siempre seleccione la válvula de acuerdo a la presión de operación de su aplicación.

Presión Máxima de Operación psi (kg cm2)
Serie Clase ANSI #
Cuerpo Acero al Carbón Cuerpo Acero Inoxidable
400 (44) 400 990 psi (69.6 Kg/cm2) 960 psi (67.5 Kg/cm2)
600 600 1480 psi (104 Kg/cm2) 1440 psi (101.3 Kg/cm2)
2. Siempre elija los materiales adecuados para su aplicación, consultando para ello tablas de
corrosión o consultando con nuestra fábrica. Un material agresivo, puede gastar el metal
de la válvula, reduciendo su espesor y haciéndolo menos resistente a la presión. También
puede atacar los elementos suaves (sellos y asientos) reduciendo su capacidad de sellado.
3. Elija y proteja la válvula adecuadamente de acuerdo a las condiciones del lugar donde está
instalada. Recuerde que las válvulas de Acero al Carbón están sujetas a corrosión
ambiental. No las deje en un ambiente abierto sin protección. El terminado fosfato oscuro
dado en la fábrica es solo para protegerlo de la corrosión durante su almacenamiento y
manejo exclusivamente.
4. Siempre use el equipo adecuado como guantes y gafas para manejar e instalar las válvulas,
ya que pueden tener aristas filosas. Las válvulas pueden ser pesadas, use el equipo
adecuado para manejarlas, incluyendo zapatos industriales y fajas de soporte lumbar. La
válvula puede conducir fluidos extremadamente fríos o calientes poniéndolo en riesgo
físico si la toca sin protección. También las válvulas pueden conducir fluidos
extremadamente peligrosos, existiendo riesgo de daño permanente a su persona en caso de
fugas en el sistema, incluyendo la válvula. Siempre use el equipo adecuado como guantes,
gafas de seguridad o máscara para operar la válvula.
5. No instale o use la válvula al final de la línea o en un ramal de seguridad.
6. Siempre revise los torques de la tornillería y ajuste si es necesario después de la

instalación y antes de operar la válvula.
7. Después de operación y aunque la línea haya sido cerrada, es posible que una presión
dañina permanezca dentro de la válvula, ya que las válvulas de bola pueden retener presión
en la cavidad del cuerpo cuando están en posición cerrada. Despresurice, drene y ventile la
válvula y la línea donde esta operando, antes de desensamblarla.
8. No introduzca sus manos u otra parte del cuerpo dentro de la válvula, especialmente si la
válvula esta automatizada. La bola puede girar repentinamente, poniéndolo en riego de
perder alguna parte del cuerpo. Siempre despresurice, desconecte y separe los
componentes de automatización antes de trabajar en la válvula.
9. Solo use partes originales del fabricante. Perderá toda garantía si no lo hace.
10. Consulte y siga todas las reglas locales aplicables.
Visite nuestra hoja web: www.worcester.com.mx.
TRAMPA DE ACEITE MODELO “TA-9000”
POS PARTE No CANT. DESCRIPCION

1 TA-9002 1 CUERPO
2 TA-9247 1 JUNTA SUPERIOR
3 TA-9014 1 TAPA
4 TA-9316 24 TORNILLO
5 TA-9518 24 TUERCA
6 TA-9001 1 ELEMENTO
7 TA-9024 1 VÁLVULA
8 TA-9442 1 TAPA SUPERIOR DEPOSITO
9 TA-9254 1 TUBO DE ACRILICO
10 TA-9172 1 TAPA INFERIOR DEPOSITO
11 TA-9018 12 VASTAGO
12 TA-9148 24 TUERCA
13 TA-9036 2 VÁLVULA
14 TA-9112 1 JUNTA INFERIOR

Manual Completo Veronesy

Cargado por

Información del documento

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Manual Completo Veronesy

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

SISTEMA DE "ALTO VACÍO",

1.1 CIRCUITO HIDRÁULICO

CAPÍTULO 3 ARRANQUE Y PARO

3.1 ARRANQUE DE LA UNIDAD

CAPÍTULO 4 IDENTIFICACIÓN Y CALIBRACIÓN

4.1 DATOS DE PLACA

6.1 DIAGRAMA DE FLUJO DIBUJO KF1333-01

CAPÍTULO 8 MANUAL SISTEMA DE VACÍO STOKES VACUUM

MODELO LMS 9/V

1.1 CIRCUITO HIDRÁULICO

1.2 CIRCUITO ELÉCTRICO

MODELO LMS 9/V

1.1 CIRCUITO HIDRÁULICO

POS. DESCRIPCIÓN MARCA CATÁLOGO

MODELO LMS 9/V

1.1 CIRCUITO HIDRÁULICO

POS. DESCRIPCIÓN MARCA CATÁLOGO

50 VÁLVULA ROMPEDORA DE ESPUMA

” MONTADO EN EL TABLERO DE CONTROL

MODELO LMS 9/V

MODELO LMS 9/V

2.1.1 CAPACIDAD NOMINAL

Por capacidad nominal, se entiende la capacidad de la unidad operándola sin vacío.

2.1.2 CAPACIDAD DE OPERACIÓN

q Sin modificar la posición de las válvulas ( 1, 2, 4 ), aumentará o disminuirá la alimentación

q Si se opera la unidad a alta temperatura, es posible que suba el nivel en la cámara de

q Si se opera la unidad a baja capacidad, faltará sello en el sistema, disminuirá el vacío en la

MODELO LMS 9/V

2.2 OPERACIÓN DE LA UNIDAD

2.2.2 RESISTENCIA DIELÉCTRICA

Si el vacío es muy alto, se presenta el problema de que la bomba de descarga ( 27 ) no tiene la

Si durante la operación normal de la unidad, aumenta la presión ( Manómetros 15 y

q Revise el filtro pulidor de cartuchos ( 16 ) y en caso necesario proceda a cambiar los

MODELO LMS 9/V

Si durante la operación normal de la unidad, aumenta la presión ( Manómetro 20 ) en el

2.2.6 PRESIÓN DE OPERACIÓN

q El primer punto de medición ( Manómetro 15 ) se localiza en la línea de alimentación

q El segundo punto de medición ( Manómetro 20 ) se localiza en la línea de alimentación

2.2.7 ACEITE DE LA BOMBA DE VACÍO

MODELO LMS 9/V

2.3 CONTROL DE NIVEL

En la operación de la unidad modelo LMS 9/V, para una correcta y confiable

q Un interruptor de nivel ( 24 / IBN ) para control de bajo nivel.

2.3.1 INTERRUPTOR DE BAJO NIVEL ( 24 / IBN )

Cuando el nivel de aceite en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) es más alto que el nivel

El timer retardador está programado en el PL C y actúa como retardador de la señal de arranque

MODELO LMS 9/V

2.3.2 INTERRUPTOR DE ALTO NIVEL ( 23 / IAN )

q Abre durante el mismo tiempo la válvula solenoide de la válvula re rompimiento de

q Al terminar el tiempo de paro, nuevamente se energiza la bomba de alimentación ( 8 ) y si

q Si al arrancar el equipo el nivel del aceite en la cámara de desgasificación ( 22 ) está más

MODELO LMS 9/V

La unidad modelo LMS 9/V, cuenta con la siguiente instrumentación:

2.4.1 INSTRUMENTOS DE FLUJO

Se instalaron los siguientes instrumentos de flujo:

q Una válvula solenoide ( 6 ) normalmente cerrada, instalada en la línea de alimentación del

q Un detector de flujo ( 7 ), instalado en la línea de alimentación del equipo, el cual actúa

q Un filtro de línea o filtro de espreas ( 19 ), instalado en la línea de alimentación de la

2.4.2 INSTRUMENTOS DE CONTROL DE TEMPERATURA

Se instalaron los siguientes instrumentos de control y medición de temperatura:

q Un termómetro de lectura en sitio ( 14 ) localizado en la línea de salida del calentador

q Un pirómetro de control ( 13 / PC ), instalado en el tablero de control, el cual actúa como

q Un termostato de emergencia ( 12 / TE ), instalado en el interior del calentador, el cual se

MODELO LMS 9/V